PTX_UM_SL4M_T4M_251674N PTX UM SL4M T4M 251674N

PTX_UM_SL4M_T4M_251674N PTX_UM_SL4M_T4M_251674N

PTX_UM_SL4M_T4M_251674N PTX_UM_SL4M_T4M_251674N

PTX_UM_SL4M_T4M_251674N PTX_UM_SL4M_T4M_251674N

User Manual: PTX_UM_SL4M_T4M_251674N

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 308 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Administrator’s Manual
SL4M™ and T4M™
RFID Smart Label and Thermal Printers
This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No
part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated
in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,
electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of
Printronix.
COPYRIGHT © 2007, 2013 PRINTRONIX, INC. All rights reserved.
Trademark Acknowledgements
SL4M and T4M are trademarks of Printronix, Inc.
Printronix, IGP, IGP/Auto Label Mapping, PGL, and PrintNet are registered
trademarks of Printronix, Inc.
HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
PCL is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
IBM is registered trademark of International Business Machines Corp.
MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Centronics is a registered trademark of Genicom Corporation.
IEEE is a registered service mark of the Institute of Electrical and Electronic
Engineers, Inc.
ANSI is a registered trademark of American National Standards Institute, Inc.
EIA is a registered service mark of Electronic Industries Association.
ZPL, ZPL II, and Zebra are registered trademarks of Zebra Technologies
Corporation.
TEC is a registered trademark of the Toshiba TEC Corporation.
Intermec is a registered trademark of the Intermec Technologies Corporation.
SATO is a registered trademark of SATO America, Inc.
DPL is a trademark and Datamax is a registered trademark of Datamax
Technologies Corporation.
Monarch is a registered trademark of Paxar Corporation.
IER is a registered trademark of IER Siège
Andalé is a registered trademark of Monotype Corporation.
1 Introduction ......................................................... 11
The SL4M/T4M Thermal Printer .......................................................... 11
Standard Features ........................................................................ 11
Optional Features.......................................................................... 12
Thermal Printer Technology ................................................................ 14
The Printing Process ..................................................................... 14
Manual Conventions ............................................................................ 14
Warnings and Special Information....................................................... 15
Related Documents ............................................................................. 15
Thermal Consumables......................................................................... 16
Media Selection............................................................................. 16
Ribbons ......................................................................................... 16
2 Operation ............................................................ 17
Unpacking the Printer .......................................................................... 17
Installation............................................................................................ 18
Power Cord Requirements ............................................................ 21
Setting Up the Printer .......................................................................... 21
Loading Ribbon ............................................................................. 22
Loading Roll Media ....................................................................... 25
Loading Fanfold Media.................................................................. 30
Operating Modes ................................................................................. 34
Controls and Indicators........................................................................ 35
Power Switch ................................................................................ 35
Powering On the Printer................................................................ 35
Control Panel ................................................................................ 36
Media Handling Modes ........................................................................ 40
Printhead Pressure Adjustment ........................................................... 41
Media Thickness Adjustment ........................................................ 41
Media Width Adjustment ............................................................... 42
Printhead Alignment...................................................................... 43
Positioning the Media Sensors ............................................................ 44
Sensing Different Media Types ..................................................... 46
Running Auto Calibrate........................................................................ 47
Running Media Profile ......................................................................... 48
Running Manual Calibrate ................................................................... 50
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
3 Standard Interfaces............................................. 53
Overview.............................................................................................. 53
Auto Switching ..................................................................................... 53
Parallel Interface.................................................................................. 54
Centronics ..................................................................................... 54
IEEE 1284 ..................................................................................... 56
Serial Interface..................................................................................... 59
RS-232 .......................................................................................... 59
4 Configuring the Printer ........................................ 61
Overview.............................................................................................. 61
Setting Printer Configuration Parameters ..................................... 61
Moving within the Configuration Menu .......................................... 61
Selecting a Menu Option............................................................... 63
Changing Printer Settings ............................................................. 64
Hidden Menus...................................................................................... 64
Menu Overview.................................................................................... 65
Main Menu ........................................................................................... 66
MEDIA SETUP Menu .......................................................................... 68
MEDIA SETUP Submenus............................................................ 69
SENSOR SETUP Menu....................................................................... 84
SENSOR SETUP Submenus........................................................ 85
EMULATION MENU ............................................................................ 91
Overview ....................................................................................... 91
EMULATION Submenus ............................................................... 97
PRINTER SETUP Menu .................................................................... 106
PRINTER SETUP Submenus ..................................................... 108
INTERFACES Menu .......................................................................... 117
INTERFACES Submenus ........................................................... 121
CONFIGURATION MENU ................................................................. 141
CONFIGURATION Submenus.................................................... 142
DIAGNOSTICS Menu ........................................................................ 144
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus ......................................................... 145
Saving a Configuration ...................................................................... 148
Auto Save Configuration.................................................................... 149
Specifying a Power-Up Configuration................................................ 150
Modifying a Saved Configuration....................................................... 152
Printing a Configuration ..................................................................... 154
Loading a Saved Configuration ......................................................... 155
Table of Contents
5 Downloading Software ...................................... 157
Loading Flash Memory ...................................................................... 157
Downloading Software with the Firmware Download Utility............... 158
Downloading Software through the Parallel Port ............................... 159
Downloading Software through the NIC ............................................ 160
Downloading Software through the NIC Using FTP .......................... 162
Downloading Software through the USB Port.................................... 164
Downloading Software through the Printronix Windows Driver ......... 165
Downloading Software If Flash Contains Only Boot or
Corrupt Code ..................................................................................... 166
Using TrueType Fonts ....................................................................... 167
Downloading TrueType Fonts............................................................ 167
Printronix Windows Driver ........................................................... 167
PGL Emulation (Online) .............................................................. 168
Download Mode .......................................................................... 168
PTX_SETUP ............................................................................... 171
Labeling Applications .................................................................. 171
Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus ....................................... 172
Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts .................................. 172
6 Routine Care and Troubleshooting ................... 175
Cleaning............................................................................................. 175
Exterior Cleaning......................................................................... 175
Interior Cleaning.......................................................................... 176
Cleaning the Printhead, Platen Roller, Media Sensors, and
Media Damper............................................................................. 176
Printer Tests ...................................................................................... 180
Troubleshooting Common Situations................................................. 180
Improving Processing Time......................................................... 180
Data Exchange............................................................................ 181
Controlling Print Quality............................................................... 182
Determining Printhead Wear....................................................... 182
Replacing the Printhead .................................................................... 183
Restore the Printer to Operation........................................................ 185
Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors.......................... 186
Solving Other Printer Problems................................................... 187
Printer Alarms ............................................................................. 195
Fault Messages........................................................................... 195
Status Messages......................................................................... 215
Table of Contents
A Specifications .................................................... 219
Print Method................................................................................ 219
Media .......................................................................................... 220
Ribbon......................................................................................... 222
Indicators and Switches .............................................................. 222
Memory ....................................................................................... 223
Optional Expanded Memory Cartridge........................................ 223
Media Cutter Option .................................................................... 223
Host Interfaces ............................................................................ 224
Power .......................................................................................... 224
Environmental ............................................................................. 225
Physical....................................................................................... 225
Acoustic Noise ............................................................................ 225
B Printer Options .................................................. 227
Hardware Options.............................................................................. 227
Interface Options ............................................................................... 229
Software Options ............................................................................... 229
Installing the QCMC........................................................................... 231
Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC ............................... 233
Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer .............. 235
Updating the Printer Configuration to the QCMC........................ 237
Loading New Firmware on the Printer......................................... 237
Installing the EMC.............................................................................. 238
Using the Standard Peel without Liner Rewinder .............................. 240
Configure The Printer Menu........................................................ 240
Load Media ................................................................................. 241
Using the Full Media Rewinder Option .............................................. 243
Configure the Printer Menu ......................................................... 243
Load Media ................................................................................. 243
Rewinder Full Sensor Setup ....................................................... 246
Using the Full Media Rewinder with 3 Inch Diameter
Core Adapters.................................................................................... 247
Configure the Printer Menu ......................................................... 247
Install the Core Adapters and Media Take-Up Core ................... 247
Load Media ................................................................................. 249
Rewinder Full Sensor Setup ....................................................... 251
Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder Option...................... 252
Configure The Printer Menu........................................................ 252
Load Media ................................................................................. 253
Removing Label Liner from the Rewinder................................... 257
Table of Contents
Supplies ............................................................................................. 258
Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons............................ 258
Genuine Printronix Media............................................................ 259
Ribbon and Media Usage............................................................ 260
C ASCII Control Codes......................................... 261
D PTX_SETUP Commands.................................. 263
Overview............................................................................................ 263
The PTX_SETUP Commands ........................................................... 263
General Commands .................................................................... 264
Thermal Commands.................................................................... 271
E Customer Support............................................. 273
Printronix Customer Support Center.................................................. 273
Printronix Supplies Department................................................... 273
Corporate Offices ........................................................................ 274
F Glossary............................................................ 275
G Communication Notices .................................... 281
Notices............................................................................................... 281
Communication Notices..................................................................... 283
Software License Agreement............................................................. 286
Limited Software Product Warranty ................................................... 292
Table of Contents
11
1Introduction
The SL4M/T4M Thermal Printer
NOTE: As used in this manual, the terms “SL4M/T4M” and “printer” refer to
all models within the series. “SL” refers to all SmartLine RFID models.
The SL4M/T4M series consists of a family of high quality, direct thermal and
thermal transfer printers specifically designed for printing labels and tags from
any MS-DOS®, Windows®, or ASCII based compatible computer.
The SL4M/T4M, Smart Ready, and SmartLine series are comprised of the
products detailed in Table 1.
NOTE: All models are RFID Ready.
Standard Features
•8MB Flash memory (fixed on controller PCBA)
•32MB DRAM memory (fixed on controller PCBA)
•Bar Codes: Supports over 30 types of bar codes.
•Download: Fonts, forms, and graphics to printer memory.
•Emulations:
•Printronix PGL®. Provides printer system commands for text,
barcodes, graphics, lines, and boxes.
•ZGL, TGL, IGL, STGL, DGL, MGL, and IEGL Interpreters:
ZGL (Zebra®), TGL (TEC®), IGL (Intermec®), STGL (SATO®),
DGL (Datamax®), MGL (Monarch®), and IEGL (IER Siège®)
interpreters are powerful integration tools that allow the SL/T5R to
function in virtually all legacy ZPL, TEC, IPL, SATO, DPL™, MPCL
II®, and IER® application environments without requiring modification
to host data stream.
Table 1. The SL4M/T4M Thermal Printer
Model Max Print
Speed (ips)
Printing
Density (dpi)
Max Print
Width (inches)
SL4M/T4M 10 203 4.1
SL4M/T4M 10 305 4.1
12
Chapter 1 The SL4M/T4M Thermal Printer
•Fanfold media handling
•High Resolution Printhead: 203 dpi or 305 dpi for sharp graphics and
text.
•Media capacity: Eight inch diameter roll media on three inch core
(203mm diameter on 76.2mm diameter core)
•Media sensing: Horizontal positioning for gap, notch, hole, or black mark
sensing.
•Print speeds: Up to 10 ips (both 203 and 305 dpi)
•Printheads: Snap-in, interchangeable 203 dpi and 305 dpi
•Printing: On demand single label and batch label
•Resident Fonts: Letter Gothic Bold (#93779), Courier Bold (#93952), CG
Triumvirate Bold Condensed (#92250), OCR-A (#90993), OCR-B
(#91409), CG Triumverate (#92244), CG Triumverate Bold (#92248), and
CG Times (#92500).
•Ribbon capacity: 450m on one inch core (4.5 µm ribbon thickness)
•Standard Interfaces:
•Serial: RS-232
•USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus
•Parallel: Centronics®-compatible parallel, IEEE® 1284 compliant
parallel
•Thermal Transfer and Direct Thermal Printing
•Ventless System: for operation in environments with airborne particulate
matter without compromising performance.
Optional Features
•Expanded Memory Cartridge (EMC): The expanded memory cartridge
(EMC) is a user installable option. The EMC can be ordered in any of
these configurations as a factory option kit or as a field upgrade kit:
•Expanded Memory - 32MB Expanded Memory Cartridge that
provides additional Flash memory for forms, logos, and fonts
(see “Optional Expanded Memory Cartridge” on page 223).
•Asian TrueType® Fonts - Separate cartridges containing fonts for
Simplified Chinese, Korean, or Japanese allows PGL or ZGL to print
complex Double Byte Character Set (DBCS) characters (see “DBCS
Character Sets and Fonts” on page 229).
•Andalé TrueType® Fonts - Separate cartridges containing Andalé
TrueType® fonts allowing PGL or ZGL to print characters for virtually
every language used in the world today, including simplified and
traditional Chinese, Japanese, and Korean. (see “Andalé Fonts” on
page 229).
Optional Features
13
•Quick Change Memory Cartridge (QCMC) - This cartridge option
provides an easy way to copy a printer’s firmware and configuration
settings from one printer to another. A “snapshot image” of the
source printer is stored on the QCMC and a simple interface is
provided to copy that image to a target printer. Once the image has
been copied to the target printer, the two printers will be identically
configured. The QCMC has its own resident network MAC address
that will be used in place of the printer’s LAN/WLAN MAC address
when the cartridge is left installed in a printer (see “Quick Change
Memory Cartridge (QCMC)” on page 230).
When left installed in the printer, the QCMC adds approximately
24 MByte of Flash memory.
•Full Media Rewinder: In batch rewind mode, rewinds printed labels into
a removable roll.
•Label Taken Sensor: Detects presence and removal of labels in Peel-Off
mode. Included only with the Standard Peel without Liner Rewinder or
Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder options.
•Media Cutter: Automatically cuts printed media when the media exits the
printer.
•Network Interface Card (NIC): Allows you to attach the printer to a LAN
(Local Area Network) rather than attaching it directly to a host computer.
The PrintNet Enterprise Suite (PNE) remote management software is
standard with this option.
NIC adapters are available as user installable option, mounted inside the
printer with the 10/100Base-T (UTP) connection only.
NOTE: In this manual, the terms Network Interface Card (NIC) and Ethernet
are used interchangeably.
•NIC, Wireless: Provides wireless 802.11b/g connectivity without
expensive cabling and reconfigurations required from a wired network.
PNE is standard with this option.
•Real Time Clock: A clock chip with internal battery that keeps track of the
year, month, day, hour, minute, and second values. It continues to
operate when the printer is off.
•RFID MP2 (Standard Pitch) Encoder: The RFID (Radio Frequency
Identification) UHF encoder reads and writes information to smart labels
(with embedded RFID tags) with a pitch typically two and six inches.
These labels are used on shipping cartons and pallets.
•RFID Short Pitch Encoder: The RFID (Radio Frequency Identification)
UHF encoder reads and writes information to the smart labels (with
embedded RFID tags) with a pitch of one to two inches. The RFID inlay is
usually short in length and constructed into an item level label.
•Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder: In label peel-off mode, peels off
labels one at a time before printing the next label and rewinds the liner
into a discardable roll.
•Standard Peel without Liner Rewinder: The Peel-Off mode peels labels
while discarding the dispensed liner in front of the printer.
For more information about printer options, see Appendix B on page 227.
14
Chapter 1 Thermal Printer Technology
Thermal Printer Technology
Quiet and fast, with excellent print quality, your multifunction thermal printer
uses an inline thermal printhead. The thermal printer operates differently from
a line matrix or laser printer, because the thermal printer uses a printhead with
heating elements and special paper or ribbon.
The Printing Process
The thermal printhead allows two modes of operation:
•Direct Thermal
During direct thermal printing, the thermal printhead selectively heats
small, rectangular thermal dots. When these contact the coated thermal
paper, the dyes and developers in the coating react to the heat and
develop an image. This mode of printing is generally used for short-term
labeling applications.
•Thermal Transfer
During thermal transfer printing, the heated thermal dots contact a
thermal ribbon. The heat reacts with the ribbon and bonds the image to
the paper. This method is used especially for abrasive, long-storage
applications and for specialized applications, such as in extreme
environmental conditions or where tamper-proofing is required.
Manual Conventions
•Operator panel keys are often shown by their symbol or icon (located on
the control panel directly below the key).
Example: Press the ↵ key for ENTER.
•LCD fault messages display the specific fault in uppercase letters.
A corrective action in upper and lowercase letters displays below the fault
message.
Example: PAPER OUT
Load Paper
•Key combinations are indicated by the + (plus) symbol.
Example: Press the Up key + Down key at the same time.
15
Warnings and Special Information
For your safety and to protect valuable equipment, read and comply with all
information highlighted under special headings:
WARNING
Conditions that could harm you and damage the equipment.
CAUTION
Conditions that could damage the printer or related equipment.
IMPORTANT
Information vital to proper operation of the printer.
NOTE: Information and helpful tips about printer operation.
Related Documents
The following documents are available at www.printronix.com.
•User’s Guide — Explains how to unpack, install, and set up the printer.
•Maintenance Manual — Explains how to maintain and repair the line
matrix printer at the field service level of maintenance.
•PGL Programmer's Reference Manual — Provides information used with
the optional IGP Printronix emulation enhancement feature.
•ZGL™ Programmer’s Reference Manual — Provides information for the
printer to function in the legacy ZPL application environment without
requiring modification to host data stream.
•TGL™ Programmer’s Reference Manual — Provides information for the
printer to function in the legacy TEC application environment without
requiring modification to host data stream.
•IGL™ Programmer’s Reference Manual — Provides information for the
printer to function in the legacy IPL application environment without
requiring modification to host data stream.
•STGL™ Programmer’s Reference Manual — Provides information for the
printer to function in the legacy SGL application environment without
requiring modification to host data stream.
•DGL™ Programmer’s Reference Manual — Provides information for the
printer to function in the legacy DGL application environment without
requiring modification to host data stream.
•MGL™ Programmer’s Reference Manual — Provides information for the
printer to function in the legacy MGL application environment without
requiring modification to host data stream.
•IEGL® Programmer’s Reference Manual — Provides information for the
printer to function in the legacy IER application environment without
requiring modification to host data stream.
•PXML Application Developer Reference Manual — Provides information
for printers to be managed remotely by a management model.
16
Chapter 1 Thermal Consumables
•Network Interface Card User's Manual — Information about network
protocols, configuration, and operation.
•PrintNet Enterprise Suite User’s Manual — Information about the remote
management software utility which allows you to organize all of the
printers in your office remotely in a single database, download software
and printer settings from a host computer with a single mouse click.
•XML Direct for Oracle Quick Start Guide — Explains the use of the XML
language with the Printronix® SL4M/T4M XML Direct printer.
•XML Direct for SAP Quick Setup Guide — Explains the use of the XML
language with the Printronix SL4M/T4M XML Direct printer.
•RFID Label Reference Manual — Explains the use of the Printronix
SL4M/T4M printer and RFID label application.
Thermal Consumables
Media Selection
Since there are two print modes of operation, there are two kinds of thermal
media:
•Direct thermal media
•Thermal transfer media
Direct thermal media is paper coated with special chemicals that act as an
accelerator, acceptor dye, and binder. During direct thermal mode, the heat
from the thermal printhead contacts the paper, causing a chemical reaction
which results in a printed image.
Thermal transfer media requires ribbon. A wide range of Printronix thermal
transfer media is available, such as film or synthetic paper substitutes. Most
of these media options can be die-cut for easy label applications. The wide
selection of media sizes and face stocks have been tested with Printronix
ribbons for print quality and usage. Consult your Genuine Printronix Supplies
Catalog, see “Printronix Customer Support Center” on page 273, or access
the Printronix web page at www.printronix.com.
NOTE: The term “media” used in this manual refers to all the different kinds
of label or tag stock that can be used in the printer.
See “Genuine Printronix Media” on page 259 for more information.
Ribbons
Printronix offers a wide range of ribbons specifically engineered to enhance
printing capabilities and to prevent premature printhead wear. Therefore, you
should use a Genuine Printronix Thermal Ribbon in your printer.
See “Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons” on page 258 for more
information.
17
2Operation
Unpacking the Printer
The printer is shipped in a carton and protective bag. The top lid of the carton
has instructions for removing the internal packing material. Keep all packing
material in case repacking is required.
CAUTION
Avoid touching the electrical connectors to prevent electrostatic
discharge damage while setting up the printer. The discharge of
accumulated electrostatic energy can damage or destroy the printhead
or electronic components used in this device.
Shipping Container
Packing Material (4)
Printer
Accessories
Plastic Bag
Lifting Strap (2)
18
Chapter 2 Installation
1. Place the shipping container upright on a flat, level surface.
2. Open the box and remove the first layer of packing material along with
any lose items.
3. Remove the accessories box and set it aside.
4. Pull the printer out of the shipping container by using the two plastic
straps as handles.
5. Remove the bands and plastic bag.
6. Check that all components on the packing list are included.
Installation
The following sections will guide you through the printer installation process.
1. Place the printer on a flat level surface that allows easy access to all sides
of the printer.
CAUTION
Never operate the printer on its side or upside down.
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
WARNING
Failure to properly ground the printer may result in electric shock to the
operator.
In compliance with international safety standards, this printer has been
equipped with a three-pronged power cord. When inserted in a correctly
wired power outlet, the ground conductor will ensure that the printer
chassis is at ground (earth) potential. Do not use adapter plugs or
remove the grounding prong from the cable plug. If an extension cord is
required, ensure that a three-wire cable with a properly grounded plug is
used.
3. Attach the AC power cord to the AC power receptacle in the back of the
printer.
4. Attach the AC power cord to a grounded (three prong) electrical outlet of
the proper voltage. See “Power Cord Requirements” on page 21.
5. Attach Communication Interface:
a. Parallel Interface
Attach a suitable parallel printer cable from the computer to the
Centronics/IEEE 1284 interface connector at the back of the printer.
Snap the bail locks to the Centronics connector to secure the
interface cable to the printer.
b. Serial Interface
Attach a suitable serial printer cable from the computer to the DB-9
RS-232 serial interface connector at the back of the printer. For
additional information on serial cable wiring, refer to “Routine Care
and Troubleshooting” on page 175.
19
c. USB
Attach a USB cable with noise suppresion filters on BOTH ends from
the computer to the USB connector at the back of the printer.
d. NIC Connection
Insert a suitable NIC cable from your hub or switch to the NIC
connector located in the I/O panel in the rear of your printer.
NOTE: The printer supports simultaneous connection of the parallel, serial,
USB, and NIC interfaces using the Auto Switching feature.
Auto Switching is described on page 53.
Parallel Interface
Serial Interface
RS-232
Ethernet Interface
(optional)
Interface Panel with Ethernet Option
USB Connection
20
Chapter 2 Installation
Wireless Interface Panel
Wireless
Antenna
Wireless
Interface
Power Cord Requirements
21
Power Cord Requirements
In compliance with international safety standards, this printer is equipped with
a three-pronged electrical plug on the power cord. When this power cord is
plugged into a correctly wired power outlet, the ground conductor ensures that
the printer chassis is at ground (earth) electrical potential.
WARNING
Failure to properly ground the printer can result in electrical shock to
the operator.
Never use adapter plugs without grounding prong. Never remove the
grounding prong from the power cable plug. If using an extension cord,
verify it is a three-wire cable with a properly grounded plug.
Setting Up the Printer
NOTE: This section describes the procedures for loading various types of
ribbon and media. You can also refer to instructions on the printer
itself, on a label on the inside of the media cover.
The term “media” in this manual refers to all the different kinds of paper, label,
or tag stock material that can be printed on by the printer. Your thermal printer
can print on continuous paper, adhesive backed labels, or non-adhesive tags
packaged in roll or fanfold form.
IMPORTANT
For best results, use only genuine Printronix supplies. See “Supplies”
on page 258.
CAUTION
DO NOT TOUCH the printhead or the electronic components under the
pivoting deck. The discharge of electrostatic energy that accumulates
on the surface of the human body or other surfaces can damage or
destroy the printhead or electronic components used in this device.
CAUTION
Do not close the pivoting deck without label stock installed between the
printhead and the platen, because debris on the platen may damage the
printhead.
CAUTION
Avoid touching the electrical connectors while setting up the printer to
prevent electrostatic discharge damage. The discharge of accumulated
electrostatic energy can damage or destroy the printhead or electronic
components used in this printer.
IMPORTANT
Adhesive backed labels that DO NOT lay flat on the liner can jam the
printer. This can cause the label to peel off the liner. The exposed edges
can stick to the label guides and rollers inside the printer.
If you run out of labels while printing, do not turn off the printer while
reloading labels, because you can lose data.
22
Chapter 2 Setting Up the Printer
Loading Ribbon
For direct thermal media (no ribbon required), go to page 25.
IMPORTANT
Clean the printhead, platen roller, and media sensor every time you
change the ribbon. See “Cleaning the Printhead, Platen Roller, Media
Sensors, and Media Damper” on page 176.
1. Raise the media cover.
2. Install the ribbon take-up core on the ribbon take-up spindle.
NOTE: The first ribbon take-up core comes with the printer. Thereafter, move
the empty core from the ribbon supply spindle to the take-up spindle
after the ribbon is used up.
3. Slide the ribbon roll onto the ribbon supply spindle until it is flush with the
flange.
4. Open the pivoting deck and printhead by rotating the deck lock lever fully
counterclockwise until the deck and printhead swing upward.
Ribbon
Roll
Ribbon
Supply Spindle
Deck Lock Lever
Pivoting
Deck
Ribbon
Take-Up Core
Ribbon
Take-Up Spindle
Media Cover
Flange
Loading Ribbon
23
5. Thread the end of the ribbon under the ribbon guide rollers, between the
platen (rubber drive roller) and the printhead, and between the ribbon
take-up and supply spindles.
NOTE: Make sure to thread the ribbon behind the ribbon take-up spindle.
NOTE: The alternate ribbon path is for inside ink ribbon.
Printhead
Ribbon Guide
Roller (2)
Ribbon
Ribbon
Supply Spindle
Ribbon
Take-Up Spindle
Ribbon Take-Up
Core
Alternate Ribbon
Path
Platen (not shown)
24
Chapter 2 Setting Up the Printer
IMPORTANT
Never attach the ribbon to the ribbon take-up spindle without a ribbon
take-up core installed.
6. Attach the ribbon to the ribbon take-up core on the ribbon take-up spindle
with tape.
7. Manually rotate the take-up spindle counterclockwise until the ribbon
leader has passed the printhead.
8. Rotate the deck lock lever fully clockwise to close the pivoting deck, and
attached printhead.
Ribbon
Take-Up Spindle
Ribbon
Take-Up Core
Deck Lock Lever
Ribbon Leader
Pivoting Deck
Printhead
Loading Roll Media
25
Loading Roll Media
IMPORTANT
If you are using direct thermal mode, clean the printhead, platen roller,
and lower media sensor every time you change the media. See
“Cleaning the Printhead, Platen Roller, Media Sensors, and Media
Damper” on page 176.
1. Slide the media hanger guide outward to the end of the media hanger as
shown.
2. Remove and dispose of any empty media core.
3. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully
counterclockwise.
Media Hanger
Guide
Deck Lock Lever
Pivoting Deck
Media Cover
Media Hanger
26
Chapter 2 Setting Up the Printer
4. Place the media roll onto the media hanger and slide the media roll until it
is flush with the printer’s side wall.
NOTE: For information regarding smart labels, refer to the RFID Labeling
Reference Manual.
5. Slide the media hanger guide against the media roll to prevent horizontal
travel, but make sure the media roll can rotate freely.
Media Roll
Media Hanger
Guide
Media Hanger
Side Wall
Loading Roll Media
27
6. Thread the media under the media damper, through the media sensor
assembly, and then between the platen (rubber drive roller) and the
printhead.
NOTE: The alternate media path is for inside wound label media.
CAUTION
If the blue media width guide locking knob is too loose or is removed,
the media width guide will fall off the printer.
7. Turn the blue media width guide locking knob counterclockwise just
enough to slide the media width guide, and no more.
8. Position the media width guide lightly against the outside edge of the
installed media and tighten the blue locking knob by turning it clockwise.
Media
Printhead
Platen
(not shown)
Media Damper
Media
Width Guide
Media Sensor
Assembly
Blue Locking
Knob Alternate
Media Path
28
Chapter 2 Setting Up the Printer
9. Check the horizontal position of the media sensor assembly
(see “Positioning the Media Sensors” on page 44).
10. Align the left (inside) edge of the media with the inside media edge guide.
NOTE: If you have the standard peel option, batch label rewinder (with or
without the optional 3 inch core adapters), or peel-liner rewinder, see
“Using the Standard Peel without Liner Rewinder” on page 240,
“Using the Full Media Rewinder Option” on page 243,
“Using the Full Media Rewinder with 3 Inch Diameter Core Adapters”
on page 247, or
“Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder Option” on page 252
to complete the threading.
Media Sensor Assembly
Inside Media
Edge Guide
Media
(left edge)
Loading Roll Media
29
11. Rotate the deck lock lever fully clockwise to close the pivoting deck.
This locks the pivoting deck and printhead into print position.
IMPORTANT
Ensure the printhead is down and locked before attempting to advance
media or print. Failure to do so will cause the “PRINT HEAD UP Close
Print Head” fault message to display.
12. Verify that Print Mode in the printer configuration menu is set for the
media type installed (Direct or Transfer). The Print Mode submenu is
located in the MEDIA SETUP menu. See “MEDIA SETUP Menu” on
page 68 for details.
13. Verify the Gap/Mark Sensor selection matches the type of media
installed. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on page 46.
•If you have not run an Auto Calibrate, do so now. See “Running Auto
Calibrate” on page 47.
•If you have already run an Auto Calibrate, complete the following
steps:
a. Close the media cover.
b. Press the (Feed) key once to verify that the media
advances.
c. Press the (Pause) key to place the printer online.
30
Chapter 2 Setting Up the Printer
Loading Fanfold Media
1. Open the media cover.
2. Slide the media hanger guide outward to the end of the media hanger.
3. Place the fanfold media either behind or beneath the printer, depending
on the desired fanfold supply location. Insert the first few labels through
either the rear or bottom panel opening.
4. Place the media over the media hanger, flush against the back of the
printer.
5. Slide the media hanger guide against the outer edge of the fanfold media
to prevent horizontal travel.
6. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully
counterclockwise until the deck and printhead swing upward.
Media
Hanger Guide
Fanfold
Media
Media Hanger
Deck Lock
Lever
Pivoting Deck
Media Cover
Bottom Panel
Opening
Media Damper
Loading Fanfold Media
31
7. Thread the media under the media damper, through the media sensor
assembly, and then between the platen (rubber drive roller) and the
printhead. You can also refer to the label inside the media cover for media
loading instructions.
CAUTION
If the media width guide locking knob is too loose or is removed, the
media width guide will fall off the printer.
8. Turn the media width guide locking knob counterclockwise just enough to
slide the media width guide, and no more.
9. Position the metal guide lightly against the outside edge of the installed
media and tighten the locking knob by turning it clockwise.
10. Check the horizontal position of the media sensor assembly
(see “Positioning the Media Sensors” on page 44).
Media Sensor
Assembly
Media Sensor
Handle
Media
Damper
Platen
Media Width
Guide
Locking Knob
32
Chapter 2 Setting Up the Printer
11. Align the left (inside) edge of the media with the inside media edge guide.
Inside Media
Edge Guide
Media
(left edge)
Loading Fanfold Media
33
12. Close the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise.
IMPORTANT
Ensure the pivoting deck is down and locked before attempting to
advance media or print. Failure to do so will cause the “PRINT HEAD UP
Close Print Head” fault message to display.
13. Verify that Print Mode submenu is set for the media type installed (direct
or transfer). The Print Mode submenu is located in the MEDIA SETUP
menu. See “Main Menu” on page 66 for more information. Also, if thermal
transfer media is installed, see “Loading Ribbon” on page 22.
14. Verify the Gap/Mark Sensor selection matches the type of media
installed. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on page 46.
Deck Lock
Lever
Pivoting Deck
34
Chapter 2 Operating Modes
For direct thermal operation (no ribbon required) or thermal transfer
operation (ribbon required):
•If you have not run an Auto Calibrate, do so now. See “Running Auto
Calibrate” on page 47.
•If you have already run an Auto Calibrate, complete the following
steps:
a. Close the media cover.
b. Press the (Feed) key once to verify that the media
advances.
c. Press the (Pause) key to place the printer online.
NOTE: When changing to Online mode, if the operator has changed menu
items, but not saved the changes in a configuration, the operator will
be prompted to save the changes.
Operating Modes
The current operating mode can be selected through the control panel keys or
can result from routine operations such as powering on the printer.
Online: In online mode, the printer can receive and print data sent from the
host. Pressing the Pause key toggles the printer between the online and
offline modes. The ONLINE status indicator is lit green in online mode.
Offline: In offline mode, you can perform operator functions such as loading
media or changing ribbon. Pressing the Pause key toggles the printer from
offline to online mode. The ONLINE status indicator is not illuminated in offline
mode.
Menu: Pressing the MENU key takes the printer offline and into Menu mode.
In this mode, you can navigate through all configuration and status menus
and change the printer configuration.
Fault: In fault mode, a fault condition exists that must be cleared before
printing can continue. The FAULT status indicator flashes red, the alarm
beeps (if configured to do so), and a descriptive fault message displays. The
ONLINE status indicator turns off.
The fault must be corrected first and then the message cleared by pressing
the Pause key before normal printing can continue.
Power Switch
35
Controls and Indicators
Power Switch
The power switch is located on the bottom front panel of the printer. To apply
power, place the switch in the | (On) position. When you first power on the
printer, a series of initialization messages will appear on the LCD (Liquid
Crystal Display) on the control panel.
To remove power, place the power switch in the O (Off) position.
Powering On the Printer
When you power on the printer, it executes a self-test. During the self-test, the
LCD momentarily displays the DPI resolution (203 or 305 DPI) of the installed
printhead. The default power-on state is online. Once the printer has
successfully initialized, the ONLINE status indicator light illuminates, and the
LCD indicates ONLINE, the printer model (SL4M/T4M), the printhead installed
(203 or 305 dpi), the communication interface, and the emulation selected.
If there is a fault during the self-test, the FAULT (!) status indicator flashes,
and a fault message appears on the display. The alarm may also sound, if
configured to do so.
36
Chapter 2 Controls and Indicators
Control Panel
The control panel is located on the front of the printer and includes an LCD,
indicators, and control keys (buttons).
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
A backlighted LCD that will display up to four rows of 16 characters each or
eight rows of 21 characters each.
Pause Key
The Pause key toggles the printer between Online and Offline Modes.
The key performs the following in Online, Offline, Fault, and Menu modes:
•Online Mode – sets the printer to Offline Mode.
•Offline Mode – sets the printer to Online Mode.
•Fault Mode – causes the printer to recheck the faults; if the faults have
been cleared, the printer toggles to the Offline mode.
•Menu Mode – sets the printer to Offline Mode.
NOTE: When changing to Online mode, if the operator has changed menu
items, but not saved the changes in a configuration, the operator will
be prompted to save the changes.
Online Indicator Fault Indicator
LCD (Liquid
Crystal Display)
Left Key
Up Key
Down Key
Enter Key
Pause Key
Menu Key
Right Key
Feed Key
Cancel Key
NOTE: Press the Down
and ↵ (Enter) keys at the
same time to lock or
unlock the ↵ key.
Control Panel
37
Feed Key
The Feed Key advances the media one label length in Online and Offline
Mode. If there is data in the printer, the printer will print the data before
ejecting the label. This key is inactive in all other modes.
Menu Key
In Online, Offline, or Fault modes, the Menu key causes the printer to enter
the Menu mode and the top level menu icons to display. In Menu mode, the
Menu key will move to the first Icon position in the top level Icon menu. This
key is inactive in all other modes.
Cancel Key
If enabled, the Cancel key clears all data in the printer data buffer in Offline
mode. In Menu mode, this key moves up to the previous higher level menu.
↵ Enter Key
•In Menu mode (at the icon menu level): pressing the Enter key will move
down into the menu tree for the highlighted icon.
•Within a menu tree: if the highlighted menu contains submenus instead of
a selectable parameter, pressing the Enter key will move down into the
submenus of that menu. If the highlighted menu is a display only menu
then pressing the Enter key performs no function. If the highlighted menu
has selectable parameters, pressing the unlocked Enter key will select
the displayed parameter. An asterisk (*) displays next to the selected
parameter.
If the highlighted menu is an executable menu, pressing the unlocked
Enter key will cause the function associated with the executable menu to
run. If the Enter key is locked, pressing the Enter key for highlighted
menus that are executable or contain selectable parameters will cause a
momentary display of THE ↵ KEY IS LOCKED message.
NOTE: Press the Down and ↵ key at the same time to lock/unlock the ↵ key.
For special Network Address menus or String menus, pressing the Enter
key will move down into a special multiple segment setting menu. Exit this
menu by pressing Enter again to save the changes or Cancel to exit
without saving the changes. This key is inactive in all other modes.
38
Chapter 2 Controls and Indicators
Up Key
In Menu mode (at the icon menu level), this key will move to the next row of
icons. If on the bottom row it will move up the top row of icons. If at the top of
the menu tree, pressing the Up key will go to the bottom of the menu tree.
Within each menu, this key will scroll to the previous submenu in the menu
tree.
If in special multiple segment setting menus for Network Address menus or
string menus, pressing the Up key will increment the segment or character
value. If at the top of the segment or character value range, pressing the Up
key will go to the bottom of that value range.
In Offline mode, the Up key takes you to the Load Config. menu.
See “Loading a Saved Configuration” Method 1 on page 155.
This key is inactive in all other states. This key is typematic and if held down
will start to accelerate.
Down Key
In Menu mode (at the icon menu level), this key will move to the next row of
icons. If on the top row it will move to the bottom row of icons. If at the bottom
of the menu tree, pressing the Down key will go to the top of the menu tree.
Within each menu, this key will scroll to the next submenu in the menu tree.
If in special multiple segment setting menus for Network Address menus or
String menus, pressing the Down key will decrement the segment or
character value. If at the bottom of the segment or character value range,
pressing the Down key will go to the top of that value range.
This key is inactive in all other states. This key is typematic and if held down
will start to accelerate.
Right Key
In Offline mode, this key adjusts the display brightness of the LCD. In Menu
mode (at the icon menu level), this key will advance from one menu icon to
the next menu icon. If at the end of one row of icons it will move to the
beginning of the other row of icons.
Within a menu tree, if the highlighted menu has a selectable parameter,
pressing the Right key causes the parameter to increment or display the next
parameter on the list. If at the top of the parameter range, pressing the Right
key will move to the bottom of the parameter range.
If in special multiple segment setting menus for Network Address menus or
String menus, pressing the Right key will move to the next segment or
character without losing changes made to the current segment or character.
If at the end of the segments or characters, pressing the Right key will go to
the beginning of the segments or characters. None of the changes to the
segments or characters will take effect until the Enter Key is pressed.
This key is inactive in all other states. This key is typematic and if held down
will start to accelerate.
Control Panel
39
Left Key
In Offline mode, this key adjusts the display brightness of the LCD. In Menu
mode (at the icon menu level), this key will advance from one menu icon to
the previous menu icon. If at the beginning of one row of icons it will move to
the end of the other row of icons.
Within a menu tree, if the highlighted menu has a selectable parameter,
pressing the Left key causes the parameter to decrement or display the
previous parameter on the list. If at the bottom of the parameter range,
pressing the Left key will move to the top of the parameter range.
If in special multiple segment setting menus for Network Address menus or
String menus, pressing the Left key will move to the previous segment or
character without losing changes made to the current segment or character.
If at the beginning of the segments or characters, pressing the Left key will go
to the end of the segments or characters. None of the changes to the
segments or characters will take effect until the Enter Key is pressed.
This key is inactive in all other states. This key is typematic and if held down
will start to accelerate.
Combination Keys
•Menu Unlock Combo Key
A combination key whose default setting is the Enter and Down keys
pressed simultaneously. In Menu mode, this key toggles locking and
unlocking of the Enter key. This key is inactive in all other modes. When
the Enter key is locked it prevents the operator from modifying the menu
settings. The default is the Enter and Down keys.
NOTE: To change the default menu lock/unlock combo keys to a different
key or combination, select PRINTER SETUP Set Lock Key.
Admin User must be enabled for the Set Lock Key option to display.
•Soft Reset Combo Key
A combination key that causes the printer to perform a soft reset by
pressing the Left and Right keys simultaneously in Offline and Menu
modes. This combo key is inactive in all other modes.
•Download Combo Key
A combination key that places the printer in download mode.
See “Downloading Software with the Firmware Download Utility” on
page 158.
Online Indicator
Indicates when the printer is online or offline. The online indicator stays lit
when the printer is online, ready to print and blinks while accepting data from
the host.
(!) Fault Indicator
Flashes during a fault condition.
40
Chapter 2 Media Handling Modes
Media Handling Modes
Before you load media, you must decide which media handling mode to use:
•Tear-Off Strip (factory default). Printer prints on the media and sends it
out the front until the print buffer is empty, then positions the last label
over the tear bar for removal.
•Continuous. Prints on the media and sends it out the front of the printer.
•Peel-Off. Prints and peels die-cut labels from the liner without assistance.
The printer waits for you to take away the label before printing the next
one (on-demand printing). Supported only when Standard Peel or
Peel-Liner Rewinder option is installed. When either option is installed
with liner attached, a “Remove Label” message will display to remind you
to remove the label before the next one can be printed.
NOTE: This mode is only supported when the Standard Peel without Liner
Rewinder option or Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder option is
installed.
NOTE: If the Peel-Off option is not installed, the error message “OPTION
NOT INSTALLED” displays. Requires the Standard Peel with or
without Liner Rewinder options to be installed.
•Cut. When the optional media cutter is installed, it automatically cuts
media after each label is printed or after a specified number of labels
have been printed when a software cut command has been issued. It cuts
continuous roll paper, labels, or tag stock.
NOTE: The Cut option is not allowed if the cutter is not installed. The error
message “OPTION NOT INSTALLED” displays.
•Rewind. In rewind mode the printer unwinds the media from the media
supply roll or fanfold label stack, prints the labels, and rewinds the printed
media and its carrier web onto the optional rewind spindle. For the
optional Rewinder, use “Rewind” for Batch Rewind mode (see “Using the
Full Media Rewinder Option” on page 243).
NOTE: “OPTION NOT INSTALLED” displays if the Full Media Rewinder
option is not installed.
Once you have decided on the mode, configure the printer. See Chapter 4 for
more information.
Media Thickness Adjustment
41
Printhead Pressure Adjustment
Media Thickness Adjustment
This procedure adjusts the printhead pressure to accommodate media of
different thicknesses. This will minimize printhead wear and optimize print
quality. The printhead pressure switch has two positions, high and normal.
Follow this procedure to adjust the media thickness:
1. Rotate the printhead balance adjustment dial until “A” appears in the
indicator window (see Detail A above).
NOTE: The dial must be set to “A”. If you have the dial set to a numerical
value, you cannot slide the printhead pressure switch.
2. Slide the printhead pressure switch to NORMAL or HIGH depending on
the media thickness (see Table 2). Make sure to slide the blue printhead
pressure switch completely to either side of the metal tab.
3. Adjust the media width by rotating the printhead balance adjustment dial
to the appropriate setting (see page 42). Do not leave the dial in the “A”
position.
Printhead Balance
Adjustment Dial
Printhead
Pressure
Switch (blue)
A
A
Metal Tab
Indicator
Window
Table 2. Media Thickness Adjustment
Media Setting Inches Millimeters
Thin paper, normal label, etc. NORMAL 0.003 to 0.008 0.076 to 0.200
Thick paper, tag stock, etc. HIGH 0.008 to 0.010 0.200 to 0.254
42
Chapter 2 Printhead Pressure Adjustment
Media Width Adjustment
Media width adjustment allows you to vary printhead pressure along the
platen from one end to the other. If the printhead pressure is out of balance,
the printed image will be darker on one side of the label than the other and the
media will travel in the direction with the least resistance.
The printhead balance adjustment dial is scaled in numerals to help you
balance adjustment based on the width of the media. The balance shown in
the indicator window is the active setting.
1. Determine the correct value based on the media width (see Table 3).
2. Rotate the printhead balance adjustment dial until the correct value
appears in the indicator window (see Detail B above).
Printhead Balance
Adjustment Dial
B
B
Indicator
Window
3
Table 3. Printhead Balance Adjustment Ranges
Printhead
Balance Dial
Setting
A1 to 2 2 to 4 4 to 5
Paper Width N/A (Used to adjust
the printhead
pressure switch only.
See page 41)
1.00 to 2.16 inches
(25mm to 55mm)
2.16 to 3.15 inches
(55mm to 80mm)
3.15 to 5.15 inches
(80mm to 131mm)
Printhead Alignment
43
Printhead Alignment
Align the printhead under the following conditions: to improve the print quality
when running difficult media with major differences in thickness, when
adjusting for media thickness (with the printhead pressure switch) did not
yield adequate print quality, or when you replace the printhead.
The printhead must be parallel with the platen for consistent image printing
across the label. If the printhead is misaligned, labels will print with uneven ink
distribution (i.e. splotches and fading ink). When you align the printhead, you
are moving the printhead forward and backward in relation to the platen.
1. Raise the media cover.
2. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully
counterclockwise.
Tool Clip
Pivoting Deck
Deck Lock
Lever
Printhead
Alignment Dial
Printhead
Alignment Tool
A
A
44
Chapter 2 Positioning the Media Sensors
3. Remove the printhead alignment tool (yellow screwdriver) from the tool
clip.
4. Use the printhead alignment tool to turn the printhead alignment dial.
Turn the printhead alignment dial UP for THICKER stocks and DOWN for
THINNER stocks.
5. Close the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise.
6. Run a print test, such as the checkerboard or gray scale.
See “Printer Tests” on page 145.
7. If necessary repeat steps 4 to 6 until the desired alignment is achieved.
8. Lower the media cover.
Positioning the Media Sensors
Your printer is equipped with a media sensor assembly that detects the
top-of-form position on media with label length indicators (gaps, notches,
holes, or black marks). These sensors also detect when a Paper Out
condition exists.
See page 221 for media and label length indicators.
The media sensors should not be placed in the path of media features that
could cause false gap detection or paper out faults. Such features are dark
pre-printing, rounded die-cut label corners, vertical gaps associated with
side-by-side labels, and extraneous cut-outs, as shown below.
Vertical Gap and
Rounded Die-cut
Label Corners
Extraneous Cut-out
Dark Pre-printing
Position the media
sensors in either of
the grey shaded
areas.
45
Sensing Media with Horizontal Black Marks or Inboard
Notches
1. Use the media sensor handle to horizontally position the media sensor
assembly so that the sensor indicators (embossed on both sides) are
aligned with the reference marks on the media.
2. Select Mark in the Gap/Mark Sensor submenu under the SENSOR
SETUP menu. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on page 46.
NOTE: If using media with shallow notches, i.e. notches that are cut short
where the media sensor cannot be adjusted to detect the notch, be
sure to select Mark in the Gap/Mark Sensor submenu under
SENSOR SETUP menu. For Mark sensing, the ribbon must be
loaded, see “Loading Ribbon” on page 22.
3. Perform an Auto Calibrate. See “Running Auto Calibrate” on page 47.
Sensing Media with No Label Length Indicators
1. When using media without label length indicators (no gaps, notches,
holes, or marks) or when you want to ignore all existing length indicators,
place the media sensor in the center of the media so it can detect when a
Paper Out condition exists.
2. Select Disable in the Gap/Mark Sensor submenu under SENSOR
SETUP. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on page 46.
3. Perform an Auto Calibrate. See “Running Auto Calibrate” on page 47.
Media Sensor
Handle
Media Sensor
Assembly
Media
Mark Sensor Indicator
(both sides) Gap Sensor Indicator
(both sides)
46
Chapter 2 Positioning the Media Sensors
Sensing Media with Gapped Liner
1. Use the media sensor handle to horizontally position the media sensor
assembly so that the sensor indicators (embossed on both sides) are
aligned with the reference marks on the media.
2. Select Gap in the Gap/Mark Sensor submenu under the SENSOR
SETUP menu. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on page 46.
3. Perform an Auto Calibrate. See “Running Auto Calibrate” on page 47.
Sensing Different Media Types
The printer’s media sensors can detect the different types of label length
indicators on a large variety of media types. This is accomplished by selecting
the correct sensor option: Gap, Mark, or Disable under Gap/Mark Sensor in
the SENSOR SETUP menu. Figure 5 on page 221 illustrates the different
media types and label length indicators used on them.
1. Press to place the printer in Menu mode.
2. Press the Down + ↵ (Enter) keys together until “THE ↵ KEY IS
UNLOCKED” displays.
3. Press the Right key until SENSOR SETUP displays.
4. Press ↵ to enter the SENSOR SETUP.
5. Press the Down key until Gap*Mark Sensor displays.
6. Press Left or Right keys until the option that matches the type of label
length indicators on the installed media displays:
•Mark. Select when using media that has horizontal black marks
located on the underside of the label liner or tag stock or narrow width
inboard notches.
•Gap. Select when using media with a liner space between die-cut
labels or when using tag stock with holes or wide inboard notches as
label length indicators on white background media.
•Disable. Select when using media with no label length indicators (no
gaps, notches, holes, or black marks) or when you want the printer to
ignore all existing label length indicators on the installed media.
NOTE: When you select Disable, the length of each label is based on the
Label Length value entered in the MEDIA SETUP menu or the value
sent via host software.
7. Press ↵ to enable the displayed option. An asterisk (*) appears next to
the selection.
8. Run Auto Calibrate (see to page 47).
9. Press Pause until OFFLINE appears on the LCD.
.
.
.
47
Running Auto Calibrate
You can initiate Run Auto-Cal (Auto Calibrate) via the the SENSOR SETUP
menu.
NOTE: Verify that the Gap/Mark Sensor option (Gap, Mark, or Disable)
matches the installed media. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on
page 46.
Check that the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit
sensing of the label length indicators. See “Positioning the Media
Sensors” on page 44.
If Use Label Length is enabled in the SENSOR SETUP menu, make
sure the Label Length value entered in the MEDIA SETUP menu
matches the physical length of the installed media. Entering the
correct length forces the printer to advance media far enough during
calibrate for long labels (so actual gaps and marks can be detected).
If you try to do an Auto Calibrate when Peel-Off Media Handling is
enabled, the LCD will display “CANNOT CALIBRATE/Disable Peel-
Off.” Before you can do an Auto Calibrate, you must select another
media handling mode or enable the Cal in Peel mode option under
the SENSOR SETUP menu. Cal in Peel Mode displays only if Admin
User is Enabled under the PRINTER SETUP menu.
1. Press to place the printer in Menu mode.
2. Press Down + ↵ (Enter) keys together until “THE ↵ KEY IS UNLOCKED”
displays.
3. Press the Right key until SENSOR SETUP displays.
4. Press ↵ to enter the SENSOR SETUP menu.
5. Press Down key until Run Auto-Cal displays.
6. Press ↵ to select the option. Media advances until it can accurately detect
the label length indicators and then stops at the Top-of-Form position.
The Sensed Distance value will then display for one second.
7. Auto Calibrate is successful when the Sensed Distance value correctly
matches that of the installed media:
•Gap/Mark Sensor = Gap: The Sensed Distance value is the physical
length of one label plus the length of one gap, notch, or hole.
•Gap/Mark Sensor = Mark: The Sensed Distance value is the
physical distance from the trailing edge of one black mark to the
trailing edge of the next.
•Gap/Mark Sensor = Disable: Not applicable. If Gap/Mark Sensor is
set to Disable, the Sensed Distance value will not be updated.
If “GAP NOT DETECTED” displays, run auto calibrate again.
If auto calibrate continues to end with an incorrect Sensed Distance value
displayed or a fault message displayed, run Manual Calibrate as
described on page 50 or see Table 15 on page 196.
.
.
.
48
Chapter 2 Running Media Profile
NOTE: The amount of media sampled during Auto Calibrate is based on the
length of a label and transitions detected, without error, between a
label and its label length indicators.
8. Press the (Pause) key until OFFLINE displays.
9. Press the (Feed) key several times. Each time you press Feed, the
media advances one label length and stops.
NOTE: After a form feed, the position of the leading edge of the next label
depends on the type of Media Handling mode selected under the
MEDIA SETUP menu. Tear-Off Strip Media Handling will position the
label edge at the tear bar, while Continuous will position the label
edge under the printhead.
10. Press the (Pause) key until ONLINE displays.
NOTE: When changing to Online mode, if the operator has changed menu
items, but not saved the changes in a configuration, the operator will
be prompted to save the changes.
11. Once the correct Top-Of-Form (TOF) sensing is confirmed, you will need
to save it to the desired configuration menu before powering off the
printer. See “Saving a Configuration” on page 148.
Running Media Profile
The Media Profile printout shows the relationship of the Paper Out Threshold
and the Gap/Mark Threshold values, illustrates if and when each label length
indicator is detected, and shows the difference between the label length
indicators and the label. The profile printout (see Figure 1 on page 49) helps
you set the thresholds for difficult media. This includes pre-printed labels and
labels with poor gap/media dynamic range.
Once Media Profile is initiated, the printer will continue to advance media and
print the profile in landscape orientation until you press ↵ to stop printing.
NOTE: Verify the SENSOR SETUP menu Gap/Mark Sensor option (Gap,
Mark, or Disable) matches the installed media. See “Sensing
Different Media Types” on page 46.
You will need a minimum installed label width of two inches to support
the Profile printout.
Ensure the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit
sensing of the label length indicators. See “Positioning the Media
Sensors” on page 44.
Ensure the Print Mode option selected in the MEDIA SETUP menu
matches the media installed. Select Direct for heat sensitive media
(no ribbon required) or Transfer for thermal transfer media (ribbon
required).
1. Press to place the printer in Menu mode.
2. Press the Down + ↵ (Enter) keys together until “THE ↵ KEY IS
UNLOCKED” displays.
3. Press the Right key until SENSOR SETUP displays.
.
.
.
49
4. Press ↵ to enter the SENSOR SETUP menu.
5. Press the Down key until Run Profile displays and then press ↵.
(The printer will continue to print the profile until you press ↵.)
The printer will advance media and continue to print a dynamic profile
image depicting the relationship of the label and any label length
indicators detected.
6. Press ↵. The printer will stop printing.
7. Press the Pause key until OFFLINE displays.
NOTE: The Gap/Mark and Paper Out Threshold values shown on the Profile
printout represent the last values determined from a successful Auto
or Manual Calibrate or the factory default values if no Auto or Manual
Calibrate was performed.
Figure 1. Media Profile Printout
In Figure 1, the tent shaped pulse immediately following the liner gap shows
that the gap was easily detected. A very low amplitude pulse may be due to a
dirty sensor or low contrast media where there is very little opacity difference
between the label and the liner gap.
255
191
127
063
000
Paper Out(167)
Gap (109)
Í Label Feed Direction
50
Chapter 2 Running Manual Calibrate
Running Manual Calibrate
Manual Calibrate should be performed only when the values derived from
Auto Calibrate fail to improve the media sensors’ ability to sense label length
indicators on the installed media. You must first enable Admin User in the
PRINTER SETUP menu before accessing or initializing Run Manual Cal
(manual calibrate) in the SENSOR SETUP menu.
NOTE: Verify the Gap/Mark Sensor option (Gap, Mark, or Disable) matches
the installed media. See “Sensing Different Media Types” on page 46.
Ensure the media sensors are horizontally positioned to permit
sensing of the label length indicators. See “Positioning the Media
Sensors” on page 44.
Ensure the Print Mode option selected in the MEDIA SETUP menu
matches the media installed. Select Direct for heat sensitive media
(no ribbon required) or Transfer for thermal transfer media (ribbon
required).
If you try to do a Manual Calibrate when Peel-Off Media Handling is
enabled, the LCD will display, CANNOT CALIBRATE/Disable
Peel-Off. Before you can do a Manual Calibrate, you must select
another media handling mode or enable the Cal in Peel Mode option
under the SENSOR SETUP menu. Cal in Peel Mode displays only if
Admin User is enabled under the PRINTER SETUP menu.
1. Press to place the printer in Menu mode.
2. Press the Down + ↵ (Enter) keys together until “THE ↵ KEY IS
UNLOCKED” displays.
3. Press the Right key until PRINTER SETUP displays.
4. Press ↵ to Enter the PRINTER SETUP menu.
5. Press Up key until Admin User displays, then press the Right key until
Enable displays.
6. Press ↵ to select Enable. An asterisk (*) appears next to Enable.
7. Press to go back to the Main menu.
8. Press the Right key until SENSOR SETUP displays.
9. Press ↵ to Enter the SENSOR SETUP menu.
10. Press Down key until Run Manual Cal displays, then press the ↵.
11. Follow the instructions displayed on the LCD. Example: “REMOVE
MEDIA/Press Enter” indicates that you must open the pivoting deck and
remove the media from under the printhead, close and lock the pivoting
deck, and press the ↵ key.
NOTE: When requested to load an item make sure to place the item in a
position where the media sensor can detect the item. For example,
when requested to “LOAD MARK” place the Mark (Black TOF Line) at
the media sensor.
.
.
.
.
.
.
51
12. During the last step of Run Manual Cal, the printer advances the media
and attempts to detect the label length indicators and stop at the
Top-of-Form position. The Sensed Distance value will then display for
one second. Calibration is successful when the Sensed Distance value
correctly matches that of the installed media. If “CALIBRATION FAIL/See
Manual” displays, run a manual calibrate again.
NOTE: The amount of media sampled during manual calibration is based on
the length of a label and the transitions detected without error,
between a label and its label length indicators.
13. Press the (Pause) key until OFFLINE displays.
14. Press the (Feed) key several times. Each time you press the
media advances one label length and stops.
NOTE: After a form feed, the position of the leading edge of the next label
depends on the type of Media Handling mode selected under the
MEDIA SETUP menu. Tear-Off Strip Media Handling positions the
label edge at the tear bar, while Continuous positions the label edge
under the printhead.
15. Once the correct values are confirmed, save them to the desired
configuration menu before powering off the printer. See “Saving a
Configuration” on page 148.
52
Chapter 2
53
3Standard Interfaces
Overview
This chapter describes the host interfaces provided with the printer. The
printer interface is the point where the data line from the host computer plugs
into the printer. The interface processes all communications signals and data
to and from the host computer. Plus, with the Auto Switching feature, you can
configure the printer to accept several interfaces at the same time.
In addition to descriptions for the multi-line interfaces, this chapter also
provides instructions for configuration of terminating resistors for the parallel
and serial interfaces.
Auto Switching
This feature gives the printer the ability to handle multiple data streams
sequentially. With Auto Switching, the printer can service hosts attached to
the serial, parallel, USB, or Ethernet as if they were the only interface
connected.
For example, if the host computer sends one print job to the RS-232 serial
port and a separate print job to the IEEE 1284 parallel port, the printer's Auto
Switching will handle both jobs, in the order they were received, without the
user having to reconfigure the selected interface between jobs.
Standard Host Interfaces
•Parallel, configurable to Centronics and IEEE 1284 (parallel bidirectional
port)
•RS-232 Serial Port
•USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus
Optional Host Interfaces
•Ethernet 10/100Base-T
•Wireless NIC
54
Chapter 3 Parallel Interface
Parallel Interface
Centronics
NOTE: The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer
must not exceed 15 feet (5 meters).
Table 4. Centronics Interface Connector Pin Assignments
Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous
Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin
DATA LINE 1
Return
2
20
ACKNOWLEDGE
Return
10
28
CHASSIS GROUND 17
DATA LINE 2
Return
3
21
ONLINE
Return
13
28
GROUND 30
DATA LINE 3
Return
4
22
FAULT
Return
32
29
Spares 14
DATA LINE 4
Return
5
23
PAPER EMPTY
Return
12
28
No Connection 34,35,
36
DATA LINE 5
Return
6
24
BUSY
Return
11
29
+5 Volts 18
DATA LINE 6
Return
7
25
DATA LINE 7
Return
8
26
DATA LINE 8
Return
9
27
DATA STROBE
Return
1
19
PAPER INSTRUCTION
Return
15
29
PRIME
Return
31
30
Centronics
55
Centronics Interface Signals
Table 5. Centronics Parallel Interface Signals
Signals Purpose
Data Lines 1 through 8 Provide eight standard or inverted levels from
the host that specify character data, plot data,
or a control code. Data Line 8 allows access to
the extended ASCII character set. You may
enable or disable this line via the Data Bit 8
parameter on the Centronics Parallel submenu.
Data Strobe Carries a low true, 100 ns minimum pulse from
the host that clocks data into the printer.
Acknowledge A low true pulse from the printer indicating the
character or function code has been received
and the printer is ready for the next data
transfer.
Online A high true level from the printer to indicate the
printer is ready for data transfer and the Pause
key on the control panel has been activated.
When the printer is in online mode, it may
accept data from the host.
Paper Empty (PE) A high true level from the printer to indicate the
printer is in a paper empty or paper jam fault.
Busy A high true level from the printer to indicate the
printer cannot receive data.
Prime A high true level from the host to indicate the
printer should perform a warm start (printer is
reset to the power-up configuration values).
Paper Instruction (PI) Carries a VFU signal from the host with the
same timing and polarity as the data line.
Fault A low true level from the printer indicates a
printer fault.
56
Chapter 3 Parallel Interface
IEEE 1284
The IEEE 1284 supports three operating modes, which are determined by
negotiation between the printer and the host.
Compatibility Mode
This mode provides compatibility with Centronics-like host I/O (see Table 4).
Data is transferred from the host to the printer in 8-bit bytes over the data
lines.
Compatibility Mode can be combined with Nibble and Byte Modes to provide
bidirectional communication.
Nibble Mode
Eight bits equals one byte. When a byte of data is sent to the printer, the eight
bits are sent over eight data lines.
Some devices cannot send data over their eight data lines. To bypass this,
the IEEE 1284 permits data to be sent as half a byte over four status lines.
(Half a byte equals one nibble.) Two sequential four-bit nibbles are sent over
the lines.
Data is transferred from printer to host in four-bit nibbles over the status lines,
and the host controls the transmission.
Byte Mode
The printer and host send data to each other along eight data lines (one bit
per line).
If bidirectional communication is supported by the printer and the host, the
host will take control of the data transfer.
IEEE 1284
57
IEEE 1284 Interface Signals
Table 6 lists each of the signals associated with the corresponding pins on the
IEEE 1284 interface. Descriptions of the signals follow.
Table 6. IEEE 1284 Signals
Pin Source of Data
Type of Mode
Compatible Nibble Byte
1Host nStrobe HostClk Host/Clk
2Host/Printer Data 1 (LSB)
3Host/Printer Data 2
4Host/Printer Data 3
5Host/Printer Data 4
6Host/Printer Data 5
7Host/Printer Data 6
8Host/Printer Data 7
9Host/Printer Data 8 (MSB)
10 Printer nAck PtrClk PtrClk
11 Printer Busy PtrBusy PtrBusy
12 Printer PError AckDataReq AckDataReq
13 Printer Select Xflag Xflag
14 Host nAutoFd Host Busy HostAck
15 Not Defined
16 Logic Grid
17 Chassis Grid
18 Printer Peripheral Logic High
19 Signal Ground (nStrobe)
20 Signal Ground (Data 1)
21 Signal Ground (Data 2)
22 Signal Ground (Data 3)
23 Signal Ground (Data 4)
24 Signal Ground (Data 5)
25 Signal Ground (Data 6)
26 Signal Ground (Data 7)
58
Chapter 3 Parallel Interface
NOTE: The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer
should not exceed 32 feet (10 meters).
Host Clock / nWrite. Driven by the host. Data is transferred from the host to
the printer. When the printer sends data, two types are available. If it is Nibble
Mode, the signal is set high. If it is Byte Mode, the signal is set low.
Data 1 through Data 8. These pins are host-driven in Compatibility Mode and
bidirectional in Byte Mode. They are not used in Nibble Mode. Data 1 is the
least significant bit; Data 8 is the most significant bit.
Printer Clock / Peripheral Clock / Interrupt. Driven by the printer. A signal
from the printer indicating the character or function code has been received
and the printer is ready for the next data transfer.
Printer Busy / Peripheral Acknowledge / nWait. Driven by the printer.
Indicates the printer cannot receive data. (Data bits 4 and 8 in Nibble Mode.)
Acknowledge Data Request / nAcknowledge Reverse. Driven by the
printer. Indicates the printer is in a fault condition. (Data bits 3 and 7 in Nibble
Mode.)
Xflag. Driven by the printer. A high true level indicating the printer is ready for
data transfer and the printer is online. (Data bits 2 and 6 in Nibble Mode.)
Host Busy / Host Acknowledge / NDStrobe. Driven by the host. Activates
auto-line feed mode.
Peripheral Logic High. Driven by the printer. When the line is high, the
printer indicates all of its signals are in a valid state. When the line is low, the
printer indicates its power is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nReverse Request. Driven by the host. Resets the interface and forces a
return to Compatibility Mode idle phase.
27 Signal Ground (Data 8)
28 Signal Ground (PError, Select, nAck)
29 Signal Ground (Busy, nFault)
30 Signal Ground (nAutoFd, nSelectIn, nInit)
31 Host nInit
32 Printer NFault nDataAvail aDataAvail
33 Not Defined
34 Not Defined
35 Not Defined
36 Host nSelectIn 1284 Active 1284 Active
Table 6. IEEE 1284 Signals (continued)
Pin Source of Data
Type of Mode
Compatible Nibble Byte
RS-232
59
nData Available / nPeripheral Request. Driven by the printer. Indicates the
printer has encountered an error. (Data bits 1 and 5 in Nibble Mode.)
1284 Active / nAStrobe. Driven by the host. A peripheral device is selected.
Host Logic High. Driven by the host. When set to high, the host indicates all
of its signals are in a valid state. When set to low, the host indicates its power
is off or its signals are in an invalid state.
nInit. Resets init interface from the host.
Serial Interface
RS-232
NOTE: The RS-232 serial interface circuit characteristics are compatible with
the Electronic Industry Association Specification EIA®-232-E.
The RS-232 serial interface enables the printer to operate with bit serial
devices that are compatible with an RS-232 controller. The input serial data
transfer rate (in baud) is selectable from the printer's control panel. Baud rates
of 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 are
available.
The length of the data cable from the host computer to the printer must not
exceed 50 feet (15 meters) for RS-232
Received Data (RXD). Serial data stream to the printer.
Transmitted Data (TXD). Serial data stream from the printer for transmitting
status and control information to the host. Subject to protocol selection.
Request To Send (RTS). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.
Clear To Send (CTS). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is ready
to receive data/status signals from the printer.
Data Set Ready (DSR). Status signal to the printer indicating the host is in a
ready condition.
Table 7. RS-232 Serial Interface Connector (9 Pin) Assignments
Input Signals Output Signals Miscellaneous
Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin
Receive Data (RXD) 2Transmit Status & Control
Data (TXD)
3Chassis/Signal Ground 5
Clear To Send (CTS) 8Request To Send (RTS) 7
Data Set Ready (DSR) 6Data Terminal Ready (DTR) 4
Data Carrier Detect (DCD) 1
RS-232 Serial Interface
60
Chapter 3 Serial Interface
Data Carrier Detect (DCD). Status signal to the printer. The ON condition is
required for the printer to receive data.
Data Terminal Ready (DTR). Control signal from the printer. Subject to
configuration.
61
4Configuring the Printer
Overview
This chapter provides information about:
•Setting, saving, modifying, and printing configurations
•Configuration menus
Setting Printer Configuration Parameters
Configuration parameters are set from the control panel or are retrieved from
the printer’s memory. The parameters define how the printer will respond to
command and interface signals from the host computer.
The configuration menu structure consists of main menus and the options
applicable to each menu.
NOTE: Some configurations refer to printer options that may not be present
in your printer. If you select an option or feature that is not present, no
action will be performed by the printer or an “OPTION NOT
INSTALLED” message will display on the LCD.
Moving within the Configuration Menu
You can navigate through the configuration menus using the appropriate
navigation keys, as shown in Figure 2. (See “Controls and Indicators” on
page 35 for more details on the function of the operator panel keys.)
You can select different options and save them as the power on default;
however, you can only save them to configuration menus 1-8. The factory
configuration menu can be altered, but not saved.
When the printer is online, the first line of the LCD displays “ONLINE” and the
second line lists the active interface port and emulation type.
To configure the printer:
1. Press the key to enter the printer menu system. Eight menu icons
display on the LCD. The MEDIA SETUP icon is selected (highlighted).
2. You can move through configuration main menus in two ways:
•Press the right key to move right or the left key to move left.
•Press the down key to move down or the up key to move up between
menu icons displayed within each column.
.
.
.
62
Chapter 4 Overview
NOTE: In menus with numeric ranges of more than 50 numbers, hold down
the right or left key for more than 2 seconds to move through the
range in increments of 5. To move in increments of 1 again, release
your hold on the right or left key.
Figure 2. Moving within the Configuration Menu
Step Press LCD Notes
1 OFFLINE
2 DOWN Key+ ↵THE ↵ KEY IS
UNLOCKED
Unlocks the ENTER
key to allow you to
make configuration
changes.
3MEDIA SETUP Enters the printer
menus.
4↵MEDIA SETUP
Print Intensity:
-3*
Enters the MEDIA
SETUP Menu.
5DOWN Key UNTIL Print Mode:
Transfer*
Print Mode is
selected.
6 LEFT Key or
RIGHT Key
Print Mode:
Direct
Cycles through the
choices.
7↵Print Mode
Direct*
Selects the Direct
transfer mode.
8
MEDIA SETUP In Menu mode, this
key moves up to the
previous higher level
menu.
.
.
.
Selecting a Menu Option
63
Selecting a Menu Option
To select an option, you need to press the ↵ key. By default, however, the
↵ key is “locked” when the printer is turned on to prevent accidental changes
to the configuration menu. If you press the ↵ key when the key is locked, the
message “The ↵ KEY IS LOCKED” displays on the LCD for one second and
the value will not be selected.
To unlock the ↵ key, press the Down + ↵ (Enter) keys simultaneously (if the
combination keys have not been otherwise reconfigured). This toggles the
ENTER/LOCK function.
•If this function is performed while the ↵ key is locked, the message
“The ↵ KEY IS UNLOCKED” displays for one second, and the ↵ key will
be unlocked.
•If this function is performed while the ↵ key is unlocked, the message
“The ↵ KEY IS LOCKED” displays for one second, and the ↵ key will be
locked.
When you press the ↵ key (with the ↵ key unlocked), you select the value or
option that displays. An asterisk displays after the value you selected, and the
configuration is changed immediately.
IMPORTANT
This change takes effect for all subsequent data and operations for the
printer as soon as the ↵ key is pressed and the asterisk (*) is displayed.
The configuration change(s) stay in effect only while the printer is
powered on. When the power is turned off, all current configuration
changes will be lost unless the changes made to it are saved via the
CONFIGURATION menu. To save configuration information permanently
or to select it as the power-up default, see “Saving a Configuration” on
page 148.
When you make a menu change and attempt to go Online without saving
the changes to a configuration, you will be prompted to save the
changes (provided that Auto Save is set to Enable in the
CONFIGURATION MENU). For more information on Auto Save
Configuration, see page 149.
64
Chapter 4 Hidden Menus
Changing Printer Settings
You can change (or “configure”) printer settings, such as print speed or
emulations, through the control panel as follows:
1. Press the key to enter the Menu configuration. MEDIA SETUP is
selected.
2. Press the ↵ key to enter the MEDIA SETUP menu. Print Intensity is
selected.
3. Press the Down key to cycle through these options:
•Print Intensity
•Print Speed
•Print Mode
•Media Handling
•Tear Off Adjust
•Label Length
•Label Width
•Ver Image Shift
•Hor Image Shift
•Orientation
•Units
4. When the desired submenu is selected, press the Left or Right keys to
scroll through the values or options.
5. Press the ↵ key to select a value. An asterisk (*) displays next to the
selected value or option.
Hidden Menus
By default, menu items for advanced users are hidden (they do not appear in
the menu structure). To display these hidden menus:
1. Press to enter Menu mode.
2. Press the Down and ↵ keys at the same time until THE ↵ KEY IS
UNLOCKED displays.
3. Press the Right key until PRINTER SETUP displays.
4. Press ↵ to enter the PRINTER SETUP menu.
5. Press the Up key until Admin User displays.
6. Press the Right key until Enable displays.
7. Press ↵ to select it. An asterisk (*) displays after Enable. The hidden
menus will now appear.
.
.
.
65
8. If there are more submenu values or options you want to change, use the
,Up, Down, Left, and Right keys to access the value and the ↵ key to
select it. At any time, you may press the key to return to the Main
menu.
9. At any time, you may press the Pause key twice to exit the Configuration
menu and place the printer online. Once you have finished selecting all
your options, save your configuration.
IMPORTANT
If you do not save your configuration, all your new values will be lost
when you power off the printer. See “Saving a Configuration” on
page 148 and “Auto Save Configuration” on page 149.
Menu Overview
.
.
.
.
.
.
MEDIA
SETUP
Control various
parameters related to
print quality, media, and
ribbon.
PRINTER
SETUP
Set the menus needed
to configure the
printer.
SENSOR
SETUP
Select the correct
media sensing for the
media type installed
and perform media
sensor calibration.
Select the desired
Active IGP emulation,
other emulations, and
various printer
operating parameters.
CONFIGURATION
Name, store, and retrieve up
to eight custom printer
configurations.
Setup and status
reporting for RFID
encoder if installed.
DIAGNOSTICS
Select various printer
tests, monitor and record
printer performance.
Press to select the next main menu.
Press the Up or Down keys to move within each main menu.
.
.
.
RFID
INTERFACES
Set host interfaces.
EMULATION
66
Chapter 4 Main Menu
Main Menu
Gap/Mark Sensor
Run Auto-Cal
Run Profile
Sensed Distance
Gap/Mark Thresh
Paper Out Thresh
Run Manual Cal
Pwr up Action
Head Auto-Cal
Online Auto-Cal
Gap Windowing
Gap Length
Cal in Peel Mode
Min Calib Delta
Use Label Length
Threshhold Range
Mark TOF Detect
SENSOR
SETUP
(page 84)
Print Intensity
Print Speed
Print Mode
Media Handling
Adv Continuous
Tear Off Adjust
Label Length
Label Width
Ver Image Shift
Hor Image Shift
Orientation
Auto Map Select
Auto Label Width
Num Auto Labels
Slew Speed Ctrl
Slew Speed 5
Print Direction
Label Wait Time
Label Missing
Clip Page
Fault Reprint
Ribbon Low
Units
Set Label Length
TOF Detect Fault
Ticket Save Mode
TOF Adjust Mode
TOF Adjust
MEDIA
SETUP
(page 68)
Notes:
Italicized items are available only Admin User is set to Enable (in the PRINTER
SETUP menu).
1 This menu appears only if a CST (Character Sequence Table) file is loaded. If a
RFID option is installed, loading a CST will hide/override the ‘SMT:Status’ menu.
2 This menu appears only if an EMC (Expanded Memory Cartridge) is installed.
3 This menu appears only if the real time clock option is installed.
4 Updates the set parameters only if the real time clock option is installed.
5 This menu appears when Slew Speed Ctrl is set to Manual (in the MEDIA SETUP
menu).
EMULATION
(page 91)
Select
Emulation Setup
xxx Diagnostics
PAA: Status 1
Power Saver Time
Pwr Save Control
Display Language
Alarm
Power-up State
PTX Setup Parse
Ptx Setup SFCC
PJL Control
Cancel Key
Ret. Status Port
Compatibility
Del Char frm Fls
Ld char from Fls
Save Char to Fls
Del Char frm RAM
Ld Char at PwrUp
Del Set frm Fls
Ld Set from Fls
Save Set to Fls
Del Set from RAM
Ld Set at PwrUp
Main FFS
EMC FFS 2
Optimize&Reboot
Print File List
Auto Locking
Set Lock Key
Max Font Buffer
Max Cache Memory
Max Cached Char
Standard Chars.
Bold Chars.
Extra Bold Char.
OCR-A Chars.
OCR-B Chars.
Tall Characters
Batch Counter
Date 3, 4
Disp. Intensity
Bot Line Display
Admin User
PRINTER
SETUP
(page 106)
67
Save Config.
Load Config.
Print Config.
Delete Config.
Power-Up Config.
Protect Configs.
Name Config 1
Name Config 2
Name Config 3
Name Config 4
Name Config 5
Name Config 6
Name Config 7
Name Config 8
Reset Cfg Names
Auto Save
CONFIGURATION
(page 141)
RFID DIAGNOSTICS
(page 144)
Printer Tests
Test Count
Software Build
Feature File 1
Hex Dump Mode
Print Error Log
Clear Error Log
FLASH Installed
EMC FLASH Installed 2
DRAM Installed
Ptr On Time
Printer Usage
PrintHead Usage
Head On Time
Reset Head Data
Head Resolution
Head Voltage
Refer to the RFID
Labeling Reference
Manual.
Host Interface
ETHERNET PORT 5
ETHERNET SETTING 3
WLAN SETTING 4
Parallel Port 5
CENTRONICS 6
IEEE 1284 7
USB Port
Serial Port
Printer Mgmt
INTERFACES
(page 117)
Notes:
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable (in the
PRINTER SETUP menu).
1 This menu only appears if Feature File is loaded.
2 This menu only appears if the EMC is installed.
3 This menu only appears only if the NIC is installed.
4 This menu only appears only if the Wireless NIC is installed.
5 This menu only appears if Host Interface is set to Auto Switching.
6 This menu only appears if Host Interface is set to Centronics.
7 This menu only appears if Host Interface is set to IEEE 1284.
68
Chapter 4 MEDIA SETUP Menu
MEDIA SETUP Menu
MEDIA
SETUP
(from page 66)
Print Intensity Print Speed Print Mode
0*
-15 to 15
4 ips*
1 ips to 10 ips
Transfer*
Direct
Media
Handling
Tear-Off Strip*
Peel-Off
Cut
Rewind
Continuous
Adv
Continuous
Standard*
Tear-Off
Tear Strip Full
Label Length
6 inches* 1
0.1 to 99.0 inches
Label Width
4.1 inches * 1
0.1 to 4.1 inches
Ver Image
Shift
0.00 inches 1
-1.00 to X 2
Hor Image
Shift
0.00 inches* 1
-1.00 to 1.00
Orientation
Portrait*
Landscape
Inv. Portrait
Inv. Landscape
Tear Off
Adjust
0.00*
-1.00 to 0.20
Slew Speed
Ctrl
Automatic*
Manual
Print Direction
Head First*
Foot First
Label Wait
Time
0.1 seconds*
00.1 to 60.0 seconds
Label Missing
Fault Disable*
Fault Enable
Clip Page
Enable*
Disable
Fault Reprint
Disable*
Enable
Ribbon Low
Disable*
Enable
Units
In Inches*
In Millimeters
Set Label
Length
Manual*
Automatic
TOF Detect
Fault
3 Labels*
9 Labels
1 Label
TOF Adjust
Mode
Disable*
Enable
TOF Adjust
0.40 inches*
0.00 to 0.40 inches 4
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available when Admin User is set to Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
1 You can change the unit value from inches to millimeters under Units (in MEDIA SETUP) when Admin User is set to
Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
2 Based on the current value setting for Label Length (in the MEDIA SETUP menu) up to a maximum of 12.80 inches.
3 Maximum value depends on the amount of DRAM available for page memory, label length, and label width
see Appendix A, “Specifications”).
4 In increments of 0.01 inch.
5 This menu appears when Slew Speed Ctrl is set to Manual (in the MEDIA SETUP menu).
Slew Speed 5
4 ips*
1 to 10 ips
Auto Map
Select
Disable*
Enable
Auto Label
Width
4.1 inches* 1
00.1 to 4.1 inches
Num Auto
Labels
2 labels*
1 to 40 labels 3
Ticket Save
Mode
Disable*
Enable
No Seek
Back Feed
Motion
Before*
After
None
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
69
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
Print Intensity
This option specifies the level of thermal energy from the printhead to be used
for the type of media and ribbon installed.
Large numbers imply more heat (thermal energy) to be applied for each dot.
This has a significant effect on print quality. The print intensity and speed
must match the media and ribbon type to obtain the best possible print quality
and barcode grades.
The range is -15 to 15.
The factory default is 0.
Print Speed
This option specifies the speed in inches per second (ips) at which the media
passes through the printer while printing.
The range is 1 to 10 ips (in increments of 1 ips).
The factory default is 4 ips.
Print Mode
This option specifies the type of printing to be done.
•Transfer (factory default). Indicates Thermal Transfer printing (ribbon
installed).
•Direct. Indicates Direct Thermal printing (no ribbon) and requires special
heat sensitive media.
Media Handling
This option specifies how the printer will handle the media (labels or tag
stock).
•Tear-Off Strip (factory default). Printer prints on the media and sends it
out the front until the print buffer is empty, then positions the last label
(cross perforation following) over the tear bar for removal.
•Peel-Off. Prints and peels die-cut labels from the liner without assistance.
The printer waits for you to take away the label before printing the next
one (on-demand printing). Supported only when Standard Peel or
Peel with Liner Rewinder option is installed. When either option is
installed, a “Remove Label” message will display to remind you to remove
the label before the next one can be printed.
NOTE: If the Peel-Off option is not installed, the error message “OPTION
NOT INSTALLED” displays. Requires the Standard Peel without
Liner Rewinder or Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder option. Not
allowed if the options are not installed.
70
Chapter 4 MEDIA SETUP Menu
•Cut. When the optional media cutter is installed, it automatically cuts
media after each label is printed or after a specified number of labels
have been printed when a software cut command has been issued. It cuts
continuous roll paper, labels, or tag stock.
NOTE: The Cut option is not allowed if the cutter is not installed. The error
message “OPTION NOT INSTALLED” displays.
•Rewind. In rewind mode the printer unwinds the media from the media
supply spindle or fanfold label stack, prints the labels, and rewinds the
printed media and its carrier web onto the optional rewind spindle.
NOTE: The Batch Label Rewinder option is not allowed if the Rewinder is not
installed. The error message “OPTION NOT INSTALLED” displays.
•Continuous. Printer prints on the media until the print buffer is empty and
then stops at the next top of form.
Adv Continuous
Allows selection of special media modes when Continuous Media Handling
mode (see page 69) is selected.
•Standard (factory default). Labels are printed and sent out the front. The
cross perforation following the last printed label is not aligned at the tear
bar. No auto feeding of a blank label should exist between print jobs, but
you may need to press the Feed key to move approximately .80 inches of
the last printed label from under the printhead. If performed, this feed
causes a blank label at the beginning of the next print job.
•Tear-Off. Same as Standard, but the cross perforation following the last
printed label is aligned at the tear bar. No blank label is needed to remove
the last printed label. No blank label should exist between print jobs. A no
print zone, .80 inches long, exists from the leading edge of each printed
label. This option supports label lengths 2.50 inches or longer.
•Tear Strip Full. Same as Standard, but the cross perforation following
the last printed label is automatically aligned at the tear bar once the print
buffer is empty for a period of Label Wait Time. (Media does not get
aligned at tear bar until Label Wait Time expires.) When printable data is
again detected, a blank label is automatically fed, resulting in one blank
label between each print job. This option supports label lengths 2.50
inches or longer. Shorter label lengths cause two or more blank labels to
be automatically fed at the beginning of each print job.
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
71
Tear Off Adjust
This option represents the distance to advance (+ shift) or pull back (– shift)
the stop position of a label when Tear-Off Strip, Peel-Off, or Cut media
handling option is enabled. The allowable range is -1.00 inches to
+ 0.2 inches, in .01 inch increments.
The factory default is 0.00 inches.
Label Length
This option specifies the user-selected Label Length in inches or millimeters.
In most applications, the user-selected Label Length will match the physical
label length. Physical label length is the actual label length of the media
installed.
When setting label length, consider the following:
Label Length can also be manually entered via the control panel MEDIA
SETUP menu or sent via host computer using the appropriate software
command.
A Host Forms Length (Label Length) value sent from the host computer will
override and change the manually entered Label Length value in the MEDIA
SETUP menu.
•Physical Label Length is the actual measurable length of the label. The
following list of different media types explains how the physical label
lengths are determined:
•Die-cut labels – measurable length of the removable label (leading
edge to trailing edge). This does not include the liner material or gap.
•Tag Stock with notches or holes – measurable length from the trailing
edge of one notch or hole to the leading edge of the next notch or
hole.
•Tag Stock with black marks on underside – measurable length from
the trailing edge of one black mark to the trailing edge of the next
black mark.
NOTE: The printer can be configured to detect the leading edge of the black
mark using the Mark TOF Detect option in the SENSOR SETUP
menu.
•Continuous media (no label length indicators) – measurable length
should be within + 1-2% the Label Length value entered in the MEDIA
SETUP menu, or the value sent via host software command.
•Logical Label Length (Host Forms Length) is the length that a user or
programmer bases his printable image on. In most cases this length
should be slightly less than the Physical Label Length. This allows the
entire image to be printed within the boundaries of the label length
indicators (gaps, notches, holes, or black marks).
When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length
and Clip Page = Enable (in the MEDIA SETUP menu), the printer will clip
the bottom portion of the image that exceeds the Physical Label length. In
this case, the printable data that was not printed will be lost.
72
Chapter 4 MEDIA SETUP Menu
When the Logical Label Length is greater than the Physical Label Length
and Clip Page = Disable, the printer will continue to print the image onto
the next physical label and ignore the gap or mark based on the label
length value set in the MEDIA SETUP menu.
When the Logical Label Length is less than the Physical Label Length, the
printer will print the entire image and leave blank the remaining length of
the physical label as it advances to the Top-of-Form of the next label. This
is true regardless of the Clip Page setting.
The allowable Label Length range is 00.1 to 99.0 inches (2.5 - 2514.6mm).
The factory default is 6 inches. Maximum Label Length range is dependent on
the Label Width value selected, printhead installed (203 or 305 DPI).
NOTE: See “Set Label Length” on page 81.
Label Width
This option specifies the physical width of the image to be printed. The value
can be specified in inches or millimeters depending on the setting of the Units
submenu under the MEDIA SETUP menu. The allowable range in inches is
0.1 to 4.1 inches. The allowable range in millimeters is 2.5 to 104 mm.
Ver Image Shift
This option specifies the amount to shift an image vertically up (-) toward the
leading edge or down (+) toward the trailing edge for precise positioning on
the label. The actual height of the image is not affected by this parameter. The
allowable range is -1.00 inches to the current Label Length value setting, up
to a maximum of 12.80 inches, in .01 inch increments.
The factory default value is 0.00 inches.
Hor Image Shift
This option specifies the amount to shift an image horizontally outboard (-) or
inboard (+) for precise positioning on the label. The actual width of the image
is not affected by this parameter. The allowable range is -1.00 to +1.00 inches
in .01 inch increments.
The factory default value is 0.00 inches.
4 inches
6 inches
FEED
Leading Edge
"(+) A (-)i
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
73
Orientation
This menu item selects the image orientation to be used when printing the
label.
•Portrait. Portrait refers to vertical page orientation, where the height of a
page is greater than its width. The top edge of the image is parallel to the
leading edge of the media. The following illustration is an example, with
the operator viewing the front of the printer.
NOTE: Portrait orientation applies to the PGL emulation. This is regarded as
Inverse Portrait using ZGL.
•Landscape. Landscape refers to horizontal orientation, where the width
of a page is greater than its height. The top edge of the image is the left
edge of the media. The following illustration is an example, with the
operator viewing the front of the printer.
NOTE: Landscape orientation applies to the PGL emulation. This is regarded
as Inverse Landscape using ZGL.
4 inches
6 inches
FEED
The top edge of
the image is
parallel to the
leading edge of
the media.
Leading Edge
FEED
The top edge of
the image is
parallel to the left
edge of the media.
Leading Edge
4 inches
6 inches
74
Chapter 4 MEDIA SETUP Menu
•Inv. Portrait. Inverse Portrait refers to vertical page orientation, where the
height of a page is greater than its width. The top edge of the image is
parallel to the trailing edge of the media. The following illustration is an
example, with the operator viewing the front of the printer.
NOTE: Inverse Portrait orientation applies to the PGL emulation. This is
regarded as Portrait using ZGL.
•Inv. Landscape. Inverse Landscape refers to horizontal orientation,
where the width of a page is greater than its height. The top edge of the
image is the right edge of the media (the left edge of the image is the
trailing edge of the media). The factory default is Portrait. The following
illustration is an example, with the operator viewing the front of the printer.
NOTE: Inverse Landscape orientation applies to the PGL emulation. This is
regarded as Landscape using ZGL.
FEED The top edge of
the image is
parallel to the
trailing edge of the
media.
Leading Edge
Trailing Edge
4 inches
6 inches
FEED
The top edge of
the image is
parallel to the right
edge of the media.
Leading Edge
4 inches
6 inches
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
75
Auto Map Select
This option specifies the maximum print width to be used by the application.
The IGP/Auto Label Mapping® feature allows backward compatibility of
programs written for P5000 line-matrix printers using the Printronix PGL
graphics language. It allows the printer to print two-up (or other multi-up)
labels. Instead of printing multiple labels across the printer, it prints the
leftmost label and the rightmost label, so the printout will be twice as long but
half as wide.
When enabled, the printer will automatically reposition the horizontally
adjacent labels to a vertically adjacent position, or a combination of horizontal
and vertical positions based on the values selected under the Auto Label
Width and Num Auto Labels menu items.
When disabled, excess data in any program sent to the printer with
horizontally adjacent labels that exceed the physical page width of the printer
will be clipped or wrapped depending upon the setting of the Autowrap menu
option.
The options are Disable (the factory default) and Enable.
Examples
All of the examples below assume that the logical form length is set to the
label length.
Example 1: Simple Case
Problem: A file has been constructed with two horizontally adjacent 4” labels
for a printer with a physical width of 8”. The user now wants to use this file
with a printer that has a 4” physical width.
Solution: The user sets Auto Label Width to 4” (the width of the label),
configures the Num Auto Labels to 2, and enables the Auto Label Mapping
feature.
Printer Operation: The printer will print the first (leftmost) 4” label first. Once
the first label has been completed, the printer will print the second 4” label.
These labels will appear vertically adjacent on the form.
Label 1 Label 2
Label 1
Label 2
Line-Matrix Printer Output
Thermal Printer Output
Wide Web Width Narrow
Web
Width
76
Chapter 4 MEDIA SETUP Menu
Example 2: Uneven Number Case
Problem: A file has been constructed with three horizontally adjacent 2”
labels. The user now desires to use this file with a printer that has a 4”
physical width.
Solution #1: The user sets Auto Label Width to 4” (the width of two labels),
configures the Num Auto Labels to 2, and enables the Auto Label Mapping
feature.
Printer Operation for Solution #1: The printer will print the first two labels at
the same time. These first two labels will be horizontally adjacent. Once these
labels have been completed, the printer will print the remaining 2” labels along
with a blank 2” label.
Solution #2: The user sets Auto Label Width to 2”, configures the Num Auto
Labels to 3, and enables the Auto Label Mapping feature.
Printer Operation for Solution #2: The printer will print the first 2” label by
itself, the second 2” label by itself, and finally, the last 2” label by itself.
Label
1
Label
2
Label
3
Label
1
Label
2
Label
3
Blank
Label
File Contents: Print Output:
Label
1
Label
2
Label
3
Label
1
Label
2
Label
3
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
77
Example 3: Past Maximum File Width
Problem: A file has been constructed with three horizontally adjacent 4”
labels. The user now desires to use this file with a printer that has a 8”
physical width. The user should have used a solution similar to one of the
solutions in the section above, but the user erroneously enters an Auto Label
Width of 12” and a Num Auto Labels of 3.
Printer Operation: Maximum Num Auto Labels = (20”/12”) = 1.67 rounded up
to 2. The printer will automatically reduce the Num Auto Labels to 2.
Example 4: Blank Label Case
Problem: A file exists with two horizontally adjacent 4” labels. The user now
wants to use this file with a printer that has a 4” physical width. The user
decides to set the Num Labels to 3 and the Label Width to 4” despite the fact
that these values are not optimum.
Printer Operation: The maximum Num Auto Labels = (20”/4”) = 5. The
selected value of 3 is legal. After the file is sent, the printer will begin by
printing the first 4” width label. Once that label is complete, it will print the
second 4” width label. Finally, once both of those labels have been printed,
the printer will print a blank 4” label.
Auto Label Width
The width of a single label to be printed or the maximum width of the media
that will be used for the print file. The value is selectable from 00.1 inch
through the maximum print width of the printer.
NOTE: The maximum Auto Label Width value will be limited to the current
MEDIA CONTROL/Label Width value selected in the configuration
menu.
The default value depends on model width and size of DRAM installed.
Label
1
Label
2
Label
1
Label
2
File Contents: Print Output:
Blank
Label
78
Chapter 4 MEDIA SETUP Menu
Num Auto Labels
The desired number of labels to be printed vertically adjacent on the form.
The value is selectable with a range of 1 through 40 labels.
The factory default is 2.
Slew Speed Ctrl
The speed at which the printer moves media without actually printing on it.
•Automatic (factory default). Always the same as the print speed.
•Manual. Allows you to set the slew speed. The maximum speed depends
on your printer model (see “Print Method” on page 219).
Print Direction
This option determines the basic print image orientation.
NOTE: Print Direction will not change the orientation of any print test patterns
in the DIAGNOSTIC menu.
Print Direction has two options:
•Head First
•Foot First
For example, with Portrait orientation, when you select Head First, the top-of-
form will come out of the printer first. Conversely, when you select Foot First,
the bottom-of-form will come out first.
Print Direction and Orientation are two independent options that can be
combined to produce the following results depending on the Active IGP
Emulation:
Table 8. Head First
Print Direction
Option Orientation Option Result in Active IGP Emulations
(PGL)
Head First Portrait Portrait
Head First Landscape Landscape
Head First Inv. Portrait Inv. Portrait
Head First Inv. Landscape Inv. Landscape
Head First
FEED
A
A
Foot First
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
79
The factory default is Head First when PGL is enabled.
The factory default is Foot First when ZGL is enabled.
Label Wait Time
When Media Handling is set to Tear-Off Strip or Continuous, and
Adv Continuous is set to Tear Strip Full, Label Wait Time specifies the
number of seconds after printing stops that the printer will wait before it
advances media to the tear bar position.
When Media Handling is set to Peel-Off, Label Wait Time specifies the
number of seconds the printer will wait after a label is removed from the peel
bar before starting to print the next label.
The range is 0.1 to 60.0 seconds, and the factory default is 0.1 second.
NOTE: For the SL4M Short Pitch RFID printer, the default is 1.0 second.
Label Missing
If enabled causes the Label Taken Sensor to first check for the presence of a
printed label at the tear bar for Peel Off and Tear Off Media Handling Modes
only.
•Fault Disable (factory default). The printer does not generate a fault
condition if a missing label is encountered. The printer will continue
printing the next label.
•Fault Enable. The printer generates a fault condition if a missing label is
encountered.
Table 9. Foot First
Print Direction
Option Orientation Option Result in Active ZGL Emulation
Foot First Portrait Portrait
Foot First Landscape Inv. Landscape
Foot First Inv. Portrait Inv. Portrait
Foot First Inv. Landscape Landscape
80
Chapter 4 MEDIA SETUP Menu
Clip Page
This option determines how the printer handles images that are too large for
one physical page length when using gap or black mark media.
•Enable (factory default). When the user-selected page length is greater
than the physical page length, the printer clips the excess data to fit the
physical page. The excess data is lost. The media sensor constantly
looks for the gap, notch, hole, or black mark and when detected, uses it
as the Top-of-Form position for the next label and clips any remaining
data from the label being printed.
•Disable. When the user-selected page length (logical length) is greater
than the physical page length dictated by the gap, notch, hole, or black
mark on media, the printer continues to print the remaining excess data
onto the next physical page.
The media sensor looks for the gap, notch, hole, or black mark only after
the media has advanced the distance specified by the Label Length value
in the MEDIA SETUP menu or by the Host Forms Length value sent via
the software. Any gaps, notches, holes, or black marks that exist prior to
reaching the Label Length or Host Forms Length value are ignored.
When Clip Page is set to Disable, Mark and Gap media sensing reliability
can be improved and the sensor problems described below can be fixed:
•The image starts to print at an erroneous distance from the top-of-
form, especially towards the end of a roll where the media is severely
curled or scalloped.
•The image is incorrectly positioned as a result of the media sensor
triggering off of a dark, pre-printed image on the label or multiple gaps
within the label.
•The printer starts to print one label and then another all on the same
physical label, especially at the end of a roll where the media is
severely curled.
•An occasional blank label appears within a print job (in between
printed labels).
When Clip Page is set to Disable, the printer ignores any pre-printed dark
marks or multiple gaps on a label that could mistakenly be detected as
the next top-of-form position based on the specified Label Length value.
The Label Length option is in the MEDIA SETUP menu.
NOTE: When Clip Page = Disable, the correct Label Length value must be
entered. If the value is too long, the printer will ignore the actual gap
or mark it needs to detect. When using Gap sensing, the Label
Length value is equal to the physical length of a die cut or removable
label. When using Mark sensing, the Label Length value is the
physical distance from the leading edge of one black mark to the
leading edge of the next black mark.
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
81
Fault Reprint
This option determines how the printer handles data that was printing when
an error occurred.
•Disable (factory default). The printer will not reprint the label that was
printing when the error condition occurred.
•Enable. The printer reprints the label that was printing when the error
condition occurred.
NOTE: When Fault Reprint is set to Enable and a RIBBON OUT condition
occurs, some labels may not reprint. This depends on the label
length, print speed selected, and the additional time it takes to detect
this condition. Be sure to verify that all labels were reprinted after a
RIBBON OUT condition by using the Ribbon Low indicator as
described on page 81.
Ribbon Low
When enabled, and the ribbon remaining on the supply spindle is less than
1/8 full, the Attention indicator will flash, and "Ribbon Low" displays on the last
line of the LCD. A Ribbon Low warning will not prevent printing.
The options are Disable (factory default) and Enable.
The Ribbon Low submenu is available if Admin User is set to Enable in the
PRINTER SETUP menu.
Units
This item selects either millimeters or inches as the unit of measure.
The options are In Inches (factory default) and In Millimeters.
Set Label Length
This feature selects whether the Sensed Distance value derived from an Auto
or Manual Calibrate will be used to set the Label Length value in the MEDIA
SETUP menu.
•Manual (factory default). The Sensed Distance value derived from an
Auto or Manual Calibrate will not override or change the Label Length
value.
•Automatic. When an Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed, the Sensed
Distance value derived from either calibrate will override and change the
Label Length value. If no Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed, the
current Label Length value will be used.
NOTE: When Set Label Length = Automatic and Gap/Mark Sensor = Gap,
the printer will subtract the Gap Length value (in the SENSOR
SETUP menu) from the Sensed Distance value obtained when the
Auto or Manual Calibrate was performed.
If you set the label length to Automatic, the Enable setting for Use
Label Length under the Sensor Setup menu will be ignored.
82
Chapter 4 MEDIA SETUP Menu
TOF Detect Fault
Allows selection of three different TOF (Top-of-Form) detection faults.
NOTE: The correct Label Length value, equal to the physical length of the
installed label, must be entered MEDIA SETUP menu.
•3 Labels (factory default). The printer displays a Gap Not Detected fault
and stops printing when media has advanced a distance equal to three or
more times the Label Length value set in menu.
•9 Labels
•1 Label
Ticket Save Mode
This option determines the action of the media for Continuous (std), Tear-Off,
Tear-Off Strip and Cut Media Handling Modes after the printer is first powered
up or after the printhead has been opened and then closed. When enabled,
this option eliminates wasting label(s) or ticket stock when the printer
advances media to search for the next TOF position.
•Enable. The printer will assume that media is at the TOF position after
cycling power or after the printhead is opened and then closed. When a
print job is sent it is printed without advancing media to search for the next
TOF position.
NOTE: The user must ensure that media is at the correct TOF position (cross
perforation, liner gap, notch or mark at the tear bar edge) before
cycling power or before closing and locking the pivoting deck. In
addition, media must be calibrated and the correct Media Handling
Mode, Label Length and Gap/Mark Sensor selected and saved as the
Power-Up Config. Option applies to 3.75 inch or longer label lengths
only.
•Disable (factory default). The printer assumes that the media is not at the
correct TOF position after cycling power or after the printhead is opened
and then closed and advances media until the next gap, notch or mark is
detected by the Media Sensor(s). When print data is sent, printing begins
only after the next TOF is detected, resulting in one or more blank labels
being advanced.
•No Seek. The printer behaves as mode Enable with one exception: The
printer does not save gap position information across power cycles so
gaps, notches, or marks between the print head and the sensor will be
lost when printing begins.
NOTE: When set to Enable, Online Auto-Cal and Head-Auto-Cal will
automatically be set to Disable. The printer will not reset any settings
to Enable when Ticket Save Mode is later disabled.
MEDIA SETUP Submenus
83
TOF Adjust Mode
•Disable (factory default). This option disables the “TOF Adjust” distance
set using the TOF Adjust menu (see TOF Adjust below).
•Enable. This option enables the “TOF Adjust” distance set using the TOF
Adjust menu (see TOF Adjust below).
TOF Adjust
This option sets the distance from the Top Of Form (TOF) that is left blank
(unprinted) after a label has been removed in Tear-Off Strip. Normally printing
is done starting at TOF, but when this mode is enabled the start position for
printing can be adjusted from 0.00 to 0.40 inches from TOF (in increments of
0.01 inch). This adjustment can be helpful if a die cut label sticks to the platen
by means of jagged edges created during removal of a poorly die cut label
when using the tear bar. By controlling how much blank space there is from
TOF, you can control how much the media is called back after it is torn off.
The factory default is 0.40 inches.
BackFeed Motion
This setting controlls when paper is fed back to the print position.
•Before (factory default). With this setting, paper is fed back to the print
position immediately before printing.
•After. With this setting, paper is fed back to the print position immediately
after a job completes printing.
•None. With this setting, the paper will not be fed back to the print position.
84
Chapter 4 SENSOR SETUP Menu
SENSOR SETUP Menu
SENSOR
SETUP
(from page 66)
Gap/Mark
Sensor
Run Auto-Cal Run Profile
Gap*
Disable
Mark
Sensed
Distance
0.00 inches* 3
0.01 inches to xx inches 4
Pwr Up
Action
Auto-Cal*
Seek TOF
Disable
Head
Auto-Cal
Enable*
Disable
Gap/Mark
Thresh 4
000 to 255 1
Gap Length
0.12 inches*
0.05 to 1.00 inches
Min Calib
Delta
20*
012 to 050
Use Label
Length
Disable*
Enable
Paper Out
Thresh 4
000 to 255 1
Run Manual
Cal
Online
Auto-Cal
Disable*
Enable
Gap
Windowing
Disable*
Enable
Cal in Peel
Mode
Disable*
Enable
Threshold
Range
50%*
5% to 95%
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
1 The value depends on the sensor settings and calibration results.
2 If Gap/Mark Sensor (in the SENSOR SETUP menu) is set for Gap or Disable sensing, the factory default is 190.
If Gap/Mark Sensor is set for Mark, the factory default is 150.
3 You can change the unit value to millimeters. Set Units submenu to “In Millimeters” (in the MEDIA SETUP menu).
4 The value range varies depending on calibration results.
5 This option applies only when Gap/Mark Sensor is set to Mark.
Mark TOF
Detect 5
Mark Trail Edge*
Mark Lead Edge
SENSOR SETUP Submenus
85
SENSOR SETUP Submenus
Gap/Mark Sensor
The available options specify the sensor type needed for detecting the
Top-of-Form position on media with label length indicators (gaps, notches,
holes, or black marks).
•Gap (factory default). Select when using media with a liner space
between die-cut labels or when using tag stock with holes as label length
indicators on white background media. The Top-of-Form position is the
leading edge of the die cut label (trailing edge of the gap, notch, or hole).
•Disable. Select when using media with no label length indicators
(no gaps, notches, holes, or black marks), or when you want the printer to
ignore all existing label length indicators on the installed media.
NOTE: When you select Disable, the length of each label is based on the
Label Length value entered in the MEDIA SETUP menu or the value
sent via host software.
•Mark. Select when using media that has horizontal black marks or
inboard notches located on the underside of the label liner or tag stock.
The Top-of-Form depends on the Mark TOF Detect menu.
NOTE: For the SL4M Short Pitch RFID printer, the default is Mark.
Run Auto-Cal (Auto-Calibrate)
This feature is used to set the sensitivity and reliability of the Media Sensor in
detecting gaps, notches, holes, or black marks on the installed media, as well
as a paper out condition.
Press the ↵ key with “Run Auto-Cal” displayed. The printer will then advance
media the distance needed to accurately detect the label length indicators,
then stop at the Top-of-Form position and momentarily display the Sensed
Distance. The process takes a few seconds to complete. The end result will
be a change to the Gap/Mark Threshold, Paper Out Threshold, and Sensed
Distance values that the printer will use. The changes in values take effect
immediately within the current configuration menu.
Run Auto-Cal is completed successfully when the Sensed Distance displayed
correctly matches that of the installed media. When Gap is selected, the
Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge of one gap to
the trailing edge of the next gap (one label + one gap). When Mark is
selected, the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge
of one black mark to the trailing edge of the next black mark.
Run Auto-Cal supports label lengths up to 35 inches for Gap or Mark sensing
when Use Label Length is set to Disable.
86
Chapter 4 SENSOR SETUP Menu
Run Profile
This feature provides a graphical printout showing the relationship of the
Paper Out Threshold and the Gap/Mark Threshold. The profile printout
assists you in setting the thresholds for difficult media. This includes
preprinted labels, and labels with poor gap/media dynamic range.
When selected, the printer will advance media and print the media profile
along the length of each label. The printer will continue to print the profile until
you press ↵.
Sensed Distance
This value (in inches) represents the distance that was sensed between the
TOF of one label to the TOF of the next label. With gapped media installed,
the distance equals the physical label length plus one gap, notch, or hole
(trailing edge of one gap, notch, or hole to the trailing edge of the next gap,
notch, or hole). With black mark media installed, the distance equals the
trailing edge of one black mark to the trailing edge of the next. This value is
automatically determined only after successful completion of Auto or Manual
Calibrate and cannot be changed manually.
The factory default is 0.00 inches.
Gap/Mark Thresh
This menu item sets a value that, when exceeded by the output of the media
sensor, is recognized by the printer as a gap (or black mark). When Auto or
Manual Paper Calibrate is performed, the value displayed is equal to the
gap/mark threshold value set by this procedure. If running the procedure does
not provide a reliable Top-Of-Form detection, e.g., when using unusual
media, the Gap/Mark Thresh value can be manually set to the desired value.
The range is 000 to 255. The factory default value depends on the value set in
the Gap/Mark Sensor option (in the SENSOR SETUP menu).
NOTE: If Gap/Mark Sensor (in SENSOR SETUP menu) is set for Gap
sensing, the factory default is 140. If Gap/Mark Sensor is set for
Mark, the factory default is 75.
Paper Out Thresh
This menu item selects a value that, when exceeded by the output of the
media sensor, is recognized by the printer as a paper out condition. When
Auto or Manual Calibrate is performed, the value displayed is equal to the
paper out threshold value set by this procedure. If running the procedure does
not provide a reliable paper out detection, e.g., when using non-standard
media, the Paper Out Thresh value can be manually set to the desired value.
The range is 000 to 255. The factory default value depends on the value set in
the Gap/Mark Sensor option (in the SENSOR SETUP menu).
NOTE: If Gap/Mark Sensor (in SENSOR SETUP menu) is set for Gap or
Disable sensing, the factory default is 190. If Gap/Mark Sensor is set
for Mark, the factory default is 150.
SENSOR SETUP Submenus
87
Run Manual Cal
Run Manual Cal is another method of improving the printer’s media sensing
and is only used when Auto Calibrate has failed or the Gap/Mark Threshold or
Paper Out Threshold values derived from Auto Calibrate do not improve the
media sensors’ gap or mark sensing capability.
To initiate Run Manual Cal, press ↵ when “Run Manual Cal” displays under
the SENSOR SETUP menu. You will then be prompted for the remaining
steps.
Example: “REMOVE MEDIA/Press Enter”
NOTE: When requested to load an item make sure to place the item in a
position where the media sensor can detect the item. For example,
when requested to “LOAD MARK” place the Mark (Black TOF Line) at
the media sensor.
During the last stage of Run Manual Cal, the printer uses the statically derived
values, advances media, stops at the Top-of-Form position, and momentarily
displays the Sensed Distance. This process takes longer than Auto Calibrate,
and the end result is a change to the Gap/Mark Threshold, Paper Out
Threshold, and Sensed Distance values that the printer will use. These value
changes take effect immediately within the current configuration menu.
Run Manual Cal is completed successfully when the displayed Sensed
Distance correctly matches that of the installed media. When Gap is selected,
the Sensed Distance should match the length from the trailing edge of one
gap to the trailing edge of the next gap (or one label + one gap). When Mark is
selected, the Sensed Distance should match the length from the leading edge
of one black mark to the leading edge of the next black mark.
Run Manual Cal supports label lengths up to 35 inches for Gap or Mark
sensing when Use Label Length is set to Disable.
Pwr Up Action
•Auto-Cal (factory default). When the printer is first powered on, it will
complete its initialization and self-tests and then perform an Auto
Calibrate. Once the Auto Calibrate is complete, the printer will
momentarily display the Sensed Distance determined by the Auto
Calibrate.
NOTE: If the printer is in Peel mode a calibration will not be done unless
“Cal in Peel Mode” is set to enable.
•Seek TOF. Moves the media to TOF at power up provided that the user
has already calibrated media using gap/mark sensor. A seek to TOF will
not be done if Gap/Mark Sensor is set to Disable or Ticket Save Mode is
set to Enable.
•Disable. No movement at power up.
88
Chapter 4 SENSOR SETUP Menu
Head Auto-Cal
This option selects whether the printer does a media calibration after a
Printhead Open fault.
•Enable (factory default). Performs media calibration each time the
Printhead Open fault condition is cleared.
•Disable. No media calibration after Printhead Open fault.
NOTE: 1. A calibration will not be done if there is print data pending (data in
buffer) when the head open fault is cleared, and Head Auto-Cal is
enabled. If the printer is in Peel mode, the calibration will not be done
unless “Cal in Peel Mode” is set to enable.
2. For the SL4M Short Pitch RFID printer, the default is Disabled.
Online Auto-Cal
The options for Online Auto-Cal are:
•Disable (factory default).
•Enable. Whenever the printer is brought online, it automatically performs
an Run Auto-Cal (see “Run Auto-Cal (Auto-Calibrate)” on page 85). Once
the Run Auto- Cal is complete, the printer momentarily displays the
Sensed Distance determined by the Auto Calibrate and then resumes
printing any pending jobs.
NOTE: A calibration will not be done when there is data in the buffer and
when Error Recover (in MEDIA SETUP menu) is enabled
(see page 68). If the printer is in Peel mode, the calibration will not be
done unless “Cal in Peel Mode” is set to enable.
Gap Windowing
This feature compensates for any early falling edges or spurious peaks and
troughs that may appear within the gap length in media. These edges or
peaks and troughs can cause unreliable detection of the leading edge of the
next label (top-of-form). Use Gap Windowing to resolve the following
problems:
•Loss of one or more complete (serialized) labels.
•Start of an image printed in the middle of a gap, especially with fanfold,
perforated media.
•Top part of an image lost when printing in head-first orientation.
The options for Gap Windowing are Disable and Enable:
•Disable (factory default). When the leading edge of a gap is detected, the
printer continuously looks for the leading edge of the next label and uses
it as the TOF position. Perforations or unusual media discrepancies within
the gap can cause inaccurate TOF detection.
SENSOR SETUP Submenus
89
•Enable. When the leading edge of a gap is detected, the printer ignores
the first 90% of the gap length value specified in the Gap Length menu
option. The result is that cross perforations or unusual media
discrepancies within the gap are filtered out, allowing the printer to
reliably detect the actual leading edge of the next label and use it as the
TOF position.
NOTE: If Gap Windowing is enabled, the Gap Length menu must be set
correctly.
Gap Length
Gap Length is the actual length (height) of a label gap measured in .01 inch
increments. The range is 0.05 to 1.00 inches.
The factory default is 0.12 inches.
NOTE: If Gap Windowing is set to Enable, you must enter the correct Gap
Length. If the Gap Length is too long, the image will shift down from
the leading edge (TOF) of the label.
Cal in Peel Mode
This option allows you to perform a calibration (Run Auto-Cal or Pwr Up
Auto-Cal) in Peel-Off Media Handling mode.
•Disable (factory default). The printer will not permit calibration and a
“CANNOT CALIBRATE/Disable Peel-Off” message will briefly display.
Additionally, if Pwr Up Auto-Cal or Head Auto-Cal is enabled, the printer
will not perform calibration at power up or when the head is closed.
•Enable. Run Auto-Cal can be performed from the front panel, and if the
Pwr Up Auto-Cal option is enabled, calibration will be performed at power
up.
NOTE: Calibration in Peel-Off mode does not stop and wait for you to remove
peeled labels. Therefore, be prepared to remove the labels as they
are automatically peeled.
Min Calib Delta
Minimum Calibrate Delta changes the minimum threshold value the sensor(s)
require to detect the difference between the label and a gap, notch, hole or
black mark. This allows bolder gaps (such as notches or holes) to be used as
the TOF while intermediate gaps (liner) can be ignored. Increasing the Min
Calib Delta makes the sensor(s) less sensitive to intermediate gaps and
noise. Decreasing the Min Calib Delta makes the sensor(s) more sensitive for
detecting gaps on low contrast media, where there is very little difference
between the label and the gap (liner).
The range is 012 - 050. The factory default is 20.
90
Chapter 4 SENSOR SETUP Menu
Use Label Length
Determines whether or not the Label Length value set in the MEDIA SETUP
menu is used during Run Auto-Cal.
•Disable (factory default). Run Auto-Cal relies exclusively in its ability to
detect varying transitions between labels and gaps, notches, holes, or
black marks while advancing media during the calibrate process to
determine Sensed Distance. The amount of media advanced is based on
the number of transitions detected.
NOTE: Although the “Use Label Length” keeps its value (enable/disable) at
all times, it will always be disabled when “Set Label Length” is set to
“Automatic”. The correct setting will take effect when “Set Label
Length” is set to manual. Based on the setting on the “Set Label
Length” menu in the Media Setup menu, the “Use Label Length”
menu will be ignored (disabled).
•Enable. The Label Length value set in the MEDIA SETUP menu is used
in the calibrate algorithm. This causes the Run Auto-Cal process to
advance media the minimum distance required to detect the true gap,
notch, hole, or black mark used for TOF (Top-of-Form) sensing. This
resolves problems where the sensor(s) may mistake high noise levels or
preprinted images within the label as the gap, notch, hole, or black mark
that could result in a sensed distance value much shorter than the actual
label length. Example: A 0.2 inch calibrated Sensed Distance with a 3.0
inch long label installed.
NOTE: Setting the Label Length value less than half the actual length of the
label in use will result in erroneous Sensed Distance values when
Run Auto-Cal is performed.
Threshold Range
This option allows the user to select the optimal threshold range for the label
stock in use. The printer defaults to using a threshold range of 50% of the
positive going pulse (see Media Profile) that represents each gap, notch or
mark detected after doing an Auto or Manual Calibrate. The printer then
detects anything within the label with that threshold range as TOF. While this
range is ideal for most medias, some labels with a preprinted image, liner gap
or inlay can confuse the media sensor(s) causing a false TOF detection. In
most cases this can be resolved by selecting a higher threshold range so the
printer will only trigger on the true TOF (gap, notch or mark) position.
The range is: 5% to 95% in 5% increments
The factory default is 50%.
NOTE: Set the label length value in the Media Setup menu to the actual
length of the installed labels. A new threshold range will not take
effect until an Auto or Manual Calibrate is successfully performed. A
Media Profile should be run after a Calibrate to visually verify that the
new range is the best possible selection.
Overview
91
Mark TOF Detect
Allows the user to select which edge of the black line is used for TOF (Top of
Form). The leading edge refers to the first edge seen by the media sensor as
the media feeds out of the printer or the start of the black line.
•Mark Trail Edge (factory default). Trailing edge or end of black line
denotes TOF.
•Mark Lead Edge. Leading edge or start of black line denotes TOF.
NOTE: 1. This option applies only when Gap/Mark Sensor is set to Mark.
2. For the SL4M Short Pitch RFID printer, the default is Mark Lead
Edge.
EMULATION MENU
Overview
This section covers the following emulations:
•PGL (page 93)
•ZGL Config. (Refer to the ZGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.)
•TGL Config. (Refer to the TGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.)
•IGL Config. (Refer to the IGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.)
•STGL Config. (Refer to the STGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.)
•DGL Config. (Refer to the DGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.)
•IEGL Config. (Refer to the IEGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.)
•MGL Config. (Refer to the MGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.)
You can select emulation default parameters directly from the control panel, or
by control codes as explained in the appropriate Programmer's Reference
Manual.
IMPORTANT
BEFORE you reconfigure an emulation, print a configuration sheet to
see all current settings.
PGL
The PGL emulation is the software based Printronix Graphics Language
(PGL) for the Printronix thermal printer family. It is based upon, and
compatible with, the IGP-100/200/400 board. It includes the following
features:
On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels
with a “preprinted” look for each application. PGL programs control all graphic
functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing
time.
Graphic capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal lines with user-
selectable thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features. Forms
and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically.
92
Chapter 4 EMULATION MENU
Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned “fixed” information (entered
when the form is created), be overlayed onto the form (positioned in a specific
location after the form is created), or may be dynamically merged with the
form.
Selectable Bar Codes provide you with the appropriate bar code for your
application using standard wide-to-narrow ratios. A wide selection of bar
codes are available: Australian 4-State, Codabar, Code 39, Code 93, Code
128 Subset A, B and C, Data Matrix, EAN 8, EAN 13, FIM, Interleaved 2 of 5,
German I-2/5, Intelligent Mail, ITF 14, Matrix, Maxicode, MSI A through D,
PDF-417, Planet, Plessey, POSTNET, PostBar, Royal Mail, UCC/EAN-128,
UPC-A, UPC-E, UPCSHIP, and UPS 11. UPC and EAN bar codes can also
specify add-on data. Refer to the PGL® Programmer’s Reference Manual for
more information.
Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where
needed. Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a
wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size (up
to 11.3 inches wide and tall). Compressed print sizes of 12, 13, 15, and 17
characters per inch (cpi) are available.
Logos are created using alphanumeric commands and add many print and
shading features for a “customized” appearance to forms, reports, and labels.
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,
expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees
clockwise or counterclockwise, or they can be printed upside down.
Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing white
characters on a dark background.
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.
You can identify individual numeric and bar code data fields, which includes
automatic increment or decrement functions.
Scaling Capability permits graphic elements, such as corners or boxes, to
retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical
density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi.
Multinational Character Sets provide 32 international character sets in
which sets 14 - 15 are reserved, sets 16 - 23 are download overlay sets, and
sets 24 - 31 are user-defined sets. When using the ~ISET command to select
0 - 13, each character set has 96 characters, from 0x20 - 0x7F.
User-defined sets using the ~USET command allows you to create your own
character sets using the characters defined and stored in memory.
Extended Character Sets provide the user additional character sets besides
the 32 international character sets. Use the ~ISET command to select
different character sets including UTF-8 as well as alternate character sets by
entering a two-byte string enclosed within single quotes.
Overview
93
EMULATION
(from page 66)
Select Emulation
Setup
See page 94 or
refer to the PGL
Programmer’s
Reference
Manual
PGL*
ZGL
TGL
IGL
STGL
DGL
IEGL
MGL
PGL
Setup 4
Refer to the ZGL
Programmer’s
Reference Manual
ZGL
Setup 4
Refer to the TGL
Programmer’s
Reference Manual
TGL
Setup 4
Refer to the STGL
Programmer’s
Reference Manual
STGL
Setup 4
Refer to the DGL
Programmer’s
Reference Manual
DGL
Setup 4
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when you enable Admin User (in the PRINTER
SETUP menu).
1 This menu appears only if PGL is selected in the Select submenu.
2 xxx is set to the active emulation (PGL, ZGL, TGL, IGL, STGL, DGL, IEGL, or MGL).
3 xxx is set to the active emulation (ZGL, TGL, IGL, STGL, DGL, IEGL, or MGL).
4 This menu appears only if the emulation is selected in the Select submenu.
XXX
Diagnostics 2
Refer to the IGL
Programmer’s
Reference Manual
IGL
Setup 4
On*
Debug
Fault
Off
Host
PGL
Diagnostics 1
Disable*
Print
Debug Port
xxx
Diagnostics 3
Refer to the MGL
Programmer’s
Reference Manual
MGL
Setup 4
Refer to the IEGL
Programmer’s
Reference Manual
IEGL
Setup 4
94
Chapter 4 EMULATION MENU
PGL Setup
PGL
SETUP
(from page 91)
Character
Group
See page 96
Standard
Sets
0) ASCII*
1) German
2) Swedish
3) Danish
4) Norwegian
5) Finnish
6) English
7) Dutch
8) French
Select LPI
6*
1 to 1000
Define CR
Code
CR = CR*
CR = CR + LF
Define LF
Code
LF = LF*
LF = CR + LF
Autowrap
Disable*
Enable
Auto
Uppercase
Disable*
Enable
Slash 0
Disable*
Enable
Select SFCC
126*
1 - 255
Host Form
Length
Enable*
Var. Length
Var Dynamic Len
Disable
Var Form
Adjust
00.0 inches*
00.1 inches to
03.0 inches
Var Form
Type
Add Nothing*
Add;0
Add;X
Optimized
Ratio
Disable*
Enable
PI Slew
Range
16*
15
CR Edit
Disable*
Enable
Skip
Cmd Prefix
Enable*
Disable
Ignore Text
Disable*
Enable
Ext Execute
Copy
Disable*
Enable
AI 00 Spaces
Disable*
Enable
Select SO
Char
14*
0 to 255
Do FF
at TOF
Enable*
Disable
Expanded
Font
Scalable*
Block
Alt Block 1
Forms
Handling
Disable*
Auto Eject
Auto TOF
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to
Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
9) Spanish
10) Italian
11) Turkish
12) CP 437
13) CP 850
14-15) Reserved
16-23) Dwn Overlay
24-31) User Def.
Ignore
Mode
Disable*
Enable
Select Char
0*
0 to 255
Scalable
Size
Normal*
Block
PGL
Normal
LP+ Menu*
PGL Menu
Power on
IGP/PGL
Enable*
Disable
IGP100
Compatbl.
Disable*
Enable
Overview
95
PGL SETUP
(continued
from page 94)
Lead
PDF Dist
0.10 Inches*
0.01 inches to
0.10 inches
Trunc
Dyn Data
Disable*
Enable
Vertical
Adjust
0 Dots*
-20 to 20 dots
Boundary
Check
Enable*
Disable
Repeat Form
Opt
Enable*
Disable
Preparser
Disable*
Enable
Storage
Select
DISK = EMC*
DISK = PCB FLASH
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to
Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
User-Def
Ratio
Enable*
Disable
I-2/5
Selection
Leading Zero*
Trailing Space
X2 DPD
Modulo 7 CD
C39
Compatbl.
Disable*
Enable
UPC
Descenders
Always*
Never
Only With PDF
96
Chapter 4 EMULATION MENU
Standard
Sets*
Arabic Sets Cyrillic Sets European
Sets
Greek Sets
Hebrew Sets Turkish Sets
0) ASCII*
1) German
2) Swedish
3) Danish
4) Norwegian
5) Finnish
6) English
7) Dutch
8) French
9) Spanish
10) Italian
11) Turkish
12) CP 437
13) CP 850
14-15) Reserved
16-23) Dwn Overlay
24-31) User Def.
ASMO 449*
ASMO 449+
ASMO 708
ASMO 708+
MS DOS CP710
MS DOS CP720
Sakr CP714
Aptec CP715
CP 786
IBM CP864
IBM CP1046
Arabic Lam One
Arabic Lam Two
Win. CP 1256
Farsi 1
Farsi 2
1098 Farsi 1285
Code Page 866*
Cyrillic CP 437
Cyrillic 113
Cyrillic 8859-5
ISO 915
Code Page 855
Cyrillic 7 Bit
Ukrainian
Bulgarian
Win. CP 1251
Latvian 866
CP 1048
Latin 2 8859-2*
Code Page 852
Mazovia
Kamenicky
Roman 8
PC-437 Slavic
Slavic 1250
Code Page 865
Code Page 860
Latin 1 8859-1
Latin 5 8859-9
Latin 9 8859-15
Polish POL1
Win. CP 1250
Win. CP 1252
Win. CP 1257
CP 858 EURO
Lith. CP 773
Serbo Croatic 1
Serbo Croatic 2
CP 774
CP 775
ISO 8859-4
DEC 256 Greek*
ELOT 928 Greek
Greek 3
ABY Greek
ABG Greek
ELOT 927 Greek
Greek 851
Greek 437
Greek 8859-7
Win. CP 1253
Greek 813 EURO
Greek 869 EURO
Hebrew Old*
Hebrew New
Hebrew DEC
Latin-1 Hebrew
Win. CP 1255
Data Gen. Turk.*
DEC Turkish
IBM Turkish
Siemens Turkish
PTT Turkish
IBC Turkish
Bull Turkish
AS400 Turkish
Unisys Turkish
NCR Turkish
PST Turkish
UNIS-1 Turkish
Code Page 853
INFO Turkish
Win. CP 1254
Code Page 857
Azeri
Notes:
* = Factory Default.
1 UTF-8 can be used with any font to access all of the
characters available in that font. For a font with the full
Unicode set, the Andalé font is available for purchase,
see page 229.
To access the desired basic character set, use the Left
and Right keys. To select the set, press the ↵ key. After
you have selected the basic set, access the subset
selection menu by pressing the Down key. Once in the
subset menu, access the desired subset by pressing
the Left and Right keys and select it by pressing the
↵ key.
UTF-8 1
Character
Group
(from page 94)
EMULATION Submenus
97
EMULATION Submenus
Select
This function allows you to activate any resident emulation listed in the menu.
The factory default is PGL.
There are two methods for selecting the desired emulation:
•Select the emulation under the Select menu option and save it as
Power-up Config.
•Send a host command to switch the emulation automatically (see the
appropriate Programmer’s Reference Manual for details).
xxx Diagnostics
NOTE: xxx is set to the active emulation (PGL, ZGL, TGL, IGL, STGL, DGL,
MGL, or IEGL).
•PGL Diagnostics. This item sets the error reporting capability of the
printer for PGL forms as follows:
•On (factory default). Full error checking reported. Any element that
falls off the current page is reported as an error.
•Debug. Puts the printer in debug mode whenever a form is defined in
CREATE mode. Each line of the CREATE form will be printed along
with an error if one has occurred.
•Fault. Allows you to halt the printer if a PGL error occurs. If you select
this option, the PGL error prints on the paper, the message “IGP/PGL
Error” displays on the front panel, and the printer goes offline. You
must clear the error before the printer can resume normal operation.
•Off. There is no error checking. Graphic elements such as alpha, line,
barcodes, etc. will be clipped if they are beyond the page boundaries.
•Host. Returns error messages to the host computer.
•xxx Diagnostics
NOTE: xxx is set to the active emulation (ZGL, TGL, IGL, STGL, DGL, MGL,
or IEGL).
•Disable. Prints the best results and will not log errors.
•Print. Prints the labels with best results and prints the errors on a
separate label.
•Debug Port. Prints the label and sends the errors to the Debug port.
Emulation Setup
Options for setting up the emulations. The options are PGL Setup, ZGL
Setup, TGL Setup, STGL Setup, IGL Setup, DGL Setup, MGL Setup and
IEGL Setup. Refer to the appropriate Programmer’s Reference Manual.
98
Chapter 4 EMULATION MENU
PGL Setup Submenus
NOTE: The submenu descriptions do not include ZGL, TGL, IGL, STGL,
DGL, MGL, and IEGL emulations.
Character Group and Character Sets
This menu item selects the character set used by the printer. See page 96 for
the available character sets.
Select LPI
This is the number of lines to be printed per inch. For example, at 6 lpi there is
1/6 inch from the top of one print line to the top of the next print line.
The options are 1 to 1000 LPI. The factory default is 6.0 LPI.
Define CR Code
This option controls the action of the printer when it receives a Carriage
Return code (0D hex) from the host computer. If this feature is enabled, each
time the printer receives a carriage return, it inserts an additional Line Feed
code (0A hex) into the data stream. Do not use this feature if the host
computer sends line feeds to the printer.
•CR = CR (factory default). Does not insert an extra line feed after each
carriage return.
•CR = CR + LF. Inserts an extra line feed after each carriage return. The
next print position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Define LF Code
This parameter forces the printer to insert an automatic Carriage Return code
into the data stream whenever a Line Feed code occurs. This can be used in
most installations, but it is required if the host computer does not send
carriage returns to the printer.
NOTE: For this menu to take effect in PGL, PGL Normal needs to be set to
PGL Menu (see page 94).
•LF = LF (factory default). Does not perform an automatic carriage return.
The next print position will be at the current print character position on the
next line.
•LF = CR + LF. Performs an automatic carriage return. The next print
position will be print position 1 of the next line.
Autowrap
This parameter determines if text will wrap to the next line when the line of
text exceeds the right margin.
•Disable (factory default). Truncates the text beyond the right margin until
a CR or CR + LF is received.
•Enable. Automatically inserts a CR + LF after a full print line.
EMULATION Submenus
99
Auto Uppercase
This parameter enables the printer to print text in all uppercase when using
the ALPHA command.
•Disable (factory default). The printer will print text in upper and
lowercase.
•Enable. The printer will print text in uppercase only.
Slash 0
This parameter allows you to print the numeral “0” with or without the slash.
This option applies to all character sets except OCR A and OCR B.
•Disable (factory default). Zero is printed without a slash.
•Enable. Zero is printed with a slash.
Select SFCC
You can specify which decimal code (1-255) will be used as the Special
Function Control Code (SFCC). The SFCC denotes that the following data is
a PGL command.
The range is 1-255, and the factory default is 126.
Host Form Length
Determines how the physical label length (see Label Length under the MEDIA
SETUP menu) is affected upon receiving an EXECUTE command.
•Enable (factory default). The physical label length will change to match
the form length (specified in CREATE command). The physical label size
remains at the new setting until another EXECUTE command is received,
or the PRINTER SETUP menu settings are changed.
•Var. Length. The physical label length is the longest print element
defined in CREATE mode, including both static and dynamic elements,
plus the setting of “Var Form Adjust” with CREATE;NAME;0.
•Var Dynamic Len. The physical label length will change to the longest
print element defined in the form, including the dynamic element in
EXECUTE mode and the static element in CREATE mode, plus the
setting of “Var Form Adjust” with CREATE;NAME;0.
•Disable. Forms printed in EXECUTE mode do not change the physical
label size. Therefore, the size of the form (defined in CREATE mode)
must fit within the current label dimensions, or errors may occur.
NOTE: The difference between Var. Length and Var Dynamic Len is for
example, CREATE;NAME;0. If there are 10 dynamic fields defined in
CREATE mode, but only three dynamic fields are used in EXECUTE
mode (for Var. Length), the label length will be based on the longest
printed element among the 10 dynamic field and the static element
defined in CREATE mode. For Var Dynamic Len, the label length will
be based on the longest printed element among the three fields
defined in EXECUTE mode and the Static element defined in
CREATE mode.
100
Chapter 4 EMULATION MENU
Var Form Adjust
This specifies an amount (in tenths of inches) to add to the length of variable-
length forms. Variable-length forms use a semicolon at the end of the
CREATE command: ~CREATE;<FORMNAME>;0.
Var Form Type
•Add Nothing (factory default). When selected, no action is taken.
•Add ;0. When selected, the form length ends at the longest printed
element. (Same as ∼CREATE;filename;0)
•Add ;X. When selected, the form length is the same as the physical page
length (the Label Length menu under MEDIA SETUP). (Same as
∼CREATE;filename;X).
Optimized Ratio
This option selects different bar code ratios for certain bar codes including
Code 39 and Interleaved 2 of 5. It is included for compatibility with the
IGP-X00 printers.
•Disable (factory default). Use standard bar code ratios.
•Enable. Select the alternate bar code ratios.
PI Slew Range
You can specify how many lines the paper will feed.
•16 (factory default). A paper slew of 0-15 will move 1-16 lines.
•15. A paper slew of 1-15 will move 1-15 lines. A paper slew of 0 will move
1 line.
CR Edit
This parameter determines if a carriage return will be followed by a line feed.
•Disable (factory default). The printer ignores all carriage returns that are
not followed by line feeds.
•Enable. The printer processes all carriage returns, even for those that are
not followed by line feeds.
Skip Cmd Prefix
Stands for Skip Command Prefix. This parameter determines if the printer will
print any data before a PGL command is received.
Ignore Text
•Disable (factory default). When disabled, text in normal mode will be
printed. Attributes to be printed depend on the PGL Normal menu setting.
•Enable. When enabled, any line of text (non-PGL commands) in normal
mode will be ignored.
EMULATION Submenus
101
Power on IGP/PGL
You can set the PGL feature so that it is enabled or disabled when the printer
is powered on.
•Enable (factory default). IPG/PGL is enabled when the printer is powered
on. (The PGL feature is initialized in Normal mode).
•Disable. PGL is disabled when the printer is powered on. (The PGL
feature is initialized in Quiet mode).
Ext Execute Copy
•Disable (factory default). Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are not allowed
if the optional Form Count parameter (number of forms to print) is
specified as part of the Execute command. (This setting is IGP-100
compatible.)
•Enable. Dynamic data, overlay data, etc. are allowed within a form where
the Form Count parameter is specified in the Execute command. In this
case, the same form is printed for whatever the Form Count is.
Incremental data is not incremented since the printing page is the same.
The overlay data is only printed with the first form and not on subsequent
forms, and each form is printed on a separate page.
AI 00 Spaces
This option is designated for EAN/UCC-128 barcodes whose application
identifier (AI) is 00.
•Disable (factory default). The printable data field is printed with the AI
enclosed in parentheses. This is the standard EAN/UCC-128 format.
•Enable. The printable data field is printed with the UCC fields separated
by spaces. This option is IGP-X00 compatible.
Select SO Char
Allows you to specify a decimal code from 0 through 255 to be used in place
of SO (Shift Out) as the control code which allows access for the alternate set
of control function characters. See the description of the Code 128 barcodes
in the PGL Programmer's Reference Manual for details.
The range is 0 to 255, and the default is 14.
Ignore Mode
This parameter instructs the IGP to ignore the character selected under the
Select Character menu.
•Disable (factory default). The IGP does not ignore any characters.
•Enable. The IGP ignores the character specified in the Select Character
menu.
102
Chapter 4 EMULATION MENU
Select Char
This parameter selects which character to discard when Ignore Mode is
enabled.
•0 (the default)
•0 - 255. Any character from 0 to 255 in decimal.
Do FF at TOF
Determines whether the printer, with media already set at the TOF (Top-of-
Form) position, will advance media to the next TOF position upon receipt of
an FF command.
•Enable (factory default). The printer will advance media from the present
TOF position to the next TOF position upon receipt of an FF command,
causing a blank form.
•Disable. The printer will not advance media from the present TOF
position to the next TOF position upon receipt of an FF command.
IGP100 Compatibl.
This parameter forces the output to correspond with IGP-100 printer output in
cases where there are differences.
The options are Disable (factory default) and Enable.
Expanded Font
Expanded font allows you to print characters in different sizes with specified
parameters and to select which font face to use.
•Scalable (factory default). Uses scalable fonts.
•Block. Uses block fonts.
•Alt Block 1. Uses alternative block fonts with a different character set.
Scalable Size
This option determines whether scalable characters are sized based on
normal scaling or based on the size of block characters. If the option Block is
set, then the scalable character are made to be the same size as block
characters in the old IGP-X00 printers.
The options are Normal (factory default) and Block.
Forms Handling
This submenu allows the user to handle the form in the following ways:
•Disable (factory default). No effect.
•Auto Eject. Automatically moves to the next TOF if the form is in the
middle of the page, and then ejects a page by performing a form feed
( FF).
•Auto TOF. Automatically does a form feed (FF) to the next top of form if
the form is in the middle of the page.
EMULATION Submenus
103
PGL Normal
This option determines whether PGL passes the text data in Normal mode or
whether PGL will print the data text itself.
•LP+ Menu (factory default). PGL will pass the text data to the menu only
in default setting state.
•PGL Menu. PGL will always print the text data itself.
UPC Descenders
This parameter allows you to print bar code descenders when human
readable data is not presented in the UPC/EAN bar codes.
•Always (factory default). UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with
descenders, even if there is no human readable data.
•Never. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed without descenders if the PDF
command is present.
•Only With PDF. UPC/EAN bar codes are printed with descenders only
when the PDF command is presented.
I-2/5 Selection
This option is added to be compatible with a special IGP-X00 customization.
Usually, if Interleaved 2/5 bar codes have an odd number of digits, a leading
zero is inserted in front of the data. However, this special IGP-X00
customization gives you the option of adding a space character at the end of
the bar code instead.
•Leading Zero (factory default). A leading zero is inserted in front of the
data.
•Trailing Space. A space is inserted at the end of the data instead of a
leading zero.
•X2 DPD. When selected, I-2/5 bar code with a magnification X2 will use
the specially configured ratios 3:3:6:5 rather than 3:6:9:12 for
compatibility issues.
•Modulo 7 CD. The I-2/5 bar code uses a modulo 7 check digit instead of
the default modulo 10 check digit.
C39 Compatbl.
This menu makes the old method of decoding C39 alternative character set
compatible with the new method. For example in the old method for barcode
data, %K123%M, the barcode scans as [123]. The new method scans the
barcode as %K123%M.
•Disable (factory default). Uses the current way of decoding.
•Enable. Matches the old method of decoding.
104
Chapter 4 EMULATION MENU
User-Def Ratio
This option allows you to ignore the user-defined barcode ratio and replace it
with the default ratio (X1).
•Enable (factory default). Allows the user-defined barcode ratio.
•Disable. The user-defined barcode ratio will be replaced with the default
ratio (X1).
Lead PDF Dist
Adjusts the leading and trailing character spacing distance of the PDF for
UPC/EAN barcodes.
The range is 0.01- 0.10 inches in 0.01 inch increments, and the factory default
is 0.10 inches.
Trunc Dyn Data
This submenu allows the user to truncate the dynamic data up to the
maximum data length specified in Create Mode.
•Disable (factory default). If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data
length, an error will report.
•Enable. If the dynamic data exceeds the maximum data length, the data
truncates.
Vertical Adjust
This option is to adjust printer dpi to expand or shrink the vertical position of
graphic elements and the height of the vertical line. The factory default is 0
dots. The adjustment range is from -20 dots to 20 dots with respect to the
current printer dpi.
Boundary Check
This option turns on or off the page boundary check for all print elements.
•Enable (factory default). When enabled, an out of bound error is reported
if the print element is out of the page boundary.
•Disabled. When disabled, no out of bound error is reported. The out of
bound print element prints over the page boundary.
Repeat Form Opt
•Enable (factory default). Speeds up the processing of repeated forms for
PGL, thereby resulting in increased printer throughput. This option
provides no speed benefit for forms that are unrelated to one another and
should be disabled under those circumstances.
•Disable. Should be selected when subsequent forms are unrelated to
one another.
105
Preparser
Allows users to send the Preparser command to the printer through any port.
•Disable (factory default). Does not use the Preparser command.
•Enable. Sends the Preparser command
Storage Select
Allows the user to map the parameter DISK to either EMC (Expanded
Memory Cartridge) or PC Flash (PC Board Flash).
•Disk = EMC (the factory default)
•Disk = PCB Flash
106
Chapter 4 PRINTER SETUP Menu
PRINTER SETUP Menu
PRINTER
SETUP
(from page 66)
Display
Language
English*
German
French
Italian
Spanish
Portuguese
Simp. Chinese
Trad. Chinese
Korean
Save Char
to Fls
Del Char
frm RAM
Ld Char at
PwrUp
Disable*
Enable
Del Set
from RAM
Ld Set
at PwrUp
Disable*
Enable
Main FFS
Overwrite Files*
Enable*
Disable
View Main Files
Delete Files
Flash Avail.
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
1 This menu appears only if a CST (Character Sequence Table) file is loaded. If a RFID option is installed,
loading a CST will hide/override the ‘SMT:Status’ menu.
Power Saver
Time
15 minutes*
30 minutes
45 minutes
60 minutes
240 minutes
1 minute
5 minutes
10 minutes
Pwr Save
Control
Enable*
Disable
Alarm
On*
Cont. Beep
Off
Power-up
State
Online*
Offline
PTX Setup
Parse
Enable*
Ignore
Disable
PTX Setup
SFCC
21h*
01-FF
Cancel Key
Enable*
Disable
Ret. Status
Port
Automatic*
Disable
E-Net Data Port
Serial
E-Net Stat Port
USB
IEEE 1284
Del Char
frm Fls
Ld Char
from Fls
Save Set
to Fls
PAA: Status 1
Disable*
Enable
Ld Set
from Fls
Compatibility
Default*
Laser
P5000
T3000
T1006
Del Set
frm Fls
PJL
Control
Disable*
Enable
Rcv. Status
Port
Automatic*
Serial
107
PRINTER SETUP
(continued
from page 106)
Set Lock Key
Tall
Characters
Batch
Counter
Date 4
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable (in the PRINTER
SETUP menu).
3 This menu appears if the EMC is installed.
4 This menu appears only if the real time clock option is installed.
Max Font
Buffer
300 KBytes*
100 to 1800 Kbytes
Max Cache
Memory
900 KBytes*
50 to 2000 KBytes
Max Cached
Char
01 KBytes*
01 to 20 KBytes
Standard
Chars.
340*
0 to 512
Extra Bold
Char.
OCR-A
Chars.
384*
0 to 512
OCR-B
Chars.
304*
0 to 512
504*
0 to 512
Bold
Chars.
448*
0 to 512
Disable*
Enable
Disable*
Enable
Auto Locking
Disable*
Enable
Print
File List
Optimize&
Reboot
EMC FFS 3
Overwrite Files*
Enable*
Disable
View EMC Files
Delete Files
Flash Avail.
Admin
User
Disable*
Enable
Disp.
Intensity
10*
0 to 20
Bot Line
Display
Ribbon Life*
Current Config
Asset Tag
IPAddress
No Display
Feed Key
Online
Feed*
Reprint Last
108
Chapter 4 PRINTER SETUP Menu
PRINTER SETUP Submenus
PAA: Status
See “Printronix Application Adapter” in the PrintNet Enterprise Suite User’s
Manual.
•Disable (factory default). The printer disables the use of PAA
functionality.
•Enable. The printer enables the use of PAA functionality.
Power Saver Time
The time interval you specify for this parameter sets the amount of idle time
before the printer goes into Power Saver mode.
Pressing any key removes the power saver message from the control panel.
Sending a print job to the printer also turns off power saver mode.
The options are 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 45, 60, and 240 minutes.
The factory default is 15 minutes.
Pwr Save Control
Pwr Save Control allows you to enable and disable Power Saver mode. If
enabled, the menu for Power Saver Time is in effect.
The options are Enable (factory default) and Disable.
Display Language
This parameter chooses the language that will appear on the LCD: English,
German, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, Simplified Chinese, Traditional
Chinese, or Korean.
The factory default is English.
Alarm
•On (factory default). An audible alarm sounds (3 beeps) when a fault
occurs, such as a paper jam.
•Cont. Beep. A continuous audible alarm sounds when a fault occurs,
which can be stopped by pressing CLEAR.
•Off. No audible alarm sounds.
Power-up State
•Online (factory default). The printer powers up in the online state.
•Offline. The printer powers up in the offline state. This selection must be
saved as a power-up configuration to be used.
PRINTER SETUP Submenus
109
PTX Setup Parse
•Enable (factory default). Will parse and execute the PTX SETUP
commands.
•Ignore. Will parse the PTX SETUP commands but not act on them.
•Disable. Will not parse the PTX SETUP commands so they will print out
as text.
PTX Setup SFCC
Allows you to choose the hex value of the ASCII character you wish to use as
the SFCC for the PTX SETUP command. Valid hex values are 01-FF.
The factory default value is hex 21, which corresponds to the “!” character.
PJL Control
•Disable (factory default). Will not parse the PJL commands; they will not
print out as text.
•Enable. Will parse and execute the PJL commands.
Cancel Key
•Enable (factory default). When enabled, the key may be used in
offline mode to clear all data in the print buffer, and deleted data will not
be printed.
•Disable.
Rcv. Status Port
This option defines the interface being used to receive the emulation status
command.
•Automatic (factory default). When selected, the status command is sent
to the printer with the print data through the active host interface.
•Serial. When selected, the status command is sent to the printer through
the serial interface regardless of the active host interface.
Ret. Status Port
This option selects the port for the Return Status Commands (i.e., ~STATUS
(PGL) and ~HS (ZGL)) to send the status data back to the Host.
The options are Automatic (factory default), Disable, E-NET Data Port, Serial,
E-NET Stat Port, USB, and IEEE 1284.
Automatic uses the currently active host port. However, if in AutoSwitching
mode and no port is currently active, Automatic will use the last active port.
110
Chapter 4 PRINTER SETUP Menu
Compatibility
This parameter allows you to make SL4M/T4M series thermal printers
compatible with other printers.
When trying to preserve compatibility with respect to barcodes, you may not
always be able to make them equal in size. This is due to the various dot-per-
inch differences between printer types. When an exact match cannot be
made, the barcode is reduced in size so that the form bounds will not be
compromised and the barcode will be readable.
•Default (factory default). Use for optimum performance.
•Laser. Forces the output to correspond with the Printronix laser line of
printers.
•P5000. Forces the output to correspond with the P5000 line of line matrix
printers.
•T3000. Forces the output to correspond with the T3000 line of thermal
printers.
•T1006. Forces the output to correspond with the T1006 line of thermal
printers.
Del Char frm Fls
This option deletes downloaded character(s) from flash memory.
Ld Char from Fls
This option loads downloaded character(s) from flash memory to RAM.
Save Char to Fls
This option saves downloaded character(s) to flash memory.
Del Char frm RAM
This option deletes downloaded character(s) from RAM.
Ld Char at PwrUp
This option loads downloaded character(s) from flash memory to RAM at
Power Up. The options are Disable (factory default) and Enable.
Del Set frm Fls
This option deletes downloaded overlay set(s) from flash memory.
Ld Set from Fls
This option loads downloaded overlay set(s) from flash memory.
Save Set to Fls
This option saves downloaded overlay set(s) to flash memory.
PRINTER SETUP Submenus
111
Del Set from RAM
This option deletes the downloaded overlay set(s) from RAM.
Ld Set at PwrUp
This option loads the downloaded overlay set from flash memory to RAM at
Power Up. The options are Disable (factory default) and Enable.
Main FFS
•Overwrite Files
•Enable (factory default). Allows you to overwrite files in the main flash
file system with exception to protected files. When you try to overwrite
or delete a protected file, the control panel LCD will display an error
message.
•Disable. Allows you to prevent files in the main flash file system from
being overwritten.
•View Main Files. Displays the list of files in the main flash file system.
Files with one of the filename extensions listed in the Table 13 on
page 172 are not shown in the View Main Files menus..
•Delete Files. Allows you to delete files in the main flash file system, with
exception to protected files. After a file is deleted, a question mark will
appear in front of the deleted file name to indicate that the file in the main
FFS is no longer usable. Contact your administrator for further
assistance. Files with one of the filename extensions listed in Table 13 on
page 172 are not shown in the Delete Files menus .
•Flash Avail. The amount of flash available for the user to save or
download files into the main flash.
EMC FFS
•Overwrite Files
•Enable (factory default). Allows you to overwrite files in the Extended
Flash file system with exception to protected files. When you try to
overwrite or delete a protected file, the control panel LCD will display
an error message.
•Disable. Allows you to prevent files in the Extended Flash file system
from being overwritten.
•View EMC Files. Displays the list of files in the Extended Flash file
system. Files with one of the filename extensions listed in the Table 13 on
page 172 are not shown in the View EMC Files menus.
•Delete Files. Allows you to delete files in the Extended Flash file system
system with exception to protected files. After a file is deleted, a question
mark will appear in front of the deleted file name to indicate that the file in
the EMC is no longer usable. Contact your administrator for assistance.
Files with one of the filename extensions listed in the Table 13 on
page 172 are not shown in the Delete Files menus.
•Flash Avail. The amount of flash available for the user to save or
download files into Extended Flash.
112
Chapter 4 PRINTER SETUP Menu
Optimize&Reboot
Reclaims flash space from deleted flash files. After pressing ↵ wait for the
printer to reboot.
NOTE: The Optimize feature will optimize both the Main and Extended Flash
file system (if present) and remove any deleted file names indicated
by “?Filename”.
Print File List
Prints a summary of the files stored in the Main and Extended Flash file
system (if present).
Auto Locking
•Disable (factory default). The ↵ (ENTER) key must be locked manually.
•Enable. The printer automatically locks the ↵ key five minutes after the
last control panel key press.
Set Lock Key
Normally, to lock or unlock the printer menu, the ↓ and ↵ keys are pressed at
the same time. The Set Lock Key parameter lets you choose different keys to
lock or unlock the printer menu. You may choose almost any group of keys as
the new lock and unlock keys. You cannot use the ↵ key or any key
combinations which are already used for another function. There is no limit to
how many keys can be selected.
To set the new lock key:
1. Go to the PRINTER SETUP main menu and select “Set Lock Key.”
2. Press ↵. The display reads, “Select a new lock key.”
3. Press the combination of keys that you want to be the new lock key. Make
sure you press all keys selected at the same time.
4. If the selection is valid, the display will read, “Enter the new lock key
again.” Press the same combination of keys a second time. If the
selection is invalid, the display will read, “Invalid key selection.” Return to
step 2 and start over.
5. If the new lock key combination is entered again correctly, the display will
read, “Lock key has been changed.” If it was entered incorrectly, the
display will read, “Validation failed.” Start over at step 1.
6. After entering the new lock combination successfully, press the Pause
key to put the printer back online.
NOTE: The new lock combination will remain even if the printer is powered
off and back on.
PRINTER SETUP Submenus
113
Max Font Buffer
The maximum amount of DRAM allocated for downloading fonts (TrueType,
Scalable, or Bitmap). DRAM allocation will not take effect unless you save it in
a configuration and the printer is powered up with that configuration.
The range is 100 to 1800 Kbytes, and the factory default is 300 Kbytes.
Max Cache Memory
The Maximum Cache Memory option specifies the size of the memory block
that can be allocated to the font cache. The font cache stores bitmaps that are
created on demand from the font outlines stored on the printer flash. The
cache allows the printer to print scalable fonts at optimum speed. Memory
block allocation will not take effect unless you save it in a configuration and
the printer is powered up with that configuration.
To calculate the memory requirement, use this equation:
(HS x VS x Average Height x Average Width x NumOf Char) / 8
Where: HS = Horizontal resolution
VS = Vertical resolution
Average Height = Average character height (inches)
Average Width = Average character width (inches
NumOfChar = Number of Characters to be cached
The allowable range is 50 KBytes through 2000 KBytes in 50-KByte
increments.
The factory default is 900 KB.
NOTE: For most applications, the default settings for font memory are
acceptable. Therefore, do not change the defaults unless your
application requires an uncommon memory configuration.
Max Cached Char
The Maximum Cached Characters option specifies the size of the largest
character that can be stored in the font cache. This will not take effect unless
you save it in a configuration and the printer is powered up with that
configuration.To calculate the memory requirement, use this equation:
(HS x VS x Average Height x Average Width) / 8
Where: HS = Horizontal resolution
VS = Vertical resolution
Average Height = Average character height (inches)
Average Width = Average character width (inches
NumOfChar = Number of Characters to be cached
114
Chapter 4 PRINTER SETUP Menu
For example, with a print head that prints at 203 dpi you would use the
following formula:
Therefore, select a value that is equal to or greater than 5,151. The closest
available value is 6 KBytes.
The allowable range is 1 KByte through 20 KBytes, in 1 KByte increments.
The factory default is 01 KBytes.
NOTE: For most applications, the default settings for font memory are
acceptable. Therefore, do not change the defaults unless your
application requires an uncommon memory configuration.
Standard Chars.
This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of standard
text fonts.
The range is 0 to 512, and the factory default is 340.
Bold Chars.
This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of bold text
fonts.
The range is 0 to 512, and the factory default is 448.
Extra Bold Char.
This menu entry permits you to adjust the thickness or font weight of extra
bold text fonts.
The range is 0 to 512, and the factory default is 504.
NOTE: For most applications, the default settings for font memory are
acceptable. Therefore, do not change the defaults unless your
application requires an uncommon memory configuration.
OCR-A Chars.
Character weight adjustment of resident OCR-A characters.
The range is 0 to 512, and the factory default is 384.
OCR-B Chars.
Character weight adjustment of resident OCR-B characters.
The range is 0 to 512, and the factory default is 304.
203 x 203 x 1 x 1
8
= 5,151
PRINTER SETUP Submenus
115
Tall Characters
Increases the point height of resident Intellifont characters.
•Disable (factory default). Standard resident font character point height is
maintained.
•Enable. Increases the point height of resident Intellifont characters
approximately 10%.
Batch Counter
Displays the number of pages remaining in a print job.
•Disable (factory default). The # Pages remaining to be printed will not
display. Instead, the Active emulation and interface will display on the
second line of the control panel LCD.
•Enable. The # Pages remaining to be printed will display on the second
line of the control panel LCD. This feature is supported in PGL and ZGL
only. The PGL Execute command and parameters that support this
feature are ~EXECUTE;formname;[;FC][;ICNTn][;FCNTn]. The ZGL
Execute command is ^PQ(#Pages).
NOTE: If the correct execute command is absent from the print file, “0 Pages”
will continually display on the control panel LCD.
Date
This menu allows you to set the date and time. The date is expressed in
hh:mm YYYYMMMDD.
hh = hour (24 hour format)
mm = minute
MMM = month
DD = day
YYYY = year
Feed Key Online
Selects the Feed key action when the printer is online.
•Feed (factory default). A blank label is fed when the printer is online and
the Feed key is pressed.
•Reprint Last. Reprints previous printed label if the printer is online and
the Feed key is pressed.
NOTE: Pressing the Feed key when the printer is offline results in a blank
label being fed. Labels fed while the printer is offline are considered
printed pages. This results in blank feeds if online feeds are done
following an offline feed when using the Reprint Last setting.
Disp. Intensity
Sets the Display Intensity values from 0 to 20. The factory default is 10.
116
Chapter 4 PRINTER SETUP Menu
Bot Line Display
•Ribbon Life (factory default). The last line of the display shows the ribbon
life. When the printer is online and after a few labels have been fed,
"Ribbon Life" and 1 to 4 asterisks will display on the last line of the LCD
indicating the approximate amount of ribbon remaining on the supply
spindle, based on a standard 450m ribbon. An exact value cannot be
determined, since ribbon thickness and roll lengths vary:
Ribbon Life **** = Full to 3/4 full
Ribbon Life -*** = less than 3/4 to 1/2 full
Ribbon Life --** = less than 1/2 to 1/4 full
Ribbon Life ---* = less than 1/4 to 1/8 full
•Current Config. The last line of the display shows the name of the
current configuration, which is the last loaded or saved configuration.
•Asset Tag. When operating the printer in Asset Tag Mode, the last line
displayed prompts the user to “Place Tag” or “Place Next Tag”. While the
asset tag is encoding, the last line displayed will show “Encoding…”.
•IP Address. The last line of the display shows the IP Address for the
TCP/IP protocol if the NIC or Wireless NIC options are installed. If the
printer has the Wireless NIC option, the signal strength is indicated by
bars in front of the IP Address.
•No Display. The last line of the display is empty.
Admin User
•Disable (factory default).
•Enable. When enabled, this function permits access to submenu items
which would not normally be changed by a typical user.
117
INTERFACES Menu
INTERFACES
(from page 67)
Host
Interface
Auto Switching*
Centronics
Serial
IEEE 1284
Ethernet 1
USB
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to
Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
1 This menu appears if a NIC or Wireless NIC is installed.
2 This menu item appears only if a NIC is installed.
3 This menu appears only if a Wireless Option is installed.
4 This menu appears only if a 802.11b radio card is installed.
ETHERNET
PORT 1
Timeout*
10 sec*
1-60 sec
Switch Out On
Data Timeout*
Session Close
ETHERNET
SETTING
IP Address 2
Subnet Mask 2
Gateway Address 2
MAC Address 2
IP Assignment 2
DHCP
Disable
Enable*
BootP
Disable
Enable*
NetBIOS Protocol
Enable*
Disable
ASCII Data Port
9100*
1025 - 65535
Keep Alive Timer
3 minutes*
0-10 minutes
Ethernet Speed 2
Auto Select*
10 Half Duplex
10 Full Duplex
100 Half Duplex
100 Full Duplex
Job Control
Standard*
Enhanced
Fast Standard
Off
Offline Process
Disable*
Enable
WLAN
SETTING 3
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway Address
MAC Address
IP Assignment
DHCP
Disable
Enable*
BootP
Disable
Enable*
Signal Strength
Operation Mode 4
Infrastructure*
Pseudo IBSS
Ad Hoc
SSID Name
Reset SSID Name
Min Xfer Rate
Auto-negotiate*
1 Mb/sec.
2 Mb/sec.
5.5 Mb/sec.
11 Mb/sec.
Channel 4
Default*
1-15
Antenna
Primary*
Auxiliary
Power Mgmt
0 ms
0 - 1000 ms
Transmit Power
100%
0 -100%
Preamble 4
Default*
Short
Long
Internat. Mode
Disable*
Enable
Auth Method
Open*
Shared
EAP Mode
None*
Leap
Peap
TTLS
EAP Username
Reset EAP User
EAP Password
Reset EAP Pswd
WEP Key 1
WEP Key 2
WEP Key 3
WEP Key 4
Default WEP Key
0*
0 - 4
Reset WEP Keys
WPA Mode
Disable*
Personal
Enterprise
WPA Cipher
Disable*
TKIP
AES
TKIP+AES
WPA P-Phs
Reset WPA P-Phs
118
Chapter 4 INTERFACES Menu
Serial
Port
See page 119
Parallel
Port 1, 4
Port Type
IEEE 1284*
Disable
Centronics
Buffer Size in K
16*
1-16
Auto Trickle
Disable*
Enable
Trickle Time
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Timeout
10 sec.*
1 - 60 sec.
Report Status
Disable*
Enable
Prime Signal
Disable*
Enable
Offline Process
Disable*
Enable
USB
Port
Buffer Size in K
16*
1 - 16
Timeout 1
10 sec.*
1 - 60 sec.
Printer Mgmt
See page 120
INTERFACES
(con’d from
page 117)
Centronics 2
Data Bit 8 2
Enable*
Disable
PI Ignored 2
Enable*
Disable
Data Polarity 2
Standard*
Inverted
Resp. Polarity 2
Standard*
Inverted
Busy on Strobe 2
Enable*
Disable
Latch Data On 2
Leading*
Trailing
Prime Signal
Disable*
Enable
TOF Action
Reset*
Do Nothing
Buffer Size in K
16*
1-16
IEEE 1284 3
Prime Signal
Disable*
Enable
TOF Action
Reset*
Do Nothing
Buffer Size in K
16*
1-16
Offline Process
Disable*
Enable
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable (in the
PRINTER SETUP menu).
1 This menu appears only if Host Interface is set to Auto Switching (in the
Interfaces menu).
2 This menu appears only if Host Interface is set to Centronics (in the
Interfaces menu).
3 This menu appears only if Host Interface is set to IEEE 1284 (in the
Interfaces menu).
4 This menu does not appear when Centronics is selected (in the
Interfaces menu).
119
Serial Port
(from page 118)
Baud
Rate
9600 BAUD*
600 BAUD to
115200 BAUD
Word
Length
8*
7
Stop Bits
1*
2
Parity
None*
Odd
Even
Mark
Sense
Data
Protocol
XON/XOFF*
ETX/ACK
ACK/NAK
Series1 1Char
Series1 2 Char
DTR
Buffer Size
in K
16*
1 - 16
Trickle
Time 1
1/4 sec*
1/2 sec
1 sec
2 sec
4 sec
8 sec
16 sec
Off
Timeout 1
10 sec.*
1 - 60 sec.
Report
Status 1
Disable*
Enable
Data Term
Ready
True*
On-Line and BNF
Off-Line or BF
On-Line
False
Request to
Send
On-Line and BNF*
Off-Line or BF
On-Line
False
True
Poll
Character
00 Hex*
00-FF Hex
Poll
Response
0 ms*
0 - 30 ms
Idle
Response
Disable*
Enable
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to
Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
1 This menu appears only when Host Interface (in the Interfaces
menu) is set to Auto Switching.
One Char
Enquiry
Disable*
Enable
Printer
Status
Disable*
ENQ/STX
ENQ
Framing
Errors
Enable*
Disable
Offline
Process
Disable*
Enable
120
Chapter 4 INTERFACES Menu
Printer Mgmt
(from page 118)
PNE Port
Disable*
Serial
Ethernet 1
USB
Mgmt
Protocol
PXML*
UCP
Select Port 2
Debug*
Host
Baud Rate 2
9600 BAUD*
2400 BAUD TO
115200 BAUD
Modem 2
Disable*
Enable
Modem NUM 2
Enable*
Disable
Modem
Status 2
Enable*
Disable
Dial
Method 2
Tone*
Pulse
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable (in the
PRINTER SETUP menu).
1 This option appears if a NIC is installed.
2 This menu appears if PNE Port is set to Serial.
3 If the PNE port is set to Ethernet.
Word
Length 2
8*
7
Stop Bits 2
1*
2
Parity 2
None*
Odd
Even
Status Port
Number 1
3002*
1023 - 65535
Mgmt Port
Number 1
3007*
1023 - 65535
PNE Port
Number 1,3
3001*
1023 - 65535
PNE Port
Timeout 1,3
100 Seconds*
1 - 255
INTERFACES Submenus
121
INTERFACES Submenus
Host Interface
This option allows you to send print jobs through any interface with
autoswitching selected as host interface. It also allows a particular interface
from the menu to be selected.
The options are Auto Switching (factory default), Centronics, Serial,
IEEE 1284, and Ethernet.
NOTE: The Ethernet option appears only if Ethernet is installed.
ETHERNET PORT
•Timeout. This is the value used by the printer to time out the current port
and check the other selected Port Types for data to print. When the
printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time, it
needs to time out to service the other ports.
The range is 1 to 60 seconds, and the factory default is 10 seconds.
•Switch Out On.
•Data Timeout (the default). Allows Autoswitching when no data has
been received for the selected timeout period.
•Session Close. Allows Autoswitching only when the Network Socket
is closed. If the Ethernet Adapter is not installed the Network Socket
is always reported as closed and this menu option is ignored.
ETHERNET SETTING
•IP Address.This item allows you to set the IP Address for the TCP/IP
protocol in four three-digit segments (SEG1 through SEG4). If the IP
Address is assigned by BootP, ARP or DHCP, it is dynamic and
read-only.
The factory defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and
000.
After specifying an IP address, you are prompted to:
Press ↵ to Save & Exit
Press to Exit
Press to Edit.
NOTE: When changing the IP Address, the printer resets the Network
Interface Card (NIC) when the printer is placed online. When the
printer resets the NIC, the LCD displays DO NOT POWER OFF.
The printer will then reboot to re-establish communication with the
NIC.
122
Chapter 4 INTERFACES Menu
•Subnet Mask. This item allows you to set the Subnet Mask for the
TCP/IP protocol in four three-digit segments (SEG1 through SEG4). If the
Subnet Mask is assigned by BootP, Arp or DHCP, it is dynamic and
read-only.
The defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
After specifying a Subnet Mask, you are prompted to:
Press ↵ to Save & Exit
Press to Exit
Press to Edit.
NOTE: When changing the Subnet Mask, the printer resets the NIC when the
printer is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the LCD
displays DO NOT POWER OFF. The printer will then reboot to re-
establish communication with the NIC.
•Gateway Address. This item allows you to set the Gateway Address for
the TCP/IP protocol in four three-digit segments (SEG1 through SEG4).
If the Gateway Address is assigned by BootP, ARP or DHCP, it is
dynamic and read-only.
The defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
After specifying a Gateway address, you are prompted to:
Press ↵ to Save & Exit
Press to Exit
Press to Edit.
NOTE: When changing the Gateway Address, the printer resets the NIC
when the printer is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the
LCD displays DO NOT POWER OFF. The printer will then reboot to
re-establish communication with the NIC.
•MAC Address. This item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is
unique for each NIC. It is read-only.
•IP Assignment
•DHCP. You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option,
but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting.
The options are Enable (factory default) and Disable.
NOTE: When changing the DHCP, the printer resets the NIC when the printer
is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the LCD displays
DO NOT POWER OFF. The printer will then reboot to re-establish
communication with the NIC.
INTERFACES Submenus
123
•BootP
You can enable or disable the BootP protocol using this option, but
consult your administration for the appropriate setting.
The options are Enable (factory default) and Disable.
NOTE: When changing the BootP option, the printer resets the NIC when the
printer is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the LCD
displays DO NOT POWER OFF. The printer will then reboot to re-
establish communication with the NIC.
•NetBIOS Protocol
•Enable (factory default). The NIC will respond to the NetBIOS
protocol.
•Disable. The NIC does not recognize the NetBIOS protocol.
•ASCII Data Port. This option allows you to set the port number for ASCII
print jobs. The data port number needs to match your host system setting.
The range is 1025 - 65535, and the factory default is 9100.
•Keep Alive Timer. This is the time that the Keep Alive Timer will run.
Keep in mind that with the Keep Alive Timer on, the TCP connection will
stay connected even after the print job has terminated.
The range is 0-10 minutes, and the factory default is 3 minutes.
•Ethernet Speed. This menu appears only if a 10/100Base-T Network
Interface Card (NIC) is installed.
The Ethernet Speed menu has five different speed modes to allow
compatibility with different systems and networks:
•Auto Select (factory default). Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to perform
an auto detection scheme and configure itself to be 10 Half Duplex,
10 Full Duplex, 100 Half Duplex, or 100 Full Duplex.
•10 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using half duplex.
•10 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 10
Megabits per second using full duplex.
•100 Half Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using half duplex.
•100 Full Duplex. Tells the 10/100Base-T NIC to communicate at 100
Megabits per second using full duplex.
124
Chapter 4 INTERFACES Menu
•Job Control
•Standard (factory default). The NIC waits for the entire job to be
received before it indicates the job is done.
•Enhanced. The NIC waits for the entire job to be printed before it
indicates the job is done.
•Fast Standard. The EOJ (End of Job) packet is acknowledged
immediately. Use this option if the job is timed out due to a delay in
the acknowledgement of the EOJ packet because of the amount of
data being printed.
•Off. There is no synchronization between the NIC and the printer.
NOTE: For detailed information about using the NIC, refer to the Network
Interface Card User’s Manual.
•Offline Process
•Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not
process parallel/network data while offline.
•Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process (but not
print) the current network/parallel job while the printer is offline until
the printer's buffer is full.
WLAN SETTING
•IP Address. This item allows you to set the IP Address for the TCP/IP
protocol in four three-digit segments (SEG1 through SEG4). If the IP
Address is assigned by BootP, ARP or DHCP, it is dynamic and read-
only.
The defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
After specifying an IP address, you are prompted to:
Press ↵ to Save & Exit
Press to Exit
Press to Edit.
NOTE: When changing the IP Address, the printer resets the Network
Interface Card (NIC) when the printer is placed online. When the
printer resets the NIC, the LCD displays DO NOT POWER OFF. The
printer will then reboot to re-establish communication with the NIC.
INTERFACES Submenus
125
•Subnet Mask. This item allows you to set the Subnet Mask for the
TCP/IP protocol in four three-digit segments (SEG1 through SEG4). If the
Subnet Mask is assigned by BootP, Arp or DHCP, it is dynamic and
read-only.
The defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
After specifying a Subnet Mask, you are prompted to:
Press ↵ to Save & Exit
Press to Exit
Press to Edit.
NOTE: When changing the Subnet Mask, the printer resets the NIC when the
printer is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the LCD
displays DO NOT POWER OFF. The printer will then reboot to re-
establish communication with the NIC.
•Gateway Address. This item allows you to set the Gateway Address for
the TCP/IP protocol in four three-digit segments (SEG1 through SEG4). If
the Gateway Address is assigned by BootP, ARP or DHCP, it is dynamic
and read-only.
The defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
The defaults for the SEG1 through SEG4 are 000, 000, 000, and 000.
After specifying a Gateway address, you are prompted to:
Press ↵ to Save & Exit
Press to Exit
Press to Edit.
NOTE: When changing the Gateway Address, the printer resets the NIC
when the printer is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the
LCD displays DO NOT POWER OFF. The printer will then reboot to
re-establish communication with the NIC.
•MAC Address. This item is the Manufacturer’s Assigned Number, and is
unique for the NIC and the Wireless option. It is read-only.
•IP Assignment
•DHCP. You can enable/disable the DHCP protocol using this option,
but consult your administrator for the appropriate setting.
The options are Enable (factory default) and Disable.
NOTE: When changing the DHCP, the printer resets the NIC when the printer
is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the LCD displays
DO NOT POWER OFF. The printer will then reboot to re-establish
communication with the NIC.
126
Chapter 4 INTERFACES Menu
•BootP
You can enable or disable the BootP protocol using this option, but
consult your administration for the appropriate setting.
The options are Enable (factory default) and Disable.
NOTE: When changing the BootP option, the printer resets the NIC when the
printer is placed online. When the printer resets the NIC, the LCD
displays DO NOT POWER OFF. The printer will then reboot to
re-establish communication with the NIC.
•Signal Strength. This menu displays the strength of the wireless signal.
NOTE: This is a display value only and cannot be changed.
•Operation Mode. Allows you to select the way the Wireless option
communicates.
•Infrastructure (the default). The wireless option must go through an
Access Point.
•Pseudo IBSS. Proprietary, peer-to-peer communication (without an
Access Point). The two peers must be specific to one manufacturer.
•Ad Hoc. Standard, peer-to-peer communication (without an Access
Point). The two peers can be from different manufacturers.
•SSID Name. A 1-32 character, case-sensitive string that identifies the
Extended Service Set Identification (ESS_ID) network the unit is part of.
(ESS_ID is also called NET_ID.) These characters can be alphanumeric,
symbols, or spaces. The SSID name and alphanumeric characters are
divided into three parts in the control panel menu as
“SSID Name (01-15)”, “SSID Name (16-30)” and “SSID Name (31-32).
•Reset SSID Name. Allows you to reset the SSID name.
•Min Xfer Rate. Allows you to set the minimum speed at which the
Wireless Option will accept a connection (in millions bits per second). The
options are Auto-negotiate (factory default), 1Mb/sec., 2Mb/sec.,
5.5Mb/sec., and 11Mb/sec.
•Channel. Allows you to select the RF channel. The options are Default
and 1-15.
NOTE: The Channel option is hidden for 802.11g radio card.
•Preamble. The length of the preamble in transmit packets.
•Default (the default). The Wireless option automatically determines
the length.
•Short. For newer printers which can handle higher transfer rate
speeds.
•Long. For older printers, which cannot handle higher transfer rate
speeds.
INTERFACES Submenus
127
•Antenna. The type of antenna used:
•Primary (factory default). Select when you want to use the Primary
antenna on the server.
•Auxiliary. Select when you want to use the Auxiliary antenna on the
server.
•Power Mgmt. This allows you to set power-save mode and sleep time. A
value specifying the sleep time in milliseconds will be provided. If set to
zero, power-save mode will be disabled.
The range is 0-1000 ms., and the factory default is 0 ms.
•Transmit Power. The power level as a percentage of full power.
The range is 0 - 100%, and the factory default is 100%.
•Internat. Mode. When enabled, the Wireless option adapts to
international frequency requirements in Europe.
The options are Disable (factory default) and Enable.
•EAP Mode. This selects the EAP authentication method.
•LEAP selects Cisco LEAP authentication.
•PEAP selects PEAP authentication.
•TTLS selects TTLS authentication.
•None (factory default) disables EAP authentication.
•EAP Username
•EAP Username (01-15). The first 15 characters of the EAP user
name (maximum number of characters is 32).
•EAP Username (16-30). Characters 16 to 30 of the EAP user name
(maximum number of characters is 32).
•EAP User (31-32). Characters 31 to 32 of the EAP password
(maximum number of characters is 32).
•Reset EAP User
Resets the EAP user name to an empty string.
•EAP Password
•EAP Password (01-15). The first 15 characters of the EAP password
(maximum number of characters is 32).
•EAP Password (16-30). Characters 16 to 30 of the EAP password
(maximum number of characters is 32).
•EAP Password (31-32). Characters 31 to 32 of the EAP password
(maximum number of characters is 32).
•Reset EAP Pswd
Resets the EAP password to an empty string.
128
Chapter 4 INTERFACES Menu
•Auth Method. This feature allows the user to select the authentication
method used for the wireless network interface.
•Open (factory default). Selects open authentication.
•Shared. Selects shared key authentication.
•WEP Key 1 through 4. These are the individual characters of the
encryption key. If the "WEP Key x Width" is set to 40 Bits, the key values
can be entered in the following 5 sub menus (BYTE 1, …, BYTE 5). If the
"WEP Key x Width" is set to 128 Bits, the key values can be entered in the
following 13 sub menus (BYTE 1, …, BYTE 13). The key values must
configure to match the corresponding key in the Access Point's key
configuration.
NOTE: The WEP Key Width is the number of bits used for encryption. This
can be set to either 40 Bits or 128 Bits and must match the Access
Point's configuration.
•Default WEP Key. This feature enables you to encrypt (scramble)
information for security purposes. With this feature, you can set up to four
encryption keys, in either ASCII or hexadecimal format, and in either 40 or
128 bits. (The more bits you choose, the more difficult it will be to decode
the information.)
The default key must match the Access Point's configuration. If the
Access Point is configured to use "Open System", the default key should
be set to 0. If the Access Point is configured to use 40-bit or 128-bit WEP
encryption key, the encryption key must be set to the same setting as the
Access Point's setting. There are four keys (1-4) that an Access Point can
use. If the Access Point is set to use key 1, the default key must be set to
1 to correspond to the Access Point's setting.
NOTE: None of the WEP Key Configuration menus display on the
configuration printout.
•Reset WEP Keys. Allows you to reset all four WEP keys (WEP Key 1
through WEP Key 4) at one time.
•WPA Mode. Selects the WPA wireless security mode.
•Disable (the default). WPA security is disabled.
•Personal. Selects personal or pre-shared key mode for WPA
security.
•Enterprise. Selects EAP authentication methods.
•WPA Cipher. Selects the WPA wireless security cipher setting. Options
include:
•Disable (the default)
•TKIP
•AES
•TKIP+AES
•WPA P-Phs. Allows you to set the individual bytes of the WPA
passphrase.
•Reset WPA P-Phs. Allows you to reset all 32 bytes of the WPA
passphrase at once.
INTERFACES Submenus
129
Parallel Port
•Port Type. This menu item selects the type of printer parallel port
interface to be used with the host.
The options are IEEE 1284 (factory default), Disable, and Centronics.
•Data Bit 8
•Enable (factory default). The PI line is not passed directly from host
to printer; all 8 bits are used for data bits, and characters in the hex
80-FF range can be accessed.
•Disable. When the host PI line is enabled, data bit 8 internally
indicates PI line status. To use the PI line, disable data bit 8, and
enable the Host PI configuration option (under the PI Ignored option).
NOTE: Data bit 8 is interpreted as either data bit 8 or PI signal, but never
both. When enabled as data bit 8, data bit 8 has priority over the PI
signal, and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data
and not to interpret PI line data.
Conversely, when data bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used, data
bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function, and you cannot
access characters in the hex 80-FF range. Therefore, to access
characters in the hex 80-FF range, data bit 8 must be enabled.
•PI Ignored. The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical
paper motion.
•Enable (factory default). Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as
characters or control codes.
•Disable. Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU
commands when the PI signal is true.
•Buffer Size in K. This option configures the amount of memory allocated
for the Ethernet buffer. The range is 1-16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The factory default is 16 Kbytes.
•Auto Trickle. This feature is used to prevent a host computer from
“timing out” because the parallel interface is “busy” for too long.
•Disable (factory default). The Auto Trickle feature is not used.
•Enable. When the printer’s buffers are almost full, the printer begins
to trickle data in from the host (at the rate set in the Trickle Time
menu) until the buffers start to empty out.
•Trickle Time. When the printer is printing data from a host and a second
print job is received by the printer from a different host, Trickle Time
prevents the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to
be printed. In order to support this feature, the port has to be able to
accept data from the host and store it for future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port, and then
receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the
parallel port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a
timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel
port.
130
Chapter 4 INTERFACES Menu
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast.
The options are 1/4 (factory default), 1/2, 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16 seconds and
Off.
•Timeout. This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current
port and check the other selected port types for data to print. When the
printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time, it
needs to time out in order to service the other ports.
The range is 1-60 seconds, and the factory default is 10 seconds.
•Report Status
•Disable (factory default). When a fault occurs on the printer, only the
active port reports the fault to the host.
•Enable. The port will report any fault even when it is not the current
active port.
•Prime Signal
•Disable (factory default). The parallel port will not perform a warm
start (reboot) if the host asserts the Prime Signal.
•Enable. The parallel port will perform a warm start (reboot) if the host
asserts the Prime Signal.
•Data Polarity. The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data
polarity of your host computer.
•Standard (factory default). Does not expect the host computer to
invert the data.
•Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host
computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros and vice versa.
•Resp. Polarity. The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match
the response polarity of your host computer.
•Standard (factory default). Does not invert the response signal.
•Inverted. Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer.
•Busy on Strobe
•Enable (factory default). Asserts a busy signal after each character is
received.
•Disable. Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full.
•Latch Data On. Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or
trailing edge of the data strobe signal.
The options are Leading (factory default) and Trailing.
INTERFACES Submenus
131
•Offline Process
•Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not
process parallel/network data while offline.
•Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process (but not
print) the current network/parallel job while the printer is offline until
the printer's buffer is full.
Centronics
•Data Bit 8
•Enable (factory default). The PI line is not passed directly from host
to printer; all 8 bits are used for data bits, and characters in the hex
80-FF range can be accessed.
•Disable. When the host PI line is enabled, data bit 8 internally
indicates PI line status. To use the PI line, disable data bit 8, and
enable the Host PI configuration option (under the PI Ignored option).
NOTE: Data bit 8 is interpreted as either data bit 8 or PI signal, but never
both. When enabled as data bit 8, data bit 8 has priority over the PI
signal, and all data above hex 7F is used to access character data
and not to interpret PI line data.
Conversely, when data bit 8 is disabled and the PI signal is used, data
bit 8 of the data is reserved for use as the PI function, and you cannot
access characters in the hex 80-FF range. Therefore, to access
characters in the hex 80-FF range, data bit 8 must be enabled.
•PI Ignored. The PI (Paper Instruction) signal is used to control vertical
paper motion.
•Enable (factory default). Ignores the PI signal and treats the data as
characters or control codes.
•Disable. Causes the printer to interpret the eight data lines as VFU
commands when the PI signal is true.
•Data Polarity. The Data Polarity parameter must be set to match the data
polarity of your host computer.
•Standard (factory default). Does not expect the host computer to
invert the data.
•Inverted. Expects the data received on the data lines from the host
computer to be inverted. Ones become zeros and vice versa.
•Resp. Polarity. The Response Polarity parameter must be set to match
the response polarity of your host computer.
•Standard (factory default). Does not invert the response signal.
•Inverted. Inverts the response signal sent to the host computer.
•Busy on Strobe
•Enable (factory default). Asserts a busy signal after each character is
received.
•Disable. Asserts a busy signal only when the print buffers are full.
132
Chapter 4 INTERFACES Menu
•Latch Data On. Specifies whether the data is read on the leading or
trailing edge of the data strobe signal.
The options are Leading (factory default) and Trailing.
•Prime Signal
•Disable (factory default). A prime signal from the host is ignored.
•Enable. A prime signal from the host resets the printer.
•TOF Action
•Reset (factory default). If the printer is reset by a prime signal the
printer first moves to the next TOF.
•Do Nothing. If the printer is reset by a prime signal the printer will not
move to the next TOF.
•Buffer Size in K. This option configures the amount of memory allocated
for the Ethernet buffer. The range is 1-16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The factory default is 16 Kbytes.
IEEE 1284
•Prime Signal
•Disable (factory default). A prime signal from the host is ignored.
•Enable. A prime signal from the host resets the printer.
•TOF Action
•Reset (factory default). If the printer is reset by a prime signal the
printer first moves to the next TOF.
•Do Nothing. If the printer is reset by a prime signal the printer will not
move to the next TOF.
•Buffer Size in K. This option configures the amount of memory allocated
for the Ethernet buffer. The range is 1-16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The factory default is 16 Kbytes.
•Offline Process
•Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not
process parallel/network data while offline.
•Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process (but not
print) the current network/parallel job while the printer is offline until
the printer's buffer is full.
USB Port
•Buffer Size in K. This option configures the amount of memory allocated
for the serial port buffer. The range is 1-16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The factory default is 16.
•Timeout. This item allows you to set the time that the printer, when it has
not received data from its host, will begin to service all other host ports
looking for data to print.
The range is 1-60 seconds, and the default is 10 seconds.
INTERFACES Submenus
133
Serial Port
•Baud Rate. Sets the baud rate of the serial interface in the printer. Baud
rate is the speed at which serial data is transferred between the host
computer and the printer. The options for the RS-232 interface are 600,
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and 115200 Baud.
The factory default is 9600.
•Word Length. Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the
data word can be set to 7 or 8 bits and must match the corresponding
data bits setting in the host computer.
The factory default is 8.
•Stop Bits. Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either 1 or
2 stop bits can be selected. The setting must match the corresponding
stop bit setting in the host computer.
The factory default is 1.
•Parity. The options are Odd, Even, Mark, Sense, or None (factory
default). The setting must match the corresponding parity setting in the
host computer.
•Data Protocol. You can select one of the following serial interface
protocols to meet the host interface requirements.
•XON / XOFF (factory default). The printer controls the flow of
communication from the host by turning the transmission on and off.
In some situations, such as when the buffer is full or the timing of
signals is too slow or too fast, the printer will tell the host to stop
transmission by sending an XOFF character. An XOFF character is
sent when the number of empty bytes in the buffer is less than or
equal to 25 percent of the buffer size. If the host keeps sending data
after an XOFF is sent, the printer firmware will continue to send an
XOFF for every 16 characters received. When cleared, the printer will
resume receiving data (XON). The data does not have any End of
Text codes; XON / XOFF is a non-block protocol.
•ETX / ACK. End of Text / Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of
communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending
the block with an End of Text (ETX) character. When the printer
receives the ETX character, it will acknowledge the ETX, thereby
acknowledging it has received the entire block of data.
•ACK / NAK. ACK means acknowledge; the device acknowledges it
has accepted a transmission. NAK means negative acknowledge; the
device did not receive the transmission.
•Series1 1 Char. The printer controls the flow of communication from
the host by turning the transmission on and off using response
characters sent to the host. If the number of valid bytes in the buffer
reaches 75 percent of the buffer size, the online or offline and buffer
full response character is sent. If the buffer is completely full, an
online or offline buffer full response is sent every time a character is
sent from the host. Whenever the printer state changes to online or
offline, the appropriate response character is sent. If the idle
response option is enabled, the printer will send a response character
134
Chapter 4 INTERFACES Menu
every two seconds while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less
than 75 percent of the buffer size. If a poll character is received
(configurable from the Poll Character xx Hex option on the front panel
from hex 0 through FF), the printer will send a response character n
milliseconds later (configurable from the Poll Character xx MS on the
front panel from 0 through 30). This n milliseconds is called the poll
delay. The poll character will be removed from the input data stream
and will not be processed. This may cause problems with the
transmission of binary data (e.g., control codes, bit image, etc.). If a
poll delay is started due to the receipt of a poll character and another
poll character is received, the second poll character has no effect and
is removed from the input data stream. If a transition (from buffer full
to empty or online to offline) occurs during a poll delay, the new
printer state will be sent at the end of the poll delay.
The response characters are described below.
•Series1 2 Char. This protocol behaves exactly the same as the
Series 1 Char except there is a two-character response to the host.
The response characters are described in the following table:
Printer State Response
Online and Buffer Empty CR
Online and Buffer Full 3
Offline and Buffer Empty 0
Offline and Buffer Full 2
Printer State Response
Online and Buffer Empty 1 CR
Online and Buffer Full 3 CR
Offline and Buffer Empty 0 CR
Offline and Buffer Full 2 CR
INTERFACES Submenus
135
•ENQ/ACK. Enquiry/Acknowledge. The host controls the flow of
communication to the printer by sending a block of data and ending
the block with an Enquiry (ENQ) character. When the printer receives
the ENQ Character, it acknowledges the ENQ, thereby
acknowledging it has received the entire block of data. Status will also
be sent before the ACK. The status is as follows:
•DTR. The printer controls the data flow by sending this hardware
signal to the host. If there is enough room in the printer buffer, the
printer will send a high signal; if the buffer is full, the printer will send a
low signal. DTR tells the host if it is safe to send more data. (If the
host sends data during an unsafe condition, data will be lost.)
•Buffer Size in K. This option configures the amount of memory allocated
for the serial port buffer. The range is 1-16 Kbytes, in 1-Kbyte increments.
The factory default is 16.
•Trickle Time. When the printer is printing data from a host and a second
job is received by the printer from a different host, Trickle Time prevents
the second host from timing out while it is waiting for its data to be printed.
In order to support this feature, the port has to be able to accept data from
the host and store it for future use.
For example, if the printer is printing a job from the serial port and then
receives a second print job from the parallel port, the data from the
parallel port will “trickle” bit by bit into the printer buffer to prevent a
timeout error from being sent back to the host connected to the parallel
port.
The selected value is the time that the printer waits before getting the next
byte of data from the host. The Trickle Time value should be less than the
host time out value, but not too much shorter or else the printer fills up its
buffer too fast.
The options are 1/4 (factory default), 1/2, 1, 2, 4, 8, and 16 seconds and
Off.
•Timeout. This is the value used by the printer to time out from the current
port and check the other selected Port Types for data to print. When the
printer has not received data from the host after a certain period of time, it
needs to time out in order to service the other ports.
The range is 1 to 60 seconds, and the factory default is 10 seconds.
Printer State Status
Online 40 06
Online or Paper Motion Fault 43
Platen Open or Paper Out 47
136
Chapter 4 INTERFACES Menu
•Report Status. When a fault condition occurs in the printer, normally only
the active port reports the fault to the host. With this menu item enabled,
the port will report any fault even when it is not the current, active port.
The options are Disable (factory default) and Enable.
•Data Term Ready. Stands for Data Terminal Ready. This configuration is
part of hardware flow control and determines when the Data Terminal
Ready (DTR) signal is generated. This signal indicates if the printer is
ready to receive data.
•True (factory default). Continuously asserts the DTR signal.
•False. Never asserts the DTR signal.
•On-Line and BNF (buffer not full). Asserts the DTR signal when the
printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.
•Off-Line or BF (buffer full). Asserts the DTR signal when the printer
is offline or the internal serial buffer is full.
•On-Line. Asserts the DTR signal when the printer is online.
•Request to Send. This configuration is part of hardware flow control and
determines when the Request to Send (RTS) signal is generated. This
signal indicates whether or not the printer is ready to receive data.
•On-Line and BNF (factory default). Asserts the RTS signal when the
printer is online and the internal serial buffer is not full.
•Off-Line or BF. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is offline or
the internal serial buffer is full.
•On-Line. Asserts the RTS signal when the printer is online.
•False. Never asserts the RTS signal.
•True. Continuously asserts the RTS signal.
•Poll Character. This option is for the Series1 protocol. Whenever the
printer receives this character, it sends a response to the host indicating
the current state of the printer (see Series1 protocol).
The range is 00-FF Hex, and the factory default is 00 Hex.
•Poll Response. This option is for the Series1 protocol. After receiving a
poll character, the printer will wait the poll response time in milliseconds
before sending the response.
The range is 0-30 ms, and the factory default is 0 ms.
•Idle Response. This option is for the Series1 protocol.
•Disable (factory default).
•Enable. The printer sends a response character every two seconds
while the number of valid bytes in the buffer is less than 75 percent of
the buffer size.
INTERFACES Submenus
137
•One Char Enquiry. The One Char Enquiry mode uses the Poll Character
to detect a request from the host and sends a response back to the host.
This option also allows you to turn on and off this feature.
The Poll Character is removed from the data stream. If the Data Protocol
is set to ETX/ACK, ACK/NAK, or Series1, One Char Enquiry is
automatically disabled.
The options are Disable (factory default) and Enable.
•Printer Status
•Disable (factory default). Printer status ignored.
•ENQ/STX (see Table 11).
•ENQ (see Table 12).
When enabled, the printer will respond to an ENQ character by sending a
status byte to the host. The type of status byte is determined by a Front
Panel Menu selection. The selections allowed are ENQ/STX and ENQ.
The ENQ is removed from the data stream.
Table 10. One Char Enquiry Response Characters
Printer State Response (hex)
Online and Buffer Not Full 22
Online and Buffer Full 23
Offline and Buffer Not Full 20
Offline and Buffer Full 21
Table 11. ENQ/STX Status Byte
Bit Printer Status
0Set when the printer is not online or the buffer is full.
1Set when the printer is offline.
2Clear during a paper out or RibbonMinder fault.
3Always set.
4Set during a Head Open fault.
5Set during a buffer overflow fault.
6Set during a parity or framing error fault.
7Always clear.
138
Chapter 4 INTERFACES Menu
•Framing Errors. These are possible errors that can occur when serial
interface settings of the printer do not match those of the host computer.
•Enable (factory default). If a framing error occurs, a fault message
will display on the control panel.
•Disable. If a framing error occurs, a fault message will not display on
the control panel.
•Offline Process
•Disable (factory default). When set to disable, the printer does not
process serial data while offline.
•Enable. When set to enable, the printer continues to process (but not
print) the current serial job while the printer is offline until the printer's
buffer is full.
Printer Mgmt
•PNE Port. This menu selects which port the printer expects PNE to
connect to, via Ethernet, USB, or Serial. The factory default is Disable.
•Mgmt Protocol. Since PXML and UCP management protocols share the
same Ethernet Port, only one can be active at a time. This menu selects
the active Management Protocol Interface, either PXML or UCP. The
factory default is PXML.
•Select Port
•Debug (factory default). If the PNE Port is set to Serial then the PNE
will communicate through the Debug Serial Port.
•Host. If the PNE Port is set to Serial then the PNE will communicate
through the Host Serial Port. This cannot be selected if Host Interface
is set to Auto Switching or Serial.
Table 12. ENQ Status Byte
Bit Printer Status
0Set when the label has printed.
1Set when the label is presented.
2Set while the printer is online.
3Always set.
4Set printing in the batch mode.
5Set during a Ribbon fault.
6Set during a Paper Out fault.
7Set during a Head Open fault.
INTERFACES Submenus
139
•Baud Rate. Sets the baud rate of the serial interface used to
communicate to the PNE. Baud rate is the speed at which serial data is
transferred between the PNE and the printer. The options for the RS-232
interface are 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, and
115200 Baud.
•Word Length. Sets the length of the serial data word. The length of the
data word can be set to 7 or 8 bits and must match the corresponding
data bits setting in the PNE. The factory default is 8.
•Stop Bits. Sets the number of stop bits in the serial data word. Either 1 or
2 stop bits can be selected. The setting must match the corresponding
stop bit setting in the PNE. The factory default is 1.
•Parity. The options are Odd, Even, Mark, Sense, or None. The setting
must match the corresponding parity setting in the PNE.
The factory default is None.
•Modem
This menu enables or disables the modem interface. After changing the
modem menus, save the configuration as the power-up configuration and
reboot the printer. The factory default is Disable.
NOTE: Connect the modem to the selected serial interface for printer
management (debug or host serial), and power on the modem before
powering on the printer. The printer will search for a modem at
power-up, and display a message on the printer front panel if a
modem is detected.
•Modem NVM
This setting defines whether the modem configuration, as stored in the
modem's NVM, should be used, or if the printer should send a modem
initialization string. When enabled, the printer will only send an ATZ0
command to the modem on power-up. This command resets the modem
to configuration 0. When disabled, the printer sends a generic modem
initialization string on power-up. The factory default is Enable.
NOTE: This generic initialization string does not work for all modem types.
If the initialization string does not work, the modem must be
configured manually, the setting must be stored in configuration 0,
and the printer 'Modem NVM' menu must be set to enable.
•Modem Status
•Enable (factory default). Displays the modem status commands on
the printer control panel.
•Disable. Does not display the modem status commands on the
printer control panel.
•Dial Method
•Tone (factory default). Sets the modem to use the tone dialing
method.
•Pulse. Sets the modem to use the pulse dialing method.
•PNE Port Number. This menu selects the port number the printer
expects the PNE to connect through. The factory default is 3001 and the
range is from 1023 to 65535.
140
Chapter 4 INTERFACES Menu
•PNE Port Timeout. If the PNE has not communicated to the printer within
a timeout period, the PNE session closes. The factory default is 100
seconds. The range is from 1 to 255 seconds.
•Status Port Number. This is the Ethernet Port number the emulations
can use to communicate status to the host computer.
•Mgmt Port Number. This is the Ethernet Port number the PXML or UCP
will use to communicate to the printer.
141
CONFIGURATION MENU
CONFIGURATION
(from page 67)
Save
Config.
Cfg 1*
Cfg 1 to Cfg 8
Delete
Config.
Cfg All*
All
1 to 8
Notes:
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to
Enable (in the PRINTER SETUP menu).
1 These menus allow the setting of a 15 character string.
Load
Config.
Factory*
1 to 8
Print
Config
Current*
Factory
Power-Up
All
1 to 8
Power-Up
Config.
Factory*
1 to 8
Protect
Configs.
Disable*
Enable
Name
Config 1 1
Name
Config 2 1
Name
Config 3 1
Name
Config 4 1
Name
Config 5 1
Name
Config 6 1
Name
Config 7 1
Name
Config 8 1
Reset
Cfg Names
Auto Save
Cfg 1*
1 to 8
All
Enable*
Disable
Cfg 1* Cfg 2* Cfg 3* Cfg 4* Cfg 5* Cfg 6*
Cfg 7* Cfg 8*
142
Chapter 4 CONFIGURATION MENU
CONFIGURATION Submenus
Save Config
This option allows you to save up to eight unique configurations to meet
different print job requirements. This eliminates the need to change the
parameter settings for each new job. The configurations are stored in memory
and will not be lost if you turn off the printer. If the Protect Configs. parameter
is enabled, the new configuration will not be saved unless the existing
configuration has been deleted first. The Factory default configuration cannot
be changed and saved under the Factory menu, but can be changed and
saved as one of the eight unique configurations. See “Saving a Configuration”
on page 148 for details.
The factory default is Cfg 1.
Load Config
The printer can store up to eight configurations in memory. This parameter
allows you to select and load a specific configuration.
The options are 1 to 8 and Factory. The factory default is Factory.
Print Config
This option is used to print a listing of various stored printer configurations.
We recommend you store printouts of your configurations in a safe place for
quick referral.
The options are Current (factory default), Factory, Power-Up, All, and 1 to 8.
Delete Config
You can delete one or all of your eight customized configurations. The factory
default configuration cannot be deleted. The All selection deletes all
previously saved configurations except for the factory default configuration.
The factory default is All.
Power-Up Config
You can specify any one of nine configurations (1-8 saved custom
configurations or Factory) as the power-up configuration.
The factory default is Factory.
Protect Config
You can specify whether or not a new configuration should overwrite an
existing configuration when you activate the Save Configs. parameter. When
disabled (factory default), the new configuration will overwrite the existing
configuration. When enabled, the new configuration will not overwrite the
existing configuration, and the message “CONFIG. EXISTS / Delete First”
displays.
The factory default is Disable.
CONFIGURATION Submenus
143
Name Config 1 to Name Config 8
You may specify a 15-character name which can be used to refer to a
configuration. The name you enter for a configuration will be used in the Load
Config., Save Config., Print Config., Delete Config., and Power-Up Config.
menus. The names can only be cleared by using the Reset Cfg Names menu.
When you move into the Name Configs. menu, the middle line of the display
shows the current configuration name. The first character of the current
configuration name is highlighted.
Press ↑ or ↓ to cycle through the values available for that character at the
cursor location. Press → to move to the next character to be modified.
Press ← to go back to a character you have already modified. Continue until
you have entered the name you want to give to this configuration, then press
↵ to save. The name you entered will now represent this configuration on the
printer's front panel. To exit this menu without saving, press the key. The
configuration name will revert to the last saved value.
The factory default is the configuration number.
Reset Cfg Names
You can reset specific configuration names back to the default value of the
configuration number. You can also reset all configuration names by selecting
All.
The options are 1 to 8 and All. The factory default is Cfg 1.
Auto Save
•Enable (factory default). When a change has been made to a Config.
menu, this option automatically prompts the user to save or not save the
change to a Config #.
If you are currently in the Factory Config. menus and make a change,
pressing Enter saves to Config 1 or the next available Config. and
becomes the Power-Up Config. If the Current Config is Config 1 and a
menu change is made, pressing Enter will save the change to Config 1.
•Disable. The printer will not prompt you to save any changes made.
144
Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS Menu
DIAGNOSTICS Menu
DIAGNOSTICS
(from page 67)
Printer
Tests
Checkerboard*
Grey
Grid
Current Config
Left Test
Right Test
Combo Test
Ethernet Test 1
Barcode Demo
Novram Err Log
RFID Report 2
Hex Dump
Mode
Disable*
Enable
Test
Count
5 Pages*
10 Pages
Continuous
1 Page
2 Pages
Software
Build
XXXXXX 3
Print
Error Log
Clear
Error Log
FLASH
Installed
Ptr On Time
XX Megabytes 3
DRAM
Installed
XX Megabytes 3XXX.X Hours 3
Printer Usage
XXXXX Inches 3
Head
On Time
XX.X Hours 3
Reset Head
Data
Head
Resolution
XXX DPI 3
Head
Voltage
XX.XX+X.XX volts 3
* = Factory Default
Italicized items are available only when Admin User is set to Enable (in the PRINTER
SETUP menu).
1 This menu appears only if the NIC or Wireless NIC is installed.
2 This menu appears only if the RFID encoder is installed.
3 You cannot change this value; it is a display only item.
4 This menu appears only if a Feature file is loaded.
5 This menu appears only if the EMC (Expanded Memory Cartridge) is installed.
Feature
File 4
XXXXXX- XXX 3
PrintHead
Usage
XXXXX Inches
EMC FLASH
Installed 5
XX Megabytes 3
Auto
Dump
Disable*
Enable
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus
145
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus
Printer Tests
The printer tests below allow you to check for proper printer operation and
print quality:
•Checkerboard (factory default). This pattern helps identify marginal
printhead elements, quality of edge sharpness, and uneven print quality.
•Grey. This pattern helps identify burned out printhead elements and
uneven print quality.
•Grid. This pattern helps identify edge sharpness and uneven print quality.
•Current Config. Prints the current printer configuration and helps identify
the text print quality. Also prints Printhead statistical data in the header.
•Left Test. Prints a pattern containing a series of ladder-type bar code
symbols, starting with four and decrementing by one symbol on each print
until a single symbol prints on the left side. This pattern helps identify
ribbon wrinkle problems.
•Right Test. Prints a pattern containing a series of ladder-type bar code
symbols, starting with four and decrementing by one symbol on each print
until a single symbol prints on the right side. This pattern helps identify
ribbon wrinkle problems.
•Combo Test. Prints a combined left test and right test.
•Ethernet Test. This item appears only if the Network Interface Card (NIC)
or Wireless NIC is installed. Prints the NIC statistics stored on the NIC
adapter.
•Barcode Demo. Prints text and barcodes with the barcodes positioned at
the left and right margins of the standard label media supplied with the
printer. The test automatically produces output for 4 inch printers at 203
dpi and 305 dpi.
•Novram Err Log. Prints detailed information about the most recent
Novram related failure. This option is useful when the front panel displays
“Bad NVM” or “ILL NVM” type errors. Contact the Customer Support
Center if such an error occurs.
•RFID Report. This item appears only if the RFID encoder is installed.
Prints a report of RFID statistics since the printer was turned on or since
the last data reset.
Once you have selected the desired test pattern, press ↵ to start printing. If
the Test Count option is set to Continuous (factory default), press ↵ again to
stop printing.
Test Count
This item selects the number of times the selected test pattern will be printed.
The options are 5 Pages (factory default), 10 Pages, Continuous, 1 Page, and
2 Pages.
146
Chapter 4 DIAGNOSTICS Menu
Software Build
This is the reference number which includes the program file part number and
revision number of the software installed in the printer, e.g., 358186 V1.07G.
Feature File
Displays the part number only when a feature file has been installed.
Hex Dump Mode
•Disable (factory default).
•Enable. The printer prints out data sent from the host in hexadecimal
format.
Auto Dump
•Disable (factory default).
•Enable. When the printer displays an E03x type message on the control
panel, a dump file is automatically created and stored in flash as
“autodbg1.dbg” or “autodbg2.dbg” in the printer file system. This file can
be uploaded to the host using the PrintNet Enterprise Suite application.
Upon receipt of this file, it should be sent to the Printronix Customer
Support Center for review and evaluation.
Print Error Log
Prints the current log of errors. Most non-routine faults (RIBBON FAULT,
PRINT HEAD HOT) are stored in the error log.
Clear Error Log
Clears entries in the error log.
FLASH Installed
Displays the amount of FLASH memory installed in megabytes.
EMC FLASH Installed
Displays the amount of EMC FLASH memory installed in megabytes.
DRAM Installed
Displays the amount of DRAM installed in megabytes.
Ptr On Time
Displays the cumulative time in hours the printer has been powered on. This
value is set to zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
Printer Usage
Displays the cumulative number of inches the printer has moved media. This
value is set to zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus
147
PrintHead Usage
Displays the length of media actually printed since the last Reset Head Data
operation. This value is set to zero at the factory after burn-in testing.
Head On Time
Displays the time that power has been applied to the printhead since the last
Reset Head Data operation. This value is set to zero at the factory after burn-
in testing.
Reset Head Data
Resets all printhead statistics values (Head Prt Dist and Head On Time) to
zero.
Head Resolution
Displays the printhead resolution installed in dots per inch (203 dpi or
305 dpi).
Head Voltage
Displays the applied printhead voltage.
148
Chapter 4 Saving a Configuration
Saving a Configuration
You can save up to eight different configurations to meet eight unique print job
requirements. These configurations are saved and stored in the printer and
are not lost when the printer is turned off.
NOTE: If the Protect Config. option is enabled, the new configuration will not
be saved until the existing configuration is deleted.
Follow these steps to save a new configuration:
1. Press the key to enter the menu configuration.
2. Press the Right key until CONFIGURATION displays.
3. Press the ↵ key to enter the CONFIGURATION menu.
4. Press the Down key until the following option is selected:
5. Press the Left or Right keys to cycle through the options (1-8).
NOTE: Factory is not listed because changes made to the factory
configuration cannot be saved under Factory.
6. When the desired number displays, press the ↵ key to select it. The
following message displays briefly:
When processing is completed, the display shows:
NOTE: If the configuration number has been previously saved and Protect
Config. is enabled under the CONFIGURATION menu, the following
error message displays:
If the above occurs, see “Modifying a Saved Configuration” on page 152,
step 4.
7. Print your configuration and store it in a safe place for future reference.
Refer to “Printing a Configuration” on page 154.
.
.
.
CONFIGURATION
Save Config.
1*
Saving
Configuration
Save Config.
X*
CONFIG. EXISTS
Delete First
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus
149
Auto Save Configuration
Auto Save Functionality
The Auto Save Configuration function is triggered when the operator has
made a change to a menu that is normally saved as part of a printer
configuration and attempts to go online without saving these changes to a
configuration.
NOTE: Menus that are automatically saved as part of the Printer Settings,
such as the Network Addresses, will not trigger the Auto Save
Configuration function.
The Auto Save Configuration function works with the active configuration. The
active configuration is the configuration that was last loaded or saved. When a
configuration is loaded, either as the Power-Up default, by the emulation’s
response to a host command, or by the operator from the front panel, that
configuration is the active configuration. If the operator saves a configuration
from the front panel, that configuration becomes the active configuration.
The Auto Save Configuration function will sometimes need to find an open
configuration. An open configuration is a configuration that has not yet been
used to save a configuration. The Auto Save Configuration function will start
with Configuration #1 and check each configuration to see if a configuration
has been saved in that configuration number. The first empty configuration
found is used as the open configuration.
The Auto Save Configuration cannot save a configuration to the Factory
Configuration. If the active configuration is the Factory Configuration then the
Auto Save Configuration function must find an open configuration into which
to save the active configuration.
To disable the Auto Save Configuration, set Auto Save (in the Configuration
menu) to Disable. The Auto Save menu displays only if Admin User is set to
Enable in the Printer Setup menu.
Auto Save Feature
When an operator has made a change to a menu and attempts to go Online
without saving the changes to a configuration, the following prompt displays:
Menu Changes Detected
Save Permanently
Save Temporarily
Cancel Changes
Restore Factory
Press ↵ to Select
150
Chapter 4 Specifying a Power-Up Configuration
The active option is highlighted. The operator can use the Up and Down keys
to scroll through the different options. The keys will loop at the top and bottom
options. The ↵ (Enter) key selects the highlighted option. The printer will go
Online after performing the selected option.
NOTE: Only the Up, Down, and Enter keys work at the Menu Changes
Detected prompt.
•Save Permanently (default option). This option will cause the printer to
save the configuration to the active configuration and make the active
configuration the Power-Up default configuration. If the active
configuration is the Factory Configuration, the printer will save the
configuration to an open configuration and make that open configuration
the Power-Up default configuration.
If there is no open configuration, the operator must decide which
configuration to overwrite. In this case the printer will display the Save
Configuration menu, otherwise, the printer will go Online.
•Save Temporarily. Menu changes will be implemented, but will not be
saved once the printer is powered off.
•Cancel Changes. This option will cause the printer to reload the Active
Configuration and then go Online.
•Restore Factory. This option will cause the printer to reload the Factory
Configuration and then go Online.
NOTE: A printer fault during the Auto Save process will cause the automatic
selection of Save Temporarily.
Specifying a Power-Up Configuration
You can specify any one of the nine configurations (1-8 or Factory) as the
power-up configuration:
1. Press the key to enter the menu configuration.
2. Press the Right key until the following displays:
3. Press the ↵ key to enter the PRINTER SETUP menu.
4. Press the Up key until the following option is selected:
5. Press the ↵ key to enter the Admin User submenu.
6. Press the Right key until the following displays:
.
.
.
PRINTER SETUP
PRINTER SETUP
Admin User
Admin User
Enable
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus
151
7. Press the ↵ key to select Enable. An asterisk appears after Enable.
Setting Admin User to Enable allows the user to see hidden submenus.
8. Press the key go to the main menu.
9. Press the Right key until the following displays:
10. Press the ↵ key to enter the CONFIGURATION menu.
11. Press the Down key until the following message displays:
12. Press the Left or Right keys to cycle through the options (1-8 and
Factory). When the desired number displays, press the ↵ key to select it.
The following message displays:
NOTE: If the configuration number has not been saved previously, the
following error message displays:
If this error message displays, see “Saving a Configuration” on
page 148. Once you have saved a configuration, repeat the steps in
this procedure.
.
.
.
CONFIGURATION
Power-Up Config.
Factory*
Power-Up Config.
X*
CONFIG. DOES NOT
EXIST/Save First
152
Chapter 4 Modifying a Saved Configuration
Modifying a Saved Configuration
You can change a saved configuration by rewriting over it. For example, you
can modify Config. 1, shown below. Suppose you want to keep all the settings
but you want to select the parallel Centronics interface instead of the
IEEE 1284 interface.
1. Load the configuration to be changed (for example, Config. 1).
a. Press the key to enter the menu configuration. MEDIA SETUP is
selected.
b. Press the Right key until the following displays:
c. Press the ↵ key to enter the CONFIGURATION menu.
d. Press the Down key until the following displays:
e. Press the Left or Right keys to cycle through the options Factory, 1-8.
f. When the desired number displays, press the ↵ key to select it. The
following message displays:
Then, the following message displays when it is loaded:
2. Move through the menu and change all the desired values. (In this
example, press the key then the Right key until EMULATION
displays. Press the Right key until Select: IGL displays.
3. Press the ↵ key to select each new value. An asterisk (*) displays.
.
.
.
CONFIGURATION
Load Config.
1*
Loading Saved
Configuration
Load Config.
X*
.
.
.
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus
153
4. Before saving the modified configuration, you must delete the original
configuration if the Protect Config. option is enabled.
a. Press the Up or Down keys until the following message displays:
b. Press the Left or Right keys to cycle through the options (1-8).
When the desired number displays, press the ↵ key to select it.
The following message displays:
Then, the following displays when it is deleted:
5. Save the new configuration as described in the “Saving a Configuration”
on page 148. Make sure you select the same number (e.g., Config. 1)
when saving the modified configuration. The new configuration writes
over the existing one.
6. Print a copy of this newest configuration and store it in a safe place. Refer
to “Printing a Configuration” on page 154.
Delete Config.
1*
Deleting
Configuration
Delete Config.
X*
154
Chapter 4 Printing a Configuration
Printing a Configuration
We recommend that you print and store your configurations for future
reference. The printout provides a list of the parameters that were set when
you configured the printer.
To print a configuration:
1. Press the key to enter the Main menu.
2. Press the Right key until the following message displays:
3. Press the ↵ key to enter the CONFIGURATION menu.
4. Press the Down key until the following message displays:
5. Press the Left or Right keys to cycle through the following printout
options:
Current*
Factory
Power-Up
All
1-8 customized configurations
6. When the desired option displays, press the ↵ key. The printer prints the
specified configuration.
NOTE: If the configuration you want to print has not been saved, the
following message displays momentarily:
This message indicates that no configuration menu has been saved
under the configuration value you have selected and therefore cannot
be printed. You must either select another configuration to print or
load and then save a configuration to that configuration value first.
.
.
.
CONFIGURATION
Print Config.
Current*
CONFIG. DOES NOT
EXIST/Save First
DIAGNOSTICS Submenus
155
Loading a Saved Configuration
Method 1
1. Press the key to place the printer offline.
2. Press the Up key. The following message displays:
3. Press the Up key until the desired configuration displays.
4. Press ↵. Loading Saved/Configuration dispalys.
NOTE: Only configurations that have previously been saved appear as
options in the Load Config menu. If no configurations have been
saved, the only option under Load Config will be Factory.
Method 2
To use a different configuration:
1. Press the key to enter the Main menu.
2. Press the Right key until the following message displays:
3. Press the ↵ key to enter the CONFIGURATION menu.
4. Press the Right key until the following message displays:
5. Press Left or Right keys until the desired configuration displays.
6. Press ↵. Loading Saved/Configuration displays.
NOTE: Only the saved configuration will display. The factory config will not
display. If there are no saved configurations, then the message “No
Saved Configs” will display.
Load Config.
Cfg1*
.
.
.
CONFIGURATION
Load Config.
Factory*
156
Chapter 4 Loading a Saved Configuration
157
5Downloading Software
Loading Flash Memory
Flash memory is contained in a SIMM (single in-line memory module) located
on the controller PCBA. Printer control languages (the “emulations”) and
printer operating system software are loaded into flash memory at the factory,
but there are occasions when you may have to load this software:
•You have replaced the controller PCBA
•You have replaced flash memory
•The customer needs to upgrade printer software
Emulation and operating system software are included as files on a CD that
comes with the printer. You will copy the appropriate file from the
CD to a computer’s hard disk, then download the file from the computer into
printer memory.
IMPORTANT
When downloading emulation and operating system software to the
printer, all other optional fonts (except those on the EMC), customer-
supplied logos, setup files, feature files, and TIFF files will be erased.
You will then need to reload those files. Before starting a download
procedure, be sure that you have all the necessary files on hand.
You can load software through the serial, parallel, USB, or ethernet port of the
printer, and you can do it four ways:
•You can load software through any printer port except USB by using the
Firmware Download Utility included on the CD that comes with the printer.
(See page 158.)
•You can use a command prompt session to load software through the
parallel port. (See page 159.)
•If the printer has the NIC installed, you can load software through the
ethernet port. (See page 160.)
•You can use a command prompt session to load software through the
USB port (See page 164.)
158
Chapter 5 Downloading Software with the Firmware Download Utility
Downloading Software with the Firmware Download Utility
The Firmware Download Utility (FDU) allows you to load program files into the
printer with an easy to use graphical interface. The FDU is a utility program
included on the CD that comes with the printer. It can be used on computers
running the Windows or UNIX® (such as Linux® or Solaris™) operating
systems. With the FDU, you can choose the printer port through which to load
software (all are supported), configure the port, and initiate the download.
The FDU is a Java™-based program, so you need the Java 2 Platform,
Standard Edition (J2SE™) Java Runtime Environment (JRE) installed on your
computer. The Windows version of the J2SE JRE is included on the CD that
comes with the printer in the form of an executable file. Copy this file to your
computer and double-click it; it will self-extract and install the J2SE JRE on
your computer.
NOTE: If you have a Linux or Solaris system, you can download the J2SE
JRE for your system from http://java.sun.com/j2se.
If you have another UNIX system, see your system administrator.
Conditions for use of the included Java Software are set forth in the Sun
Microsystems Binary Code License Agreement
(http://java.com/en/download/license.jsp). In the event of any conflicting
terms, the Binary Code License Agreement controls.
1. Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations. See page 154.
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
3. Disconnect the data (signal) cable(s) from the printer interface
connectors.
4. Connect a printer data cable to the parallel, serial, or ethernet port of the
computer you will use to download the software.
5. Connect the printer data cable to the appropriate I/O port of the printer.
6. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ↵ and keys.
Without releasing the keys, power the printer on. When you see
“DECOMPRESSING PROGRAM” on the on the LCD, release the keys.
7. Wait until you see “FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD MODE” on the LCD before
doing the next step. This can take about a minute to appear, depending
on the emulations and interfaces installed in the printer.
8. On your computer, create a directory named download at the root level
of the hard drive (e.g., C:\download on a Windows computer).
9. Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer’s CD drive.
10. Copy the FDU.jar file from the CD to your computer.
11. Select the emulation set you want to download into the printer. The
filename is a six digit number plus .exe. For example: 123456.exe
This is the file you will download into the printer.
12. Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 8.
159
13. Double-click the FDU.jar file (for command line prompt users, type
java -jar fdu.jar<Enter>). It will launch in its own window. Use the
FDU to enter the emulation part number, to select the I/O connection and
its corresponding settings, and to initiate the download.
IMPORTANT
Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
14. When the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and
the printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (Off).
15. Remove the CD from your computer and store it with the printer.
16. If required, reconnect the data input cable(s) to the printer.
17. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
18. Using the configuration printout(s) you made in step 1, page 158, restore
the printer configurations.
Downloading Software through the Parallel Port
1. Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations. See page 154.
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
3. Disconnect the data (signal) cable(s) from the printer interface
connectors.
4. Connect a parallel data printer cable to the LPT1 port of a computer
running the Windows (95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP, Server 2003, or Vista)
operating system.
5. Connect the data cable to the appropriate I/O port of the printer.
6. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ↵ and keys.
Without releasing the keys, power the printer on. When you see
“DECOMPRESSING PROGRAM” on the on the LCD, release the keys.
7. Wait until you see “WAITING FOR DOWNLOAD” on the LCD before
proceeding. This can take about a minute to appear, depending on the
emulations and interfaces installed in the printer.
8. Using Windows Explorer, create a directory named download at the root
level of your C: hard drive (C:\download).
9. Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer’s CD drive.
10. Select the emulation set you want to download into the printer. The
filename is a six digit number plus .exe. For example: 123456.exe
This is the file you will download into the printer.
11. Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 8.
12. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
Command Prompt or MS-DOS® Prompt.)
13. At the command prompt type:
C:<Enter>
cd \download<Enter>
160
Chapter 5 Downloading Software through the NIC
14. Enter the following command:
filename.exe -pb<Enter>
where filename.exe is the file name you noted in step 10. This command
takes the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into the flash
memory on the printer controller board.
IMPORTANT
Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
While the file is copied into memory, the printer LCD informs you of the
load process and status.
15. When the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and
the printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (Off).
16. Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer.
17. If required, reconnect the data input cable(s) to the printer.
18. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
19. Using the configuration printout(s) you made in step 1 on page 159,
restore the printer configurations.
Downloading Software through the NIC
IMPORTANT
To load software through the NIC, you need the IP Address of the printer
and the flash memory must contain basic printer code. If the flash
memory was replaced, or if a download was interrupted (e.g., by a power
outage), you must load software through the parallel port. (See
“Downloading Software If Flash Contains Only Boot or Corrupt Code”
on page 166.)
1. Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations. See page 154.
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
3. Connect the ethernet cable to the printer interface.
4. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
5. Wait until you see “ONLINE” on the LCD before doing the next step. This
can take about a minute to appear, depending on the emulations and
interfaces installed in the printer.
6. Using Windows Explorer, create a directory named download at the root
level of your C: hard drive (C:\download).
7. Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer’s CD drive.
8. Select the emulation set you want to download into the printer. The
filename is a six digit number plus .exe. For example: 123456.exe
This is the file you will download into the printer.
9. Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 6.
10. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
Command Prompt or MS-DOS Prompt.)
161
11. At the command prompt type:
C:<Enter>
cd \download<Enter>
12. Enter the following command:
filename.exe -n xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx<Enter>
where filename.exe is the file name you noted in step 8 and
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP address of the printer. This command takes the
file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into the flash memory
on the printer controller board.
NOTE: If the software does not download, use the Firmware Download Utility
(page 158).
IMPORTANT
Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
While the file is copied into memory, the printer LCD informs you of the
load process and status.
13. When the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and
the printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (Off).
14. Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer.
15. If required, reconnect the data input cable(s) to the printer.
16. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
17. Using the configuration printout(s) you made in step 1 on page 160,
restore the printer configurations.
162
Chapter 5 Downloading Software through the NIC Using FTP
Downloading Software through the NIC Using FTP
IMPORTANT
To load software through the NIC, you need the IP Address of the printer
and the flash memory must contain basic printer code. If the flash
memory was replaced, or if a download was interrupted (e.g., by a power
outage), you must load software through the parallel port. (See
“Downloading Software If Flash Contains Only Boot or Corrupt Code”
on page 166.)
1. Make a configuration printout of all saved configurations. See page 154.
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
3. Connect the ethernet cable to the printer interface.
4. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ↵ and keys.
Without releasing the keys, power the printer on. When you see
“DECOMPRESSING PROGRAM” on the on the LCD, release the keys.
5. Wait until you see “WAITING FOR DOWNLOAD” on the LCD before
proceeding. This can take about a minute to appear, depending on the
emulations and interfaces installed in the printer.
6. Using Windows Explorer, create a directory named download at the root
level of your C: hard drive (C:\download).
7. Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer’s CD drive.
8. Select the emulation set you want to download into the printer. The
filename is a six digit number plus .exe. For example: 123456.exe
This file contains the file you will download into the printer.
9. Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 6.
10. Start a command prompt session in Windows. (The Start Menu icon is
usually labeled Command Prompt or MS-DOS Prompt.)
11. At the command prompt type:
C:<Enter>
cd \download<Enter>
12. Extract the download file by typing the filename of the .exe file.
Example: For 123456.exe, the extracted file will be the same name as the
.exe file but with a .prg extension. 123456.prg is the file you will download
into the printer.
13. Start the FTP (file transfer protocol) program by typing:
ftp xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx<Enter>
where xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx is the IP Address of the printer.
14. Log in to the printer by typing:
root<Enter>
You are given a password prompt.
NOTE: The default is no password. If the FTP program requires a password,
contact the system administrator.
15. At the password prompt, press <Enter>.
163
16. Once logged in, type the following sequence at the command prompt to
download the filename.prg file to the printer:
cd dest<Enter>
cd d1prn<Enter>
bin<Enter>
put filename.prg<Enter>
where filename.prg is the file name you noted in step 8.
IMPORTANT
Do not interrupt the downloading process once it has started.
Interrupting a download will leave the flash memory on the controller
PCBA and NIC incompletely loaded, and the printer may not boot up.
17. When the download is complete, exit the FTP program by typing:
quit<Enter>
18. When the new software has successfully loaded into flash memory and
the printer has reset itself, set the printer power switch to O (Off).
19. Remove the CD from the host computer and store it with the printer.
20. If required, reconnect the data input cable(s) to the printer.
21. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
22. Using the configuration printout(s) you made in step 1 on page 162,
restore the printer configurations.
164
Chapter 5 Downloading Software through the USB Port
Downloading Software through the USB Port
Normally the host communicates with the printer’s USB port with a Windows
driver. To download a file using the USB Port, it needs to be remapped.
To download software through the USB Port, perform the following steps:
1. Using Windows Explorer, create a directory named download at the root
level of your C: hard drive (C:\download).
2. Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer’s CD drive.
3. Select the emulation set you want to download into the printer. The
filename is a six digit number plus .exe. For example: 123456.exe
This file contains the file you will download into the printer.
4. Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 1.
5. Make the printer sharable on the host PC. This is done through the
printer’s Properties\Sharing tab. Make note of the printer’s shared name.
6. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
Command Prompt or MS-DOS Prompt.)
7. At the command prompt type:
C: <Enter>
cd \download<Enter>
8. Extract the downloaded file by typing the filename of the .exe file.
Example: For 123456.exe, the extracted file will be the same name as the
.exe file but with a .prg extension. 123456.prg is the file you will download
into the printer.
9. At the command prompt type:
NET USE LPT1\\Comp_Name\Shared_Name /Persistent:YES
<Enter>
where Comp_Name is the computer name found in the computer’s
System Properties\Computer Name tab and Shared_Name is the printer’s
shared name found in the printer’s Properties\Sharing tab.
This command should be all on the same line. It redirects output on LPT1
to the shared printer.
10. To check status of connection type:
Net View \\Comp_Name<Enter>
where Comp_Name is the computer name found in the computer’s
System Properties\Computer Name tab.
Now the printer is ready.
11. To use the COPY command to send the program file to the printer type:
COPY /b filename.prg lpt1:<Enter>
where filename.prg is the file name you noted in step 3.
12. To stop using LPT1 for USB, type:
NET USE LPT1 /DELETE<Enter>
165
Downloading Software through the Printronix Windows
Driver
The Printronix Windows Driver contains an option that allows you to download
software to the printer. To download software to the printer, perform the
following steps:
1. Using Windows Explorer, create a directory named download at the root
level of your C: hard drive (C:\download).
2. Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer’s CD drive.
3. Identify which emulation set you want to download into the printer and
note the filename that corresponds to that emulation. The filename is a six
digit number plus .prg. For example: 123456.prg
This is the file you will download into the printer.
4. Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 1.
5. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the ↵ and keys.
Without releasing the keys, power the printer on. When you see “B01:
STATUS” on the on the LCD, release the keys.
Wait until you see “PROGRAM DOWNLOAD” on the LCD before
proceeding. This can take about a minute to appear, depending on the
emulations and interfaces installed in the printer.
6. Load the Printronix Windows driver provided with your printer on the
Manuals and Utilities CD on Windows 2000/NT/XP/Server 2003/Vista.
7. Once the printer driver is installed on the PC, right-click the printer driver
and select Properties.
8. Click the About/Help tab to access the software download option.
9. Click the Firmware Update button.
10. Enter the full path and location to the printer software:
c:\download\firmware.prg where c:\download is the directory you
created in step 1 and firmware.prg is the software you noted in step 3.
11. Click OK to send the software to the printer. To abort this operation, click
the Cancel button.
Downloading Software through the Printronix Windows Driver
166
Chapter 5 Downloading Software If Flash Contains Only Boot or Corrupt Code
Downloading Software If Flash Contains Only Boot or
Corrupt Code
If the flash memory contains only boot code (e.g., if it is new), or if a download
was interrupted (e.g., by a power outage), you must download software
through the printer’s parallel port using the three-key initialization sequence
covered in this section.
1. Make sure the printer’s parallel port is available.
2. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
3. Disconnect the data (signal) cable(s) from the printer interface
connectors.
4. Connect a parallel data printer cable to the LPT1 port of a computer
running the Windows (95, 98, Me, NT, 2000, XP, Server 2003, or Vista)
operating system.
5. Connect the data cable to the Centronics port of the printer.
6. On the printer control panel, press and hold the DOWN key, the ↵ key,
and key. Without releasing the keys, power the printer on. When you
see “SDRAM TEST” or “B20 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD” on the LCD,
release the keys.
7. Using Windows Explorer, create a directory named download at the root
level of your C: hard drive (C:\download).
8. Insert the printer emulation software CD into your computer’s CD drive.
9. Select the emulation set you want to download into the printer. The
filename is a six digit number plus .exe. For example: 123456.exe
This is the file you will download into the printer.
10. Copy the file to the download directory you created in step 7.
11. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
Command Prompt or MS-DOS Prompt.)
12. At the command prompt type:
C:<Enter>
cd \download<Enter>
13. Enter the following command:
filename.exe -pb<Enter>
where filename.exe is the file name you noted in step 8. This command
decompresses the file on the hard drive and copies it as a binary file into
the flash memory on the printer controller board.
14. After the software successfully loads into flash memory, the printer will
reset itself.
NOTE: For SL4M printers, the RFID reader firmware will not upgrade using
this download method. If the RFID reader needs to be upgraded,
repeat the download process using one of the methods described
earlier after completing the three-key download.
Printronix Windows Driver
167
Using TrueType Fonts
TrueType fonts allow you to customize the look of your forms and labels. You
are able to download TrueType fonts purchased from various sources into
your printer. The fonts are available for purchase on websites such as
www.fonts.com and www.myfonts.com.
The following sections discuss how to:
•download TrueType fonts (see below)
•select and print TrueType fonts (see page 172)
•use TrueType fonts to print DBCS using UTF-8 (see page 173)
Downloading TrueType Fonts
You can download TrueType fonts to your printer by using any of the
following:
•Printronix Windows Driver
•PGL Emulation (Online)
•Download Mode (after adding a header)
•PTX_SETUP
•Labeling Applications
Once a TrueType font is downloaded, it will be stored in the Flash file system
as a resident font. Regardless of printer power cycles, the downloaded font
will stay in the printer until the user deletes it. The user can find the list of all
printer resident fonts under PRINTER SETUPMain FFSView File List
after enabling Admin User in the PRINTER SETUP menu. To delete a
downloaded font from the Flash file system, the user should select the font
under PRINTER SETUPMain FFSDelete File List and then select
PRINTER SETUPOptimize & Reboot.
Printronix Windows Driver
A TrueType font can be downloaded from a PC through the Printronix
Windows Driver.
1. Load the Printronix Windows driver provided with your printer on the
Manuals and Utilities CD on Windows 2000/XP.
2. Once the printer driver is installed on the PC, right-click the printer driver
and select Properties.
3. Click the TT Font Download tab to access all the available system
TrueType fonts.
4. Select the TrueType font(s) from the Available System TrueType Fonts
pane you want to download.
5. Click the Download button to download font(s) to the printer while it is
online.
168
Chapter 5 Downloading TrueType Fonts
PGL Emulation (Online)
A TrueType font can be loaded by creating a file that appends a PGL
command to the font and then sending that file to the printer. Use the PGL
FONTLOAD command:
~FONTLOAD;FontName;FontSize;Location
where
FontName - TrueType font name, e.g. arial.ttf
FontSize - TrueType font size, e.g. file size for arial.ttf
Location - Specify the download location to Flash
EMC - Specify the download location to EMC.
For example:
~FONTLOAD;arial.ttf;60548;DISK
Insert binary data of arial.ttf here...
END
After the file is created, it can be copied to the appropriate I/O port of the
printer while the printer is online, just like any other print file (for example:
copy/b filename.ext lpt1 or LPT1).
Download Mode
To download a TrueType font to the printer through Download mode, first add
a header to the font, then place the printer in Download mode and download
the font.
Adding A Header
A TrueType font can be converted to a downloadable format by appending a
header to the font file using the cnvt2fls.exe utility and a batch file.
Header For Main Flash
1. Start a Command prompt window.
2. Copy cnvt2fls.exe and addtthdr.bat from your startup CD to your working
directory.
3. In your working directory, include the TrueType font file in .ttf format
(e.g., arial.ttf).
4. Convert the TrueType font file .ttf to a downloadable format .dwn with the
following command: addtthdr (filename without extension).
Example: addtthdr arial
This creates the file arial.dwn.
5. Put the printer in download mode and send the downloadable font file
(e.g., arial.dwn) to the printer through the appropriate I/O port of the
printer.
To put the printer in download mode, see “Download TrueType Fonts via
the Parallel or Serial Port” on page 169 and “Download TrueType Fonts
via the Ethernet Using FTP” on page 171.
Download Mode
169
Header For EMC Flash
1. Start a Command prompt window.
2. Copy cnvt2fls.exe and addttemc.bat from your startup CD to your working
directory.
3. In your working directory, include the TrueType font file in .ttf format
(e.g., arial.ttf).
4. Convert the TrueType font file .ttf to a downloadable format .dwn with the
following command: addttemc (filename without extension).
Example: addttemc arial
This creates the file arial.dwn.
5. Put the printer in download mode and send the downloadable font file
(e.g., arial.dwn) to the printer through the appropriate I/O port of the
printer.
To put the printer in download mode, see “Download TrueType Fonts via
the Parallel or Serial Port” below and “Download TrueType Fonts via the
Ethernet Using FTP” on page 171. If the font is too large to downloading
using these methods, then put the printer in download mode using the
DOWN key + ↵ + keys.
Download TrueType Fonts via the Parallel or Serial Port
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2. Connect a parallel data cable to the LPT1 port or a serial cable to the
COM1 port of an IBM-compatible computer running the Windows (95, 98,
Me, NT, 2000, XP, Server 2003, or Vista) operating system.
NOTE: You can connect the cable to the LPT2 port on the computer if the
LPT1 port is already in use. The load commands are different if you
use this port, as described in the notes after step 10.
3. Verify that the data cable is connected to the appropriate I/O port on the
printer and to the host computer.
4. Power on the computer and allow it to boot up.
5. On the printer control panel, press and hold down the appropriate combo
keys.
•To download fonts to the EMC, the combo keys are → (Right Arrow),
↵ (Enter), and (Cancel).
•To download fonts to Flash, the combo keys are ↵ (Enter) and
(Cancel).
Without releasing the keys, power the printer on. Continue holding down
the combo keys.
6. When you see the power-up splash screen on the LCD, release the
combo keys.
7. Wait until you see “Status: Firmware Download Mode” on the LCD before
proceeding. This can take about a minute to appear, depending on the
emulations and interfaces installed in the printer.
170
Chapter 5 Downloading TrueType Fonts
8. Start a command prompt session. (The Start Menu icon is usually labeled
Command Prompt or MS-DOS Prompt.)
9. Make note of the file name with the .dwn extension of each file you want
to download to the printer.
10. At the command prompt type:
copy /b filename.dwn LPT1<Enter>
(where filename.dwn is file name you noted in step 9.)
NOTE: If you are loading the file using the LPT2 port on the computer, type
the following command:
copy /b filename.dwn LPT2<Enter>
(where filename.dwn is a file you noted in step 9.)
If you are loading the file using the serial port on the computer, type
the following commands:
mode COM1:9600,N,8,1,P<Enter>
copy /b filename.dwn COM1<Enter>
(where filename.dwn is a file you noted in step 9.)
The 9600 baud rate is the only selection some systems can use. The
baud rate information entered in the above commands must match the
Baud Rate setting (in the SERIAL PORT menu) saved in the Power-Up
Config.
You can download the fonts one at a time by entering one file name per
the copy command or you can copy multiple files in one copy command.
To download one file at a time, enter the following at the command
prompt:
copy /b filename.dwn LPT1<Enter>
To download multiple files, enter the following at the command prompt,
for example:
copy /b filename1.dwn+filename2.dwn+...LPT1<Enter>
11. While the font file is copied into the flash memory, the printer LCD informs
you of the load process and status. When the new file is successfully
loaded into memory, the printer will reset itself and go online.
12. To verify that the fonts have been downloaded:
NOTE: Admin User must be set to Enable in the PRINTER SETUP menu.
a. Perform a configuration printout.
— OR —
b. Select PRINTER SETUPMain FFSView File List or
PRINTER SETUPEMC FFSView File List, depending on
whether you downloaded to the main flash or the optional EMC flash
cartridge. The new file names will appear with the same file name you
downloaded, but with a .ttf extension.
NOTE: The TrueType font typefaces cannot be selected via the printer
control panel. They can only be selected via a software command
from the host.
PTX_SETUP
171
13. Press (Pause) key to place the printer online and return the printer to
normal operation.
Download TrueType Fonts via the Ethernet Using FTP
1. Put the printer into download mode. See “Download Mode” on page 168.
2. Use FTP to transfer the binary font file (.dwn instead of .prg) to the printer
through the Ethernet. See “Downloading Software through the NIC Using
FTP” on page 162. Follow the instructions for flash download operation.
Once the fonts are loaded, they will be visible in a configuration listing or in a
View File List menu option. It may be necessary to enable Admin User to see
the View File List menu. The font files will be shown with extension .ttf for
“TrueType font.”
PTX_SETUP
PTX_SETUP can be used to load TrueType fonts into the file system. Please
see the PTX_SETUP chapter in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual for
details.
Example:
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO-CAPTURE; “ARIAL.TTF”.
PTX_END
Arial TrueType font binary data
NOTE: Do not add any LF/FF at the end of the binary data
!PTX_SETUP
FILE_IO-CAPTURE;””.
PTX_END
Labeling Applications
A TrueType font can be downloaded through several labeling applications,
such as Codesoft, Loftware, and Bartender. Please contact the appropriate
company for more details.
172
Chapter 5 Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus
Filename Extensions Not Shown in Menus
Files with the one of the filename extensions below (upper or lower case) are
considered system files and are not shown in the View File List or Delete Files
menu. Do not download any user files with these extensions.
Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts
After downloading the TrueType font using any of the following methods, you
can access the downloaded TrueType font by using the command as
described in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.
To Print ASCII Characters
You can print characters from your font using the currently selected character
set. You can also select a new character set using the ISET command.
Example:
~CREATE;FORM
FONT;NAME ARIAL.TTF
ALPHA
10;10;2;2;$01234$
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;FORM;1
To Print All Characters
You can print all of the characters in your font using UTF-8. You must have a
UTF-8 datastream to print.
Table 13. File Extensions Not Shown in Menus
Extensions
*.bin *.inf *.ras
*.cpg *.lfi *.rfv
*.eng *.map *.sec
*.fon *.pat
*.gz *.qsm
Labeling Applications
173
Example:
~CREATE;FORM
ISET;’UTF8’
FONT;NAME ARIAL.TTF
ALPHA
10;10;2;2;$UTF-8 data$
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;FORM;1
To Print Double Byte Characters (DBCS)
You can print double byte (DBCS) characters using the ISET or SYMSET
command to select DBCS character set with a non-DBCS printer (without a
DBCS font cartridge). The following conditions must be met:
1. The font must be a TrueType font which supports DBCS characters.
2. The font must have the characters arranged in Unicode order.
3. The printer’s DRAM, Flash memory, or EMC must have enough memory
to hold the font file.
To check for the available amount of Flash memory, select
PRINTER SETUPMain FFSFlash Avail.
To check for the available amount of EMC memory, select PRINTER
SETUPEMC FFSFlash Avail.
You can also print a configuration printout for memory availability,
see “CONFIGURATION MENU” on page 141. For information on EMC,
see “Expanded Memory Cartridge (EMC)” on page 228.
When all conditions are met, you can access the DBCS TrueType font by
using the FONT;NAME command with ISET;11xx or FONT;SYMSET 11xx as
described in the PGL Programmer’s Reference Manual.
Example:
~CREATE;FORM
ISET;1100
FONT;NAME dbcsfont.ttf
ALPHA
10;10;2;2;$DBCS data$
STOP
END
~EXECUTE;FORM;1
NOTE: Some DBCS fonts may require a larger buffer size to print, otherwise
it will print as blank. To adjust the Max Font Buffer and Max Cache
Memory value through the front panel, select PRINTER
SETUPMax Font Buffer or PRINTER SETUPMax Cache
Memory. See “PRINTER SETUP Menu” on page 106.
If the Max Font Buffer or Max Cache Memory value is changed, you
must save the config as power-up config and recycle the printer
power for the value to take effect.
174
Chapter 5 Select and Print Downloaded TrueType Fonts
175
6Routine Care and
Troubleshooting
Cleaning
Depending on the media used, the printer may accumulate residues (media
dust, adhesives, etc.) as a by-product of normal printing. To maintain top
printing quality, remove these residues by cleaning the printer periodically.
WARNING
Set the printer power switch to O (Off) prior to performing any cleaning
tasks. Leave the power cord connected to keep the printer grounded
and to reduce the risk of electrostatic damage.
IMPORTANT
When the printer is powered off, menu settings that were changed and
not saved permanently and any print data remaining in the print buffer
will be lost. To prevent loss of recent menu changes, see “Saving a
Configuration” on page 148.
CAUTION
•Do not wear rings or other metallic objects while cleaning any
interior area of the printer.
•Use only the cleaning agents recommended in this section. Use of
other cleaners may damage the printer and void its warranty.
•Do not spray or drip liquid cleaning solutions directly into the
printer. Apply the solution on a clean lint-free cloth and then apply
the dampened cloth to the printer.
•Do not use canned air in the interior of the printer as it can blow dust
and debris onto sensors and other critical components.
•Only use a vacuum cleaner with a nozzle and hose that are
conductive and grounded to drain off static build up.
•All reference in these procedures for use of isopropyl alcohol
requires that a 99% or greater isopropyl alcohol content be used to
reduce the risk of moisture corrosion to the printhead.
Exterior Cleaning
Clean the exterior surfaces with a clean, lint-free cloth. If necessary, dampen
the cloth with a mild detergent or desktop cleaning solution.
176
Chapter 6 Cleaning
Interior Cleaning
Clean the interior of the printer by removing any dirt, lint, or paper dust. Use a
vacuum cleaner, described above, or a brush with soft non-metallic bristles.
Cleaning the Printhead, Platen Roller, Media Sensors,
and Media Damper
NOTE: Even though the printhead, platen roller, media sensors, and media
damper are individually listed in these cleaning procedures, debris
and adhesive on these components can ultimately travel to the
printhead area and therefore should be cleaned and examined each
time the printhead is cleaned and in the order shown.
Printhead Cleaning
As you use your printer, the printhead may become dirty with ribbon residue
and label adhesives which can result in poor print quality. Keeping the
printhead clean will help maintain its life.
•Cleaning Agent - Clean the printhead using a Printhead Cleaning Pen,
Printronix PN 203502-002, or an Isopropyl Alcohol Wipe, Printronix PN
254945-901.
•Schedule - Clean the printhead each time you install a new roll of ribbon
(thermal transfer print mode) or when you install a new roll or box of
media (direct thermal print mode).
WARNING
If you have just been printing, allow one minute for the printhead to cool
down to avoid burns from accidental printhead contact.
CAUTION
•Avoid electrostatic damage to the printhead by first making hand
contact with an unpainted part of the printer frame or use an anti-
static wrist strap grounded to the printer frame.
•Do not use hard, sharp or abrasive objects to remove residue from
the printhead.
•Do not touch the heating element surface of the printhead with your
hands to avoid printhead corrosion. Any accidental skin contact
with the element surface should be immediately followed by a
thorough cleaning with a Printhead Cleaning Pen or an Isopropyl
Alcohol Wipe.
•The heating elements surface should be free from any condensation
to avoid corrosion.
1. Rotate the blue deck lock lever counterclockwise to open the pivoting
deck and remove the media and ribbon, if installed.
2. Clean the printhead by gently rubbing an Isopropyl Alcohol Wipe or the
felt tip of a Printhead Cleaning Pen across the printhead’s light brown
heating elements area. Allow the printhead to dry for one minute before
reloading ribbon or media.
Cleaning the Printhead, Platen Roller, Media Sensors, and Media Damper
177
NOTE: Even after a thorough cleaning with a Printhead Cleaning Pen or
Alcohol Wipe, you may still see printouts with voids or streaks. This
may be the result of baked-on ribbon resin that can be hard to remove
when normal cleaning cycles are not maintained. Try using a Thermal
Printer Cleaning Card or Sheet. When using a cleaning card or sheet,
follow the directions on the packaging.
Thermal printer cleaning cards and sheets are available on the
internet.
Platen Roller Cleaning
Label parts, media dust, and adhesive residue on the platen can degrade
print quality and cause voids in your label image.
•Cleaning Agent - Use an isopropyl alcohol wipe or a small amount of
isopropyl alcohol on a clean cloth to clean the platen roller.
•Schedule - Clean the platen roller each time you clean the printhead.
3. Clean the platen roller by first manually removing any label parts from its
surface. Then use an isopropyl alcohol wipe or clean cloth moistened with
isopropyl alcohol to remove any remaining paper dust, debris, or label
adhesive. The platen roller can be manually rotated forward to access
and clean its entire surface area.
NOTE: Even though power is removed from the platen motor, some drag will
be felt as you rotate the platen.
4. Check the platen roller for razor cuts, nicks, and gouges that may cause
voids in the printed image. This type of damage usually requires platen
roller replacement.
Media Sensor Cleaning
The upper and lower media sensors should be cleaned to ensure reliable Top
of Form and Paper Out sensing.
CAUTION
Do not use isopropyl alcohol, solvents, or abrasive agents to clean the
media sensors as they can damage sensor lens covers.
•Cleaning Agent - No cleaning agent should be used. Use a brush with
soft non-metallic bristles or a vacuum cleaner, described on page 175, to
remove paper dust.
•Schedule - Clean the media sensors each time you clean the printhead.
5. Brush away or vacuum any dust or debris from the upper and lower
media sensors.
178
Chapter 6 Cleaning
Figure 3. Cleaning the Printhead, Platen Roller, and Media Sensors
Cleaning the Printhead, Platen Roller, Media Sensors, and Media Damper
179
Media Damper Cleaning
The media damper and its width guides can accumulate parts of labels,
adhesive and paper dust residue that can prevent the proper guiding of
labels.
•Cleaning Agent - Use an isopropyl alcohol wipe or isopropyl alcohol on a
clean cloth.
•Schedule - Clean the media damper and its width guides each time you
clean the printhead.
6. Clean the media damper by rotating it counterclockwise and remove any
label parts from its bottom surface. Then use an isopropyl alcohol wipe or
clean cloth moistened with isopropyl alcohol to remove all remaining
debris and adhesive from the damper and its inboard and outboard
guides.
IMPORTANT
All adhesive must be completely removed to prevent future die cut
labels from being accidently peeled away from their liner.
Cutter Option Cleaning
The cutter requires only periodic cleaning.
WARNING
Keep your fingers away from the cutter blade. It is sharp.
Perform the following procedure whenever too much dust or debris is visible.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
2. Rotate the deck lock lever fully counterclockwise until the pivoting deck
swings upward.
3. Open the cutter cover by sliding the cutter cover release lever to the right.
4. Use a cloth with a light amount of WD-40 oil to clean adhesive from the
cutter guides. Adhesive oil must be cleaned from the guides with a dry
cloth to prevent dust attraction.
5. Loosen the thumbscrew on the right side of the front panel and swing it
open.
6. Use a vacuum or can of compressed air with a nozzle around the area of
the cutter blade to remove any dust or debris.
7. Use a cloth with a light amount of WD-40 oil to clean adhesive from the
cutter blade. Adhesive oil must be cleaned from the blade and guides with
a dry cloth to prevent dust attraction.
CAUTION
Do not use isopropyl alcohol to clean the cutter blade – it dissolves oils
required for lubrication.
8. Close the front panel and tighten the screw.
9. Properly route the media through the printer and cutter.
10. Close the cutter cover.
11. Close the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise.
12. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
180
Chapter 6 Printer Tests
13. Test the printer cutting operation by selecting one of the test patterns to
print. Select Printer Tests in the DIAGNOSTICS menu
(see “DIAGNOSTICS Menu” on page 144).
Printer Tests
A sequence of automatic tests is performed during printer power-up. If any
faults are detected at that time, a fault message will display.
Before setting the printer for online operation, run a test print. The printer tests
option has various tests which allow you to check for proper printer operation
and print quality.
You can print test patterns from the DIAGNOSTICS menu. For more
information, see page 145.
NOTE: Before attempting to print test labels, you must set up the printer for
the type of media installed. See “MEDIA SETUP Menu” on page 68.
for more information.
Troubleshooting Common Situations
Occasionally, situations occur that require some troubleshooting skill.
Possible problem situations and potential solutions are listed in this section.
While not every conceivable situation is addressed here, you may find some
of these tips helpful. Contact a qualified service technician for problems that
persist or are not covered in this section.
Improving Processing Time
Before looking at solutions for decreasing processing time and increasing
throughput, it may help to understand what happens during processing. When
the printer receives a format command, it enters the label formatting mode.
Label formatting requires time to process the label data into the printer
buffers.
The time required varies, depending on the complexity of the label format and
on the size of the area being printed. Once the data has been mapped into
memory, the printer will start printing as many labels as requested by the
quantity command. In most cases, there is no delay between labels, however,
when using Label Peel-Off media handling, the printer stops between each
label and waits for the label to be removed.
Data Exchange
181
Data Exchange
Many things can cause data loss or communications problems. This section
suggests some ways to isolate these problems and determine their cause.
Handshaking
Handshaking is the exchange of signals between two computers (or a
computer and a peripheral input or output device) to indicate the status of the
data being transferred. In the serial mode, the printer uses both hardware and
software handshaking and transmits both forms simultaneously when the
input buffer is full.
The printer can be used with either serial, parallel, USB, or optional NIC host
interfaces. Parallel interfaces are usually straightforward, with no special
settings required. Serial interfaces; however, have a variety of possible
communication parameter settings. The two methods of handshaking that can
be used, hardware and software, are explained below.
•Hardware Handshaking
This electrical signal is controlled by the logic state on pin 4 of the serial
interface connector J2 (at the back of the printer). The signal will go high
when the printer is ready to receive data. The signal will go low when the
printer is in the busy state, which indicates that the printer input buffer is
full and can no longer receive data.
•Software Handshaking
XON and XOFF are software signals that control serial data flow between
the printer and the host system. When the printer input buffer is full, the
printer transmits an XOFF (CTRL S) character that signals the host to
stop sending data. When memory space becomes available in the input
buffer, the printer sends an XON (CTRL Q) character, which tells the host
that the printer is ready to receive more data.
If the printer appears to have communication problems, the self-test
configuration test labels (see page 145) and character hex dump mode (see
page 146) should be checked. The tests can help identify printer configuration
errors that can cause problems.
Both of these test procedures are covered in this chapter. Configuration items
to check include the following:
•Check that the data string being sent to the printer contains the correct
information.
•Verify that the correct host interface port is being used and that the
communication parameters match those of the host (e.g., baud rate,
parity, etc.).
•Verify that the correct interface cable is installed between the host and the
printer.
182
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Common Situations
Controlling Print Quality
Four factors have the greatest effect on print quality:
•The amount of heat applied by the printhead elements (print intensity)
•The speed at which media is moving under the printhead (print speed)
•The amount of printhead pressure (see page 41 to 44).
•Media and ribbon compatibility (see page 258 to page 260).
For example, low-cost direct thermal media often has very high reaction
temperatures, which means that it takes a great deal of heat to make a clear
image. Resin ribbons and film media may require higher print intensity for a
quality image. Resin ribbons usually transfer images better on smooth
surfaced film or polyester labels but do not work as well on rougher textured
paper labels.
The printer has two ways to increase the heat of printhead elements:
•Running the printer slower by changing the print speed via the host or the
MEDIA SETUP menu.
•Setting the print intensity to a higher value with the Print Intensity function,
accessed via the host or through the MEDIA SETUP menu. This causes
more heat to be transferred into the media, thereby generating a darker
image.
Also, the printhead should be cleaned frequently to ensure that foreign
material does not accumulate on the printhead and interfere with heat
transfer. If smears, voids, or white lines appear in the printed form, the
printhead should be cleaned with a cotton swab and isopropyl alcohol
(see Figure 3 on page 178).
The cleaning should be done as a matter of routine whenever you install a
new ribbon (thermal transfer mode) or when you install new media (direct
thermal mode).
Determining Printhead Wear
The most common signs of a worn printhead are fixed vertical streaks that are
always the same size and in the same place on the printout. To determine if
vertical streaks are caused by a worn printhead, follow these methods:
1. Clean the printhead thoroughly with a cotton swab and isopropyl alcohol.
Test again for vertical streaks.
2. Remove the printhead (see page 183) and examine it for contamination
or damage such as scratches, dents, or other marks on the light brown
area containing the heating elements. Clean and install it, then test again
for vertical streaks.
3. Load an alternate roll of media. Test again for vertical streaks.
4. Load an alternate roll of ribbon. Test again for vertical streaks.
If after performing all these tests you still see fixed vertical streaks, you must
replace the printhead.
183
Replacing the Printhead
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off).
WARNING
Always unplug the printer power cord from the printer or power outlet
before doing any installation procedure. Failure to remove power could
result in injury to you and damage the equipment. When applicable, you
will be instructed to apply power.
2. Unplug the printer power cord from the printer or the AC power source.
3. Disconnect the data signal cable(s) from the printer interface(s).
4. Remove the ribbon and media (e.g., paper, label, or tag stock material).
Figure 4. Replacing the Printhead Assembly
CAUTION
Oils from your hands can damage the light brown area (heating
elements) of the printhead. Do not touch the light brown area when you
handle the printhead assembly.
5. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully
counterclockwise. The pivoting deck will swing upward, exposing the
bottom of the printhead assembly.
Pivoting Deck
Deck Lock
Lever
Printhead
Assembly
Printhead
Release Lever
Release Tab
Power Supply
Cable Assembly
Printhead
Controller Cable
Assembly
184
Chapter 6 Replacing the Printhead
CAUTION
To prevent electrostatic damage to electronic components, ground
yourself by touching an unpainted part of the printer frame before
handling and installing the printhead.
6. Touch an unpainted part of the printer frame before touching the
printhead.
7. Press the printhead release lever and lower the old printhead.
8. Push the release tab down on the power supply cable assembly and
remove the cable from the printhead assembly.
9. Remove the printhead controller cable assembly from the printhead
assembly.
10. Position the new printhead below the pivoting deck and connect the
printhead controller and power supply cable assemblies.
11. Lift the printhead upward into the pivoting deck.
12. Align the left printhead notch with the arrow on the left side of the pivoting
deck and snap it onto the support shaft.
13. Align the right printhead notch with the arrow on the right side of the
pivoting deck and snap it onto the support shaft.
14. Make sure that the cable assemblies do not extend past the printhead
cover and into the media or ribbon path.
15. Align the new printhead (see “Media Thickness Adjustment” on page 41
or “Printhead Alignment” on page 43).
Power Supply
Cable Assembly
Printhead
Controller Cable
Assembly
Printhead
Pivoting Deck
Printhead
Release Lever
Notch(2)
Support
Shaft
Arrow(2)
185
Restore the Printer to Operation
1. Inspect the light brown area of the printhead for smudges or fingerprints.
If necessary, gently clean the light brown area with a soft, lint-free cloth
(or a cotton swab) moistened with isopropyl alcohol.
2. Install the ribbon and media (e.g., paper, label, or tag stock material).
3. Close the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully clockwise.
(Figure 4.)
4. Close the media cover.
5. Plug the AC power cord into the printer and the power source.
6. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
7. Press to place the printer in Menu mode.
8. Press the Down + ↵ (Enter) keys at the same time until “ENTER SWITCH
UNLOCKED” displays.
9. Press the Right key until DIAGNOSTICS displays.
10. Press ↵ to enter the DIAGNOSTICS menu.
11. Press the Down key until Reset Head Data displays.
NOTE: Admin User under the PRINTER SETUP menu must be set to Enable
for Reset Head Data to appear.
12. Press ↵ to select Reset Head Data. The message “RESETTING/HEAD
DATA” displays. (This sets the Head Print Distance and Head On Time
values to zero.)
13. Test printer operation and check print quality by selecting the
DIAGNOSTICS → Printer Tests menu and printing one of the test
patterns. (Refer to page 145.)
.
.
.
186
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
If the printer stalls with an LCD message such as ‘E03E DSI CXIWX” or
“NOVRAM ERR”, reboot the printer and continue. If this situation persists,
invoke a diagnostic option that will capture the failure dump in a flash file that
can be later uploaded from PrintNet Enterprise Suite and sent to Printronix
Customer Support Center (see page 273) for further analysis.
This diagnostic option must be enabled for the printer to capture the
information. To perform this diagnostic do the following the procedure:
1. Enable the ‘Admin User’ option under PRINTER CONTROL. This will
display the ‘Auto Dump’ option.
2. Enable the ‘Auto Dump’ option under the DIAGNOSTICS menu.
3. When the failure happens, reboot the printer and wait for it to power up
again.
4. Under the PRINTER CONTROL menu, go to ‘View File List’.
5. Check the file list to see if files ‘autodmp1’ or ‘autodmp2’ are present.
If present, use PrintNet Enterprise Suite to upload these files to your host
computer.
6. Contact Printronix Customer Support Center and send them the files and
the printer’s configuration printout. Refer to the PrintNet Enterprise Suite
User’s Manual for instructions to accomplish these tasks.
Solving Other Printer Problems
187
Solving Other Printer Problems
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions
Symptom Solution/Explanation
Communications Failures. 1. Check the interface cable.
2. Check the configuration to ensure the correct interface is
enabled.
3. Verify the printer is receiving data by viewing the flashing
Online indicator on the control panel.
CONTROL PANEL
LCD message display is
illuminated and the printer
appears to be working, but
nothing is printing.
1. Verify that the active emulation set on the control panel
matches the emulation data sent to the printer.
2. Verify that the SFCC selection on the control panel
matches the SFCC utilized within the emulation data that
is sent to the printer.
3. Verify that the labels are the correct type (direct or thermal
transfer).
4. If using direct thermal media, check that the media is
loaded with the direct thermal side facing up.
5. Check that the transfer ribbon is correctly routed. Route
transfer ribbon with ink side down as it passes under the
printhead.
6. Check that the printhead assembly is properly closed by
making sure the printhead latch is fully engaged.
7. Verify that the ribbon and media are compatible;
incompatibility can cause extremely light printing. Match
the ribbon to the type of media being used.
8. Check that the Print Intensity is correct. Set the Print
Intensity in the MEDIA SETUP menu or via the host
software.
9. Check that the Label Width parameter value does not
exceed the width of the media installed. Set the Label
Width in the MEDIA SETUP menu.
10. Run the Checkerboard test print pattern from the
DIAGNOSTICS menu. Note any imbalance of the print on
the page. The printhead pressure may need adjustment.
11. Remove the printhead completely and re-install it ensuring
the cables are correctly seated.
188
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
LCD message display is
illuminated and the printer
appears to be working, but
nothing prints and “Invalid
Data” displays.
This message informs the user that the printer has received
data, but no valid commands were found. This typically occurs
when an incorrect emulation or SFCC was selected. This
message will continue to display until new data is received or
when the printer is put offline.
1. If the emulation and SFCC are correct, additional
diagnostic information can be obtained by selecting the
desired option under the “xxx Diagnostics” menu, found
under the Emulations menu.
2. Afer selecting the desired option, rerun the job to obtain
the additional diagnostic information.
ATTENTION! status indicator
is flashing.
1. When the status indicator light is flashing, check the LCD
for a specific fault message. If a fault message displays,
refer to Table 15, Fault Messages on page 196.
2. Check for an Out-of-Media condition or missing labels in
the middle of a roll. Load the correct media.
3. Check that the ribbon and label stock are correctly routed.
Load ribbon and label stock correctly.
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom Solution/Explanation
Solving Other Printer Problems
189
POWER FAILURES
Printer fails to turn on, the
display is not backlit.
1. Check that the printer AC power cord is correctly attached
to the printer and to the AC power outlet.
2. Have a qualified electrician test the AC wall outlet for the
correct power range. Locate the printer in an area that has
the correct power range.
3. Check the AC power cord. Replace a damaged AC power
cord or one that you suspect may be bad.
4. Call your authorized service representative.
PRINT QUALITY
•Label(s) did not get
printed within a multi label
print job.
•A portion of the printed
image was clipped off
and the beginning of the
next label was printed on
the same physical label.
1. If the serial interface is being used, verify that the correct
data protocol is selected to match the host interface
protocol. Print data may have been lost.
2. If Clip Page = Enable in the MEDIA SETUP menu, the
printer may have falsely detected a gap, hole, or black
mark and then clipped (discarded) the remaining printable
data for the label. To fix this:
a. Perform Auto Calibrate. See “Running Auto Calibrate”
on page 47.
b. Decrease Gap Threshold value by 2 or 3 increments.
See “Gap/Mark Thresh” on page 86.
c. Set Clip Page to Disable. Set Label Length to correct
physical length value. See “Clip Page” on page 80.
Media moves, but no image
prints in ONLINE mode.
1. Make sure the power supply cable has a good connection
to the right side of the printhead.
2. Place the printer offline and print the Checkerboard
diagnostic test pattern (see page 145). If the pattern prints,
there is a communication problem between the host
computer and the printer.
Media moves, but no image
prints in Direct Thermal
mode.
1. Media is not the type for direct thermal printing. Install
direct thermal media.
2. Direct thermal media is installed wrong side up. Reinstall
the media with the correct side facing the printhead.
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom Solution/Explanation
190
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
Media and ribbon move, but
no image prints in Thermal
Transfer mode.
1. Print the Checkerboard diagnostic test pattern and check
that the image appears on the used portion of ribbon. If the
image is on the ribbon, the ribbon may be installed with the
transfer side against the printhead, instead of against the
media.
2. The ribbon may be designed for another model printer.
3. The ribbon may not be compatible with the media.
When narrow media is
installed, the media moves
but no image prints.
Verify the Label Width value in the MEDIA SETUP menu
agrees with the width of the installed media. Too large a value
will start the image too far to the right and off the media.
Printing is faded or of poor
quality.
1. Clean the printhead.
2. Close the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully
clockwise.
3. Verify that the printhead balance adjustment dial is
properly set. See “Printhead Pressure Adjustment” on
page 41.
4. Verify that the Print Speed and Intensity values are
correct. Adjust Print Speed in the MEDIA SETUP menu or
via host software. Adjust Print Intensity in the MEDIA
SETUP menu or via host software.
5. Verify that the printhead alignment is optimized.
See “Printhead Alignment” on page 43.
Prints strange characters
instead of the correct label
format.
1. If the printer serial interface is being used, check that the
printer serial baud rate setting matches the baud rate of
the host computer. Reset the printer via software, or turn
the printer off and then on.
2. Check if the printer serial host interface is set for 8 data
bits but the transmitting device is set for 7 data bits (or
vice-versa). Check the current setting by viewing it on the
LCD, and use the INTERFACES menu to adjust the
settings, if necessary.
3. If the printer parallel interface is being used, make sure the
parallel interface terminating resistors are correct for the
host computer drivers.
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom Solution/Explanation
Solving Other Printer Problems
191
•Start of image is printed
an erroneous distance
from the top-of-form.
•The printer starts to print
one label and then
another, all within the
same physical label.
1. Make sure the Label Length value matches the actual
physical length of the label installed and run Auto-Cal
(see page 47).
These symptoms could be caused by:
•severely curled labels near the end of a media roll
•the media sensor triggering off of a dark, preprinted image
on the label
•multiple gaps within the physical label.
2. In the MEDIA SETUP menu, set Clip Page to Disable.
3. Run a Media Profile (see page 48).
4. If the Media Profile printout shows that preprinted images
or an RFID antenna tag has an amplitude approaching the
Gap/Mark Threshold level, position the media sensor to
avoid the image or increase the Threshold Range percent
value in the SENSOR SETUP menu. Run Auto-Cal again
and Media Profile to verify there is an improvement.
•Loss of one or more
serialized labels within a
print job.
•Start of image is printed
in the middle of the gap.
•The top part of the image
is lost when printing with
Head First orientation
selected.
1. In the SENSOR SETUP menu, set Gap Windowing to
Enable.
2. Set Gap Length to equal the physical gap length of the
media installed. The range is 0.05 to 1.00 inches.
The likely cause of these symptoms is that Clip Page = Enable
and a cross-perforation, radical fold or flaw in the liner has
caused the media sensor to detect this as the leading edge
(TOF) of the new label or end of label (EOF), or both.
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom Solution/Explanation
192
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
Smears or voids in printed
image.
1. Clean the printhead.
2. Make sure the printhead temperature (Print Intensity) is
not too high. Change the Print Intensity value in the
MEDIA SETUP menu. See “Print Intensity” on page 69.
3. Verify that the printhead pressure switch are positioned
correctly to match the media thickness installed.
4. Make sure the printhead balance adjustment dial is set
properly for the media width installed.
5. Make sure that the ribbon is routed correctly and not
routed through the media sensor assembly.
6. Skin oils can adhere to the surface of label stock, causing
fingerprints which inhibit thermal transfer. Wipe label stock
with a cloth, or remove a few feet of labels to expose a
clean area. Handle labels by the edges.
7. Check that the media has not been mishandled before or
during installation in the printer. Soiled media or media
with fingerprints will prevent proper ribbon transfer.
8. Check that media has not been installed inside out.
Surfaces on both sides may look identical but can produce
big differences in print quality.
9. Make sure the correct ribbon and media combination are
being used. Use the correct ribbon type.
10. Check the ribbon for creases or folds across its surface.
Smooth out the ribbon to remove any creases.
11. Reduce the Print Speed value through the MEDIA SETUP
menu or via host software.
12. If using ribbon (Transfer Print mode), do not use direct
thermal media.
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom Solution/Explanation
Solving Other Printer Problems
193
PRINTER OPERATION
Advances several labels
when Feed key is pressed.
1. Check that labels are loaded correctly. (See “Loading Roll
Media” on page 25.)
2. Check that the Label Length (in the MEDIA SETUP menu,
or sent by the host computer) agrees with the length of the
media installed. Although gaps, holes, notches, or black
marks are used to establish the Top-of-Form position, a
larger page length will override the gap and skip a page or
more if Clip Page (in the MEDIA SETUP menu) is set to
Disable. Set Page Length to match the media being used.
3. Check that the printer is optimized to detect the type of
media installed. Perform Auto Calibrate for gapped and
black mark media. (See “Running Auto Calibrate” on
page 47.)
4. Adjust the media sensor horizontally to detect gaps, holes,
notches, or narrow width black marks. (See “Positioning
the Media Sensors” on page 44.)
5. If the problem persists, run the Media Profile printout to
see if the label length indicators are being sensed.
6. Run Manual Calibrate. (See “Running Manual Calibrate”
on page 50.)
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom Solution/Explanation
194
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
Label wraps around the
platen roller.
1. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the blue deck lock lever
counterclockwise.
2. Remove the front cover thumbscrew and front cover from
the printer for better platen access.
3. Remove the wrapped label by slowly pulling and
unwrapping it from the platen.
NOTE: Even though power is removed from the platen motor,
some drag will be felt as the platen rotates.
CAUTION
Never use a sharp object against the platen as cuts and
gouges in the platen may cause voids in the printed image
and require platen replacement.
4. When all of the label is removed from the platen, use an
isopropyl alcohol wipe, Printronix PN 254945-901, to
remove all adhesive from the platen to help prevent any
future label wraps. Replace the front cover and its
thumbscrew.
5. A label wrap occurs when a die cut label is incorrectly torn
at the tear bar by the user and adhesive is exposed under
the leading edge of the next label. When the printer pulls
this next label back to TOF this adhesive contacts the
platen and when the label advances forward during
printing or a Form Feed, it wraps around the platen.
6. Avoid label wraps by having the user practice careful tear
off techniques and ensuring that the label cross
perforations are ideally positioned at the tear bar edge by
using the correct Tear Off Adjust value in the MEDIA
SETUP menu.
Print is too small or too large. Ensure the proper printhead is installed (203 or 305 dpi).
•Print quality is good, but
the printer skips every
other label.
•An occasional blank label
occurs within a print job,
but no labels are lost.
1. Make sure that the label is not formatted too close to the
top edge of the form. Leave white space equal to eight dot
rows at the top of the label. 305 dpi = .0264 inches.
203 dpi = .04 inches.
2. Check that Clip Page = Enable in the MEDIA SETUP
menu. Clip Page = Enable causes any printable data to be
clipped off and lost once the next TOF position
(transmissive gap, notch, hole, or reflective mark) is
detected. Clip Page = Disable allows the printer to ignore a
gap or mark. The printer looks for the gap or mark after the
specified Label Length is first reached.
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom Solution/Explanation
Printer Alarms
195
Printer Alarms
The printer has built-in alarms that monitor printer status and media stock
conditions. Alarm messages display indicating the present status of the
printer and media stock levels. The alarms also indicate if the printer
electronics detect an error condition.
Fault Messages
If a fault condition occurs in the printer, the FAULT indicator on the control
panel flashes on and off and the message display indicates the specific fault.
Fault messages are summarized in Table 15.
Displayed faults fall into one of two categories:
•Operator correctable
•Field service required
Operator-Correctable Fault Messages
For the operator-correctable faults, follow the suggested corrective action
under the solution section of the table. After correcting the displayed fault,
press the (Pause) key to clear the error message and status indicator and
resume printing. If the fault message reappears, power off the printer and wait
15 seconds before powering on the printer again. If the error condition
persists, contact your authorized service representative.
RIBBON
Printer cuts (melts) through
the transfer ribbon.
1. Verify that Print Intensity is set to the proper level in the
MEDIA SETUP menu.
2. Verify that Print Mode in the MEDIA SETUP menu is set
for Transfer and not Direct Thermal.
Printing stops and the FAULT
status indicator flashes.
1. Check that the media sensor is clean and undamaged.
2. Check that the gap between the bottom of a label and the
top of the next label is at least 0.100 inch. Use only labels
and tag stock approved for this printer.
3. Inspect for a jammed label. Remove the jammed label.
4. Check that the transfer ribbon and label stock are routed
correctly.
Table 14. Printer Problems and Solutions (continued)
Symptom Solution/Explanation
196
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
Fault Messages Requiring Field Service Attention
If a fault is not correctable by the operator, the fault message is followed by an
asterisk (*). This usually indicates that an authorized service representative is
needed. You should try two steps to clear the fault before calling your
authorized service representative:
1. Set the printer power switch to O (off), wait 15 seconds, then turn the
printer on again. Run your print job again. If the message does not
appear, it was a false indication and no further attention is required.
2. If the message reappears, press the (Pause) key. If the message goes
away, it was a false indication and no further attention is required. If the
message reappears, call your authorized service representative.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
24V POWER FAIL Yes +24 VDC: an internal
power failure.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
B11 ERROR:
RAM TEST FAILED
Cycle Power
Yes The printer found a
defective memory
location.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
B12 ERROR:
PROGRAM MISSING
Repeat Download
Yes The printer cannot find
the data controller
program or the
validation checksum is
corrupt.
Cycle power. If problem
persists, repeat download.
B13 ERROR:
NOT COMPATIBLE
Yes An attempt was made
to download firmware
for a different printer
type.
Cycle power. Repeat
download for correct printer
type.
B22 ERROR:
DECOMPRESS SIZE
Repeat Download
Yes Problem when
downloading.
Cycle power. If problem
persists repeat download.
B23 ERROR:
DECOMPRESS CKSUM
Repeat Download
Yes Problem when
downloading.
Cycle power. If problem
persists repeat download.
Fault Messages
197
BAD NVM CALL 1
BAD NVM CALL 2
BAD NVM CALL 3
BAD NVM CALL 4
BAD NVM CALL A
Yes Printer firmware code
error.
1. Cycle power.
2. If the problem persists,
follow the instructions on
page 186 and contact
your authorized
customer service
representative.
BAD VFU CHANNEL Yes The user tried to use an
undefined VFU
channel.
Use defined channels.
CALIBRATION FAIL
See User Manual
Yes Calibration values
derived from Manual
Calibrate were not
acceptable.
Perform a Run Manual Cal
(run manual calibrate) again.
CANNOT CALIBRATE
Disable Peel-Off
Yes Run Auto-Calibrate was
attempted with Peel-Off
Media Handling
selected.
NOTE: You can
perform Auto Calibrate
in Peel-Off mode if Cal
in Peel Mode = Enable.
Be prepared to catch
labels during Run
Auto-Calibrate.
1. Select another Media
Handling option in the
MEDIA SETUP menu.
2. Enable Cal in Peel Mode
in the SENSOR SETUP
menu.
NOTE: Admin User must
= Enable in the
PRINTER SETUP menu.
CARTRIDGE REMOVED
Check Cartridge
Yes The cartridge was
removed while the
printer was powered
on.
1. Power off the printer.
2. Install the cartridge.
3. Power on the printer.
Copy Complete
Run Auto-Cal
After Reboot
Yes The QCMC has
finished copying to the
printer.
Wait for the printer to reboot,
then Run Auto-Cal under the
Sensor Setup menu.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
198
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
CUTTER FAULT
Jam or Cut Fail
Yes 1. Cutter assembly is
not in the closed
position.
2. Cutter option was
not able to
complete a full cut
cycle due to a jam.
3. Cutter PCBA
detected current
overload and
opened circuit
breaker on cutter
PCBA.
1. Place the cutter
assembly in the closed
position.
2. Clear obstruction from
the cutter assembly.
3. Insure media thickness
is within specification.
Wait a few minutes for
the cutter circuit breaker
to automatically reset.
Press (PAUSE) to
clear the fault message
and resume printing.
DO NOT PWR OFF
Copying QCMC to
Printer
XX%
Yes The QCMC is copying
data to the printer.
Wait for the copy to complete
and the printer to reboot.
DO NOT PWR OFF
Saving Setup
To QCMC...
XX%
Yes The printer is saving to
a QCMC cartridge.
Wait for the saving to
complete and the printer to
reboot.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
BEYOND XXMB EMC
Repeat Download
No Printer contains an
XX MB EMC and the
firmware attempted to
access the EMC
beyond its limit.
NOTE: XX represents
the number of
Megabytes.
Contact your authorized
service representative.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
EXT FLASH FULL
File Too Big
Yes An attempt was made
to download to a Full
EMC.
Delete and optimize files.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
FLASH NOT ERASED
Repeat Download
Yes The printer
encountered an error
trying to program flash
memory.
Try downloading again or
contact your authorized
service representative.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
FLASH WRITE #1
Repeat Download
No A Flash Write to Main
Flash failed to
complete.
Try downloading again or
contact your authorized
service representative.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
FLASH WRITE #2
Repeat Download
No A Flash Write to Main
Flash failed to
complete.
Try downloading again or
contact your authorized
service representative.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
Fault Messages
199
DOWNLOADER ERROR
FLASH WRITE #3
Repeat Download
No A Flash Write to
Expanded Flash failed
to complete.
Try downloading again or
contact your authorized
service representative.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
FLASH WRITE #4
Repeat Download
No A Flash Write failed to
Expanded complete.
Try downloading again or
contact your authorized
service representative.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
FLASH: W ADDR BAD
Repeat Download
No An attempt was made
to write to FLASH
where no FLASH
exists.
Try downloading again or
contact your authorized
service representative.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
MAIN FLASH FULL
File Too Big
Yes An attempt was made
to download to a full
main Flash memory.
Delete and optimize files.
DOWNLOADER ERROR
NO EMC DETECTED
Repeat Download
No The printer does not
contain an EMC and
the firmware attempted
to access the EMC.
Install EMC or contact your
authorized service
representative.
E00 EXE @ ADDR0
See User Manual
Yes An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and send it to
your next higher support
facility.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
200
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
E01A TYPE 0x40
E01B TYPE 0x60
E02 MACHINE CHK
E03A DSI HASH L
E03B DSI HASH S
E03C DSI BAT PL
E03D DSI BAT PS
E03E DSI CXIWX
E03F DSI CXOWX
E03G DSI ECXIWX
E03H DSI ECXOWX
E04A ISI NO TRA
E04B ISI DIRECT
E04C ISI PROTEC
E06 NOT ALIGNED
E07 ILLEGAL INS
E08 FLOATINGPNT
See User Manual
Yes An illegal or
unsupported instruction
was attempted in the
application program.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and follow the
instructions on
page 186.
3. Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
EMC NOT FOUND
PWR OFF PRINTER
Insert Cartridge
Yes The printer does not
contain an EMC and
the firmware attempted
to access the EMC.
Install EMC or contact your
authorized service
representative.
ERROR: DC PROGRAM
NOT VALID
Yes/No The printer cannot find
the data controller
program or the
validation checksum is
corrupt.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
ERROR: FLASH
DID NOT PROGRAM
Yes/No The printer
encountered an error
trying to program flash
memory.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
Fault Messages
201
ERROR: INSUFFICIENT
DRAM
Cycle Power
Yes/No Not enough RAM
memory available for a
printer function.
1. Power off the printer for
15 seconds, then power
back on again.
2. If the message
reappears, delete files
from FFS as they are
copied into RAM.
3. Select the menu option,
Optimize & Reboot.
4. If the message
reappears, replace the
controller PCBA. Write
down the message and
return it with the
defective board.
ERROR: INSUFFICIENT
FLASH
Cycle Power
Yes The printer requires
more flash memory to
run the downloaded
program.
1. Power off the printer for
15 seconds, then power
back on. If the problem
persists, contact your
authorized customer
service representative.
2. Consider installing an
optional Expanded
Memory Cartridge
(EMC) that adds 32 MB
of Flash memory to the
printer.
ERROR OCCURRED:
CLEARING QUEUES
Please Wait
Yes An interim message
displays while the
printer discards host
data it cannot use
because a fault
condition exists. While
this message displays,
the asterisk (*) rotates.
Wait. When the asterisk (*)
stops rotating, a different
fault message will appear;
troubleshoot the final
message.
ERROR: PROGRAM
NEEDS MORE DRAM
Yes/No The program exceeds
the memory limitations
of the printer.
Download a smaller
program.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
202
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT COMPATIBLE
Yes The printer is not
compatible with the
downloaded program.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
ERROR: PROGRAM
NOT VALID
Yes The printer does not
see a program in flash
memory.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
ERROR: SHORT AT
ADDRESS XXXX
Yes/No Hardware failure in
DRAM or Main PCBA
controller circuitry.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
ERROR: WRITING
TO FLASH
Yes/No Hardware or software
fault in flash memory.
Set the Overwrite Files menu
option to Enable.
ERROR: WRONG
CHECKSUM
Repeat Download
Yes The printer received the
complete program but
the checksum did not
match. The data may
have been corrupted
during download.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative, or repeat
download.
FILE EXISTS
Enable Overwrite
Yes The printer operator
tried to save a file using
the name of an existing
stored file.
Set the Overwrite Files menu
option to Enable.
FILE SYS FULL
Delete Files
Yes Insufficient flash
memory available to
store file.
1. Delete any files that are
not used or are no
longer needed, by using
the Delete Files menu
option.
2. Select the menu option
Optimize & Reboot.
3. Check the Flash Avail
menu option to
determine if there is
enough flash to store the
file.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
Fault Messages
203
FILE SYS FULL
File Too Big
Yes/No Insufficient flash
memory available to
store file.
Delete unncessary files and
select the Optimze&Reboot
menu option. Check the
Flash Avail menu option to
determine if there is enough
flash to store the file you
wish to save. Files too large
for onboard flash may be
saved on the (optional)
Extended Memory Cartridge
(EMC).
FILE SYS FULL
Optimize & Reboot
Yes Insufficient flash
memory available to
store file.
Enter the PRINTER SETUP
menu and use the Optimize
& Reboot feature.
FILE SYS FULL
Delete Files
Yes Insufficient flash
memory available to
store the file.
Delete unnecessary files and
select the Optimize &
Reboot menu option. Check
the Flash Avail menu option
to determine if there is
enough flash.
FILE SYS WRITE
Check Flash
Yes/No Problem writing to flash
memory.
Power off the printer for 15
seconds, then power back
on. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
EXT FILESYS FULL
File Too Big
Yes/No Insufficient flash
memory on the
Extended Memory
Cartridge (EMC) is
available to store file.
Delete unnecessary files
from the Extended Memory
Cartridge (EMC) and select
the Optimize & Reboot menu
option.
EXT FILESYS FULL
Optimize & Reboot
Yes Insufficient flash
memory on the
Extended Memory
Cartridge (EMC) is
available to store file.
Enter the PRINTER SETUP
menu and use the Optimize
& Reboot feature.
EXT FILESYS FULL
Delete Files
Yes/No Insufficient flash
memory on the
Extended Memory
Cartridge (EMC) is
available to store file.
Delete unnecessary files
from the Extended Memory
Cartridge (EMC) and select
the Optimize & Reboot menu
option.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
204
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
GAP NOT DETECTED
Check Sensor and
Calibrate
Yes The printer is set for
Gap or Mark sensing,
but no gap or mark was
detected.
1. Check that the setting of
the Gap/Mark Sensor in
the SENSOR SETUP
menu matches the
installed media.
2. Check the position of the
media sensors. (See
“Positioning the Media
Sensors” on page 44.)
3. Clean the sensor
assembly and paper
path.
4. Run Auto-Cal to improve
the sensor’s ability to
detect the media in use.
5. Run the Media Profile
printout in the SENSOR
SETUP menu.
6. Run Manual Calibrate.
(See “Running Manual
Calibrate” on page 50.)
7. Manually change the
Gap/Mark Thresh and/or
Paper Out Thresh
values.
H00: PCI SLOT?
See User Manual
No The controller board is
not communicating with
a PCI card. This could
indicate a bad PCI card,
poor connection, or
problem in the PCI bus.
Contact your authorized
service representative.
H01: PCI J24 No The controller board is
not communicating with
the network card. This
could indicate a bad
network card, poor
connection, or problem
in the PCI bus.
Contact your authorized
service representative.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
Fault Messages
205
Half Speed Mode Yes The printhead is
approaching a hot
state. Half Speed Mode
helps the cooling
process and should
permit completion of
print jobs.
Half Speed Mode helps
prevent a PRINT HEAD
HOT fault, which will
stop the printer.
1. Allow printer to continue
printing. Full speed will
resume automatically
when a lower printhead
temperature is achieved.
2. Let the printer cool
down. Full speed will be
restored when printing is
resumed.
3. Lower Print Intensity and
Print Speed to reduce
frequency of Half Speed
Mode.
ILL NVM VALUE 5
ILL NVM VALUE 6
ILL NVM VALUE 7
Yes Printer firmware code
error.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and follow the
instructions on page 186
3. Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
INVALID EMC
Power off Printer
Remove Cartridge
Yes The QCMC is not
compatible with the
software in the printer.
Upgrade printer software.
INVALID FILE SYS
Optimize&Reboot
Yes File system not
detected or flash was
corrupted.
Enter the PRINTER SETUP
menu and use the Optimize
& Reboot option.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
206
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
LABEL MISSING
Check Media Path
Yes The Label Taken
Sensor did not detect
the label present over
the tear bar with
Peel-Off Media
Handling mode
enabled.
•The label was
removed before the
printer stopped
printing or before
the LCD “Remove
Label” message
displayed.
•The label slipped
behind the platen
roller.
•The label wrapped
around the platen
roller.
•Peel-Off Media
Handling mode was
mistakenly
selected.
1. Press the Pause key to
continue printing and
then wait for the LCD
“Remove Label”
message before
removing the label.
2. Open the pivoting deck,
reinstall the label, close
the printhead, press the
Pause key, and continue
printing.
3. Open the pivoting deck
and remove wrapped
labels from the platen.
Clean all adhesive from
the platen. Reinstall
labels, close the deck,
press the Pause key,
and continue printing.
4. Select the correct Media
Handling mode in the
MEDIA SETUP menu.
LABEL READY
Remove Label
Yes •A label was
detected at the
front of the printer
by the Label Taken
Sensor. This is the
normal reminder
message when
Peel-Off Media
Handling has been
selected.
•A label was
removed, but the
“Remove Label”
message remained.
•The incorrect
Media Handling
mode was
selected.
1. Remove the label from
the front of the printer to
allow the next label to
print.
2. Verify that a front door
assembly is installed on
the printer and that it is
properly closed. Ensure
that no debris is
obstructing the door
mirror or the Label
Taken Sensor.
3. In the MEDIA SETUP
menu, change Media
Handling to the correct
selection.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
Fault Messages
207
LOADING PROGRAM
FROM PORT XX%
Yes The new emulation
program is loading into
printer RAM. XX%
indicates how much of
the program has
loaded.
No action required.
LOADING PROGRAM
INTO FLASH
Yes A program is getting
loaded into flash.
No action required.
MEMORY REMOVED
Check EMC
Yes The EMC was removed
while the printer was
powered on.
1. Power off the printer.
2. Install the EMC.
3. Power on the printer.
MEDIA OUT
Load Media
Yes The printer does not
sense media:
•Media was not
installed or has run
out.
•A break in media
has occurred.
•Media was not
routed or installed
correctly.
•The media sensor
is not positioned
correctly.
•Media is installed
correctly, but the
sensor is not
detecting it.
•Gap/Mark Thresh
value may be set
too high and/or
Paper Out Thresh
may be set too low.
1. Install media. If a break
occurred, reinstall the
media. Press the Pause
key to clear the fault
message. Check the
media installation
procedures on page 25.
2. Verify the media sensor
is properly positioned.
Run Auto-Cal to improve
the ability of the sensor
to detect the installed
media.
3. Check if the Gap/Mark
Thresh is too high or the
Paper Out Thresh is too
low. Lower the Gap/
Mark Thresh or raise the
Paper Out Thresh value.
4. If using media with no
gaps or black marks,
perform Run Auto-Cal to
establish a valid Paper
Out Thresh.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
208
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
MODE NOT COMPATIBLE
WITH CUTTER
Check Media Mode
Yes Peel-Off Media
Handling selection was
attempted with the
cutter option still
installed. This mode
requires that the front
door assembly be
installed to use the
Label Taken Sensor.
Select a different Media
Handling Mode.
MISSING PRINT
HEAD See Manual
Yes The printer does not
detect installation of the
printhead.
1. Install the printhead.
2. Install or reset the
printhead signal cable
and printer cable.
NOT ENOUGH
SPACE ON EMC
Delete EMC File
And Optimize
Yes There was not enough
room on the expanded
memory cartridge
(EMC) to save the
QCMC.
1. Cycle power, skip the
QCMC configuration
using the Cancel key.
2. Delete some files from
the EMC.
NOVRAM ERROR B Yes Printer firmware code
error.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and follow the
instructions on
page 186.
3. Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
Fault Messages
209
NVM HDW FAIL 8 Yes Printer firmware code
error.
1. Cycle Power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears, load
the latest emulation
software.
2. Cycle power. Run the
print job again. If the
message appears,
record the display
message and follow the
instructions on
page 186.
3. Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
OPTION
NOT INSTALLED
Yes 1. Selection of
Peel-Off, Cut, or
Rewind Media
Handling was
attempted when the
option was not
properly installed.
2. The printer is
powered on with
the cutter not
connected
correctly.
1. Check that the correct
selection was attempted
and that the option is
installed.
2. Check that the
appropriate option is
installed and connected
correctly before
powering on the printer.
3. If the error persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
PGL ERROR Yes Appears when the
"Fault" option is
selected from Error
Report in the front
panel.
Deselect "Fault" from Error
Report on the front control
panel.
PRINT HEAD UP
Close Print Head
Yes Printhead is not closed. Close the printhead pivoting
deck.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
210
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
PRINTHEAD HOT
Wait 5 Minutes
Go Online
Yes/No The printhead has
become overheated.
1. Allow the printhead to
cool down for 5 minutes,
then press Pause.
Resume printing.
2. If possible, reduce print
intensity.
3. If problem persists,
contact your authorized
service representative.
PRINTER HARDWARE
NOT COMPATIBLE
Power Off Printer
Remove Cartridge
Yes The printer used to
configure the QCMC
has different hardware
options than the printer
to be configured.
Change the hardware
configuration of the new
printer to match the original
printer.
PRINTER UNDER
REMOTE CONTROL
Yes Indicates that PNE
software has control of
the printer.
Press any key on the printer.
PROGRAM IS NOT
COMPATIBLE WITH THIS
PRINTER
Repeat Download
No An attempt was made
to download a
non-compatible
program file.
Try downloading again. If
problem persists, contact
your authorized service
representative.
QCMC DATA ERROR
ON EMC
Delete & Resave
QCMC Data
Yes The data on the QCMC
is corrupted.
Delete the existing QCMC
and recopy from the original
printer.
QCMC DETECTED
Copy to Printer?
Yes...Press <ENTER>
No...Press <CANCEL>
Yes The printer detected a
QCMC with a saved
configuration.
To configure the printer with
the QCMC, press the Enter
key, otherwise press the
Cancel key.
QCMC DETECTED
Save to QCMC?
Yes...Press <ENTER>
No...Press <CANCEL>
Yes The printer detected a
QCMC cartridge
without a saved image.
If the printer is completely
configured with the desired
state, press the Enter key. If
you do not wish to save at
this time, press Cancel.
REWINDER FULL
Remove Roll
Yes The Rewinder Full
Sensor has detected a
roll full condition.
Remove the roll from the
rewind spindle.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
Fault Messages
211
RFID CNTRY BAD:
Set Country Freq
No The RFID country
frequency has not been
set.
Set RFID country through
RFID menus. If problem
persists contact your
authorized customer service
representative.
RFID Comm Err
Check Cable
Yes RFID error:
communication cannot
be established with the
RFID encoder.
Disable the RFID reader or
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
RFID FW ERR
Version Mismatch
Yes The printer firmware
version does not match
the installed RFID
encoder.
Complete the downloading
software procedure. See
“Downloading Software” on
page 157.
RFID KIL FIELD:
Not Supported!
No The KIL field was
accessed on a tag
which does not support
the KIL field.
Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
RFID LOCK CMD:
Not Supported!
No A lock command was
executed on a tag
which does not support
locking. Most Gen 2
tags support locking but
some do not.
Contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
RFID TAG FAILURE
Check Media
Yes Failed tag. Error
displays in STOP
mode, causing the
printer to halt.
Initiate reprint of the label
from the host. When the
error is cleared, the label
with the failed tag moves
forward to the next TOF
position.
RFID TAG MAX
RETRY
Check Media
Yes Failed tag. Error
displays in
OVERSTRIKE mode.
Each failed label prints
with the OVERSTRIKE
pattern; the form retries
until the label retry
count is exhausted.
Clear the error. When the
error is cleared, the label
with the failed tag moves
forward such that the next
label is in position.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
212
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
Ribbon Low Yes 1. The supply spool is
getting low.
2. If there is a large
amount of ribbon
still on the supply
spool, then the
Ribbon Low
message is being
displayed falsely.
1. Replace ribbon.
2. Disable Ribbon Low in
the MEDIA SETUP
menu.
RIBBON OUT
Load Ribbon
Yes 1. The ribbon supply
spool is empty.
2. The ribbon has
broken.
1. Replace the ribbon.
2. Reinstall the ribbon.
SECURITY CODE
VIOLATION
Yes The software being
used is not correct for
the printer.
1. Load the correct
software.
2. Power off the printer for
15 seconds, then power
back on again. If the
problem persists,
contact your authorized
customer service
representative.
SERIAL BUFFER
OVERFLOW
Yes Host sent data after the
printer buffer was full
(Serial Interface).
1. Make a configuration
printout.
2. Verify that the printer
matches the host serial
interface configuration
settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate,
Data Bits, Stop Bits,
Parity, Data Terminal
Ready, and Request to
Send.
3. Set printer serial
interface parameters to
match those of the host.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
Fault Messages
213
SERIAL BUFFER
OVERRUN
Yes Receive overrun (Serial
Interface).
1. Make a configuration
printout.
2. Verify that the printer
matches the host serial
interface configuration
settings for Data
Protocol, Baud Rate,
Data Bits, Stop Bits,
Parity, Data Terminal
Ready, and Request to
Send.
3. Set the printer serial
interface parameter to
match those of the host.
SERIAL FRAMING
ERROR
Yes Serial framing error
over a serial interface.
Match the serial interface
settings of the printer to
those of the host computer.
SERIAL PARITY ERROR Yes Parity error (serial
interface).
Check your serial host
interface parameter settings.
If necessary, change them
so they match the settings of
the attached host.
SOFTWARE ERROR
Cycle Power
Yes/No 1. Application
software tried to
perform an illegal
power function.
2. There are damaged
logic circuits on the
controller PCBA.
1. Recycle the printer
power. If possible, print a
job that has previously
worked.
2. If the problem persists,
contact your authorized
service representative.
WAITING FOR
PROGRAM DOWNLOAD
Yes Normal message when
the printer is powered
up while holding down
both the ↵ (Enter) and
(Cancel) keys in
preparation to
download software to
the printer.
1. Complete the
downloading software
procedure. See
“Downloading Software”
on page 157.
2. Exit this procedure by
cycling printer power.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
214
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
WIRELESS ADAPTER
NOT COMPATIBLE
Yes The type of wireless
card is incompatible
with the printer
software.
The PCMCIA radio card that
you installed may be
incompatible with the dual
NIC interface in the printer.
Verify the approved brand
and model number of the
radio card with your printer
service provider and install
the correct version. If using
the correct radio card does
not resolve this problem, call
your service provider for
further support.
Table 15. Fault Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
Status Messages
215
Status Messages
Table 16. Status Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
203 DPI Head
Installed
N/A Normal power-up
message. The printer is
running its initialization
routine and indicating
DPI resolution of the
installed printhead.
No action required.
305 DPI Head
Installed
N/A Normal power-up
message. The printer is
running its initialization
routine and indicating
DPI resolution of the
installed printhead.
No action required.
B20:FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD N/A Forced download mode
only.
No action is required.
B21STATUS: PRINTER
RESET
N/A The printer is
automatically reseting
after a download.
No action is required.
CLEARING PROGRAM
FROM FLASH
N/A Emulation software
successfully loaded into
printer RAM and the
checksum matched.
The old program is now
being deleted from
flash memory.
No action required.
D50 STATUS:
CLEARING FLASH
Please Wait
N/A Emulation software
successfully loaded into
printer RAM and the
checksum matched.
The old program is now
being deleted from
flash memory. Forced
download mode only.
No action required.
D51: PROGRAMMING FLASH
LOADING PROGRAM
INTO FLASH
Please Wait
N/A A program is getting
loaded into flash.
No action is required.
216
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
DO NOT POWER OFF N/A This is a standard
warning message that
displays while the
printer is downloading
software.
Do not power off the
printer until
downloading is
complete.
ETHERNET
INITIALIZING
Please Wait
N/A Ethernet is initializing. No action is required.
ETHERNET READY N/A Ethernet Interface has
finished initializing.
No action is required.
ETHERNET
RESETTING
Please Wait
N/A Ethernet Interface is
being reset.
No action is required.
LOADING PROGRAM
INTO FLASH
Please Wait
N/A Expanded Flash
Cartridge download
mode only.
No action is required.
POWER SAVER MODE N/A This is a status
message. The printer is
in low-energy idle state,
the higher voltages are
off, the front panel is
dimmed, and only
+5Vdc logic circuits are
active.
No action required.
Sending a print job or
pressing any control
panel key turns off
power saver mode.
PRINTER RESETTING
Please Wait
N/A Printer finished loading
the program into flash
memory and is
automatically resetting
itself.
No action is required.
RESTORING
BOOT CODE
Yes Normal download
initialization message.
No action required.
SDRAM TEST 32MB N/A Status only not an error. No action is required.
STATUS:
LOADING FIRMWARE
Please Wait
N/A Normal message when
the printer is powered
up while holding down
both the (Menu) and
the Down keys in
preparation to
download software to
the printer.
Complete the
downloading
software procedure.
Table 16. Status Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
Status Messages
217
TESTING HARDWARE
PLEASE WAIT
Yes Normal power-up
message. Printer is
running its initialization
routine.
No action required.
THE ↵ KEY IS
LOCKED
Yes A momentary status
message that appears
when an attempt is
made to change a
menu option or perform
a diagnostic print test.
By default, the
↵ (Enter) key is locked
when the printer
powers on.
1. Unlock the Enter
key by pressing
DOWN + ↵ at the
same time. (This
is the factory
default key
combination.)
2. A different unlock
key combination
will be in affect if
the Set Lock Key
option in the
Printer Setup
menu was used.
THE ↵ KEY IS
UNLOCKED
Yes A momentary status
message that appears
when the ↵ (Enter) key
is unlocked, permitting
configuration
parameters to be
changed.
1. No action is
necessary if you
want the ↵ key
unlocked.
2. Press the DOWN
+ ↵ keyat the
same time if you
want to lock the
↵ key.
To Stop Press ↵N/A Normal message when
a test print pattern that
will run continuously is
printing.
Press the ↵ (Enter)
key to stop printing
the test pattern.
Table 16. Status Messages
Displayed Message Can User
Correct? Explanation Solution
218
Chapter 6 Diagnostics for E0xx, Bad NVM, or ILL NVM Errors
219
ASpecifications
Print Method
SL4M/T4M
Print Resolution (dpi) 203 305
Method Direct or Thermal
Transfer
Direct or Thermal
Transfer
Max. Print Speed (ips) 10 10
Max. Slew Speed (ips) 10 10
Max. Print Width (in.) 4.1 (104.1 mm) 4.1 (104.1 mm)
Flash Memory (MB) Standard 8 8
Flash Memory (MB) Maximum with Expanded Memory
Cartridge (EMC) option
40 40
DRAM (MB) Standard/Max (fixed) 32 32
Max. Print Length (in.) at max. width, std. MB DRAM 99 (2515 mm) 99 (2515 mm)
220
Appendix A
Media
Table 17. Media - General Information
Type Roll-fed, die-cut continuous or fanfold labels, tags or tickets;
most direct thermal or thermal transfer materials.
Supply Roll 8.0 inch (203.2 mm) maximum outside diameter on a
3 inch (76.2 mm) diameter core.
Rewinder Accepts a full roll of backing from an 8 inch diameter roll of
labels.
Label Material Thermal transfer plain-coated papers, vinyl, Mylar, metallized
paper, non-woven fabric, fine woven fabric, thermal-visible light
scannable paper, infrared scannable paper, thermal ticket/tag
stock, thermally-sensitive plastic stock.
Media Sensing Horizontally moveable sensor assembly. When set to Gap, the
assembly detects die-cut labels on liner media and notches and
holes in tag stock. When set to Mark, it senses a black mark on
the underside of tag or label stock. When set to Disable, it
senses no label indicators or ignores all existing label length
indicators on the installed media. Also detects paper out.
Label Taken Sensor Detects when a printed label is at the printer exit throat. Used
only for Peel-Off Media Handling mode.
Label Peel-Off Peels and presents label to the operator, one at a time.
Label Peel-Off is supported only when using the Standard Peel
option or Peel-Liner Rewinder option.
Standard Peel Peels labels while discarding the dispensed liner in front of the
printer. Optional installation.
Media
221
Figure 5. Media Dimensions
I. Tag Specification
(Mark Sensing)
II. Tag Specification
(Gap Sensing)
III. Label Specification
(Gap Sensing)
Direction of Media Motion
Black Mark (on underside)
Direction of Media Motion
Direction of Media Motion
Recommended
Cross Perf
Location
Recommended
Cross Perf
Location
G
Table 18. Media Specifications
SL4M/T4M
ALabel Width Range 0.87 to 5.0 inches
22 to 128 mm
BLiner Width Range 1.0 to 5.15 inches
25 to 131 mm
CMin. Gap/Hole/Notch Height 0.10 in.
2.54 mm
DMedia Length Range
Tear-Off Strip Mode 0.25 in. (6 mm) to 99 in. (2515 mm)
Peel-Off Mode 1 in. (25.4 mm) to 39 in. (991 mm)
Cut Mode 1 in. (25.4 mm) to 99 in. (2515 mm)
Rewind Mode 0.5 in. (13 mm) to 99 in. (2515 mm)
Continuous Mode 0.25 in. (6 mm) to 99 in. (2515 mm)
EMedia Thickness Range 0.0023 to 0.010 in.
0.06 to 0.254 mm
GWidth of Inter-label notch/hole 0.25* to 0.50 in.
6.35 to 12.7 mm
IMin Refl. Mark Width 0.5 in.
12.7 mm
KMin. Refl. Mark Height 0.10 in.
2.54 mm
These figures are approximate and depend upon the active emulation and application.
* You may need to select Mark sensing instead of Gap sensing for notch widths .25 in. or less due to
limited inside travel of the Gap sensor.
222
Appendix A
Media Thickness
The printer supports media thickness ranging from .002 to 0.010 inches
(0.051 to 0.254 mm).
Media Capacity
Ribbon
Indicators and Switches
Media Type Roll Supply 8.0 inches (maximum outside diameter) on 3 inch inside
diameter core
203 mm on 76.2 mm core
Fanfold Supply 7.87 inches (200 mm) maximum height at rear entrance.
Ribbon length 1476 feet (450 m)
Ribbon description Coated side in (ink on the inside of the
ribbon) and coated side out (ink on the
outside of the ribbon).
Ribbon core Internal diameter, 1.0 inch (25.4 mm)
Maximum outer diameter 3.3 inches (83.8 mm)
Maximum ribbon width 5.0 inches (127 mm)
Minimum ribbon width 1.55 inches (39.4 mm)
Ribbon width for optimum
performance
0.59 inches (15mm) wider than the media
Table 19. Indicators and Switches
Indicator Lights: Online, Fault
Switches: Power
Keys: Pause, Feed, ↑ (Up), ↓ (Down), ← (Left), → (Right),
↵ (Enter), (Menu), (Cancel),
Message Display: One row of text and two rows of menu icons or
4 rows of 16 characters per row for error messages,
print status, and recalling stored formats. Eight rows
of 21 characters per row for changing menu
settings.
.
.
.
Memory
223
Memory
Optional Expanded Memory Cartridge
CAUTION
You must power off the printer before you install or remove the EMC, or
you may damage the EMC and the printer. If you remove the EMC after
powering on the printer with the EMC installed, the fault message
"MEMORY REMOVED Check EMC" will display. You cannot clear this
message by reinserting the EMC. You must cycle power.
The expanded memory cartridge (EMC) is a user installable 32MB memory
storage cartridge that provides additional flash memory for downloading
forms, logos, and fonts. The EMC can be ordered as a factory option kit or as
a field upgrade kit that allows users to increase the printer flash memory
capacity. Refer to page 238 to 240 for installation instructions. The EMC can
also come as a preloaded factory kit with one of three Asian TrueType fonts
(see “DBCS Character Sets and Fonts” on page 229), one of four Andalé
TrueType fonts, or the QCMC option.
Media Cutter Option
The media cutter is designed to cut tags and label liner. Avoid cutting through
the adhesive backed portion of any media.
Flash Memory (standard) 8MB fixed on Controller PCBA
DRAM (standard) 32MB fixed on Controller PCBA
Typical Life More than 1,000,000 cuts
Warranty 500,000 cuts
Environment Same specifications as printer
Cutting Method Single-edged blade, up/down slice motion
Media Thickness Range 0.0025 to 0.010 in. (0.064 to 0.254 mm)
Media Width Range 1.00 to 5.15 inches (25.4 to 130.8 mm)
Media Length Range 1.00 to 99 in. (25.4 to 2515 mm)
224
Appendix A
Host Interfaces
Power
1. Serial RS-232 at 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or 115200 baud.
2. Parallel (Centronics compatible) or IEEE 1284 bi-directional.
3. USB 2.0 Universal Serial Bus
The RS-232 host interface shall have the following characteristics:
Character Set: ANSI® ASCII character set
Word Length: Selectable 7-bit or 8-bit data format
Handshaking: XON/XOFF (in receive mode only)
CTS/DTR. Clear To Send (CTS)/Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
ETX/ACK. End of Text (ETX)/Acknowledge (ACK)
ACK/NAK. Acknowledge (ACK)/Negative acknowledge (NAK)
Series 1 Char
Series 2 Char
Input Buffer: Selectable from 1 through 16 kbytes. XOFF is transmitted and DTR
goes low when buffer is equal to or less than 25% of full. XON is
transmitted and DTR goes high when buffer is 25% above empty.
Characters are transmitted with no parity from the printer
Table 20. Power Source and Grounding
Power Source 230 VAC 50 Hz auto-ranging power supply.
Grounding Unit must be connected to a properly
grounded receptacle.
Table 21. Power Consumption
Operating Mode Watts
Power Saver 15.6 Watts
Idle 24 Watts
Maximum 156 Watts (@ 30% print density)
Environmental
225
Environmental
Physical
Acoustic Noise
Under typical operating conditions the noise level generated will not exceed
66 dBa regardless of printhead resolution, media, ribbon, or print speed. This
is in accordance with ISO 7779 and declared in accordance with ISO 9296.
Operating Temperature: 40° F to 104° F (5° C to 40° C)
Storage Temperature: 23° F to 140° F (-5° C to 60° C)
Operating Humidity:
Storage Humidity:
10% to 90%, non-condensing
5% to 90% non-condensing
Ventilation: Free air movement
Dust: Non-conducting, non-corrosive
NOTE: These conditions do not apply to media or ribbon storage.
Dimensions (Inches) Weight
SL4M/T4M, unpacked
excluding options
12.13H x 11.0W x 18.75D 31.8 lbs. (14.5kg)
Standard Peel with Liner
Rewinder
18.62H x 11.0W x 18.75D 50.0 lbs. (22.7kg)
Full Media Rewinder 18.62H x 11.0W x 21.50 D 50.0 lbs. (22.7kg)
Standard Peel without Liner
Rewinder
12.13H x 11.0W x 18.75D 33.0 lbs. (15kg)
Cutter 12.13H x 11.0W x 18.75D 33.8 lbs. (15.4kg)
226
Appendix A
227
BPrinter Options
Options are offered with the printer to enhance its capabilities and to provide a
large degree of application flexibility. A description of the option complement
is given below. Field installable options include installation instructions.
Hardware Options
Media Cutter
The printer may be ordered with a cutter mechanism installed (for cutting tags
and label liner), or the option can be field installed by the user at a later date.
Once installed, the printer can be configured to automatically cut media after
each label or after a specified number of labels is printed.
NOTE: The Cutter option is not supported when the Full Media Rewinder or
either Standard Peel option is installed.
Full Media Rewinder
In batch rewind mode, rewinds printed labels into a removable roll or a 3 inch
diameter media take-up core. The printer may be ordered with this option
installed or it can be field installed at a later date by an authorized service
representative.
Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder
In label peel-off mode, peels off labels one at a time before printing the next
label and rewinds the liner into a discardable roll. The printer may be ordered
with this option installed or it can be field installed by an authorized service
representative at a later date.
Standard Peel
This option provides the ability to peel labels while discarding the dispensed
liner in front of the printer. This option may be field installed by the user at a
later date.
228
Appendix B Hardware Options
Expanded Memory Cartridge (EMC)
The expanded memory cartridge (EMC) is a user installable option. See
page 238 for installation instructions. The EMC can be ordered in any of these
configurations as a factory option kit or as a field upgrade kit:
•Expanded Memory - 32MB Expanded Memory Cartridge that provides
additional Flash memory for forms, logos, and fonts (see “Optional
Expanded Memory Cartridge” on page 223).
•Asian TrueType® Fonts - Separate cartridges containing fonts for
Simplified Chinese, Korean, or Japanese allows PGL or ZGL to print
complex Double Byte Character Set (DBCS) characters (see “DBCS
Character Sets and Fonts” on page 229).
•Andalé TrueType® Fonts - Separate cartridges containing Andalé
TrueType® fonts allowing PGL or ZGL to print characters for virtually
every language used in the world today, including simplified and
traditional Chinese, Japanese, and Korean. (see “Andalé Fonts” on
page 229).
•Quick Change Memory Cartridge (QCMC) - This cartridge option
provides an easy way to copy a printer’s firmware and configuration
settings from one printer to another. A “snapshot image” of the source
printer is stored onto the QCMC and a simple interface is provided to
copy that image to a target printer. Once the image has been copied to
the target printer, the two printers will be identically configured. The
QCMC has its own resident network MAC address that will be used in
place of the printer’s LAN/WLAN MAC address when the cartridge is left
installed in a printer (see “Quick Change Memory Cartridge (QCMC)” on
page 230).
Real Time Clock
A clock chip with internal battery that keeps track of the year, month, day,
hour, minute, and second values. It continues to operate when the printer is
off. The printer may be ordered with this option installed or it can be field
installed at a later date by an authorized service representative.
RFID
The RFID encoder programs smart labels (tags with embedded inlays). The
printer may be ordered with an RFID encoder installed (making it an SL4M
printer) or it can be field installed by an authorized service representative.
229
Interface Options
Network Interface Card (NIC)
This option permits placing the printer on a LAN rather than attaching it
directly to a host system. The printer may be ordered with the NIC included in
the shipping carton or it can be field installed at a later date. Two NICs (both
are user installable at the rear panel of the printer) are available :
•Ethernet 10/100Base-T. The Ethernet 10/100Base-T NIC supports data
transfer rates of 100 Mbps.
•Wireless 802.11b/g. The wireless NIC provides wireless 802.11b/g
connectivity without expensive cabling and reconfigurations required from
a wired network. The PrintNet Enterprise Suite (PNE) remote
management software is standard with the wireless NIC.
The printer can support only one NIC option at a time. NIC installation
instructions are available as part of the option kit as well as in the
Maintenance Manual.
Software Options
CAUTION
You must power off the printer before you install or remove the EMC, or
you may damage the EMC and the printer. If you remove the EMC after
powering on the printer with the EMC installed, the fault message
"MEMORY REMOVED Check EMC" will display. You cannot clear this
message by reinserting the EMC. You must cycle power.
DBCS Character Sets and Fonts
Optional Asian Double Byte Character Set (DBCS) language cartridges can
be ordered. Each cartridge contains one Asian DBCS character set and font,
supporting Simplified Chinese, Korean, or Japanese, as well as user
addressable memory area to expand the printer flash memory capacity.
Andal
é
Fonts
The optional Andalé font is a TrueType® scalable font containing characters
for virtually all languages used in the world today, such as Chinese,
Japanese, and Korean. Four different versions of the font are available for
purchase. Each of the four versions contains all of the same characters. The
files differ in that a few of the characters are customized for certain regions of
the world. Use UTF-8 encoded Unicode (recommended) or the 256 character
multinational character sets to address the font in PGL and ZGL. With the
ZGL emulation, it is also possible to use the Andalé font with downloaded
character sets. Only one version of the Andalé font will be present on the
EMC cartridge. For the font to be used, the EMC cartridge must be installed at
power-up. The font will be listed on the configuration printout under Features
Enabled (only one font will be present).
230
Appendix B Software Options
Korean Andale, Ver 1.00A
Traditional Chinese Andale, Ver 1.00A
Simplified Chinese Andale, Ver 1.00A
Japanese Andale, Ver 1.00A
The font name and size will be listed on the configuration printout of the file
system, under the EMC FFS file list.
Quick Change Memory Cartridge (QCMC)
The QCMC provides the ability to duplicate an entire printer’s firmware, saved
configurations, and custom files quickly through the printer’s control panel
with a user friendly interface. No external host or files are needed to transfer
this information to the QCMC. A “snapshot image” is saved of the printer’s
firmware, configuration settings, and custom files. The saved image can be
copied to any number of printers using the same QCMC so that the printers
will be identically configured (assumes same printer hardware and options are
present).
The QCMC has its own resident network MAC address that will be used in
place of the printer’s LAN/WLAN MAC address when the cartridge is left
installed in a printer. This allows a mission critical printer to be exchanged
quickly with a spare printer that will be identically configured, including the
network MAC address.
The following are examples of how the QCMC may make printer management
more convenient:
•A site has 10 printers to install that should all be configured identically.
Rather than inputting the information through the control panel
individually to each printer, insert the QCMC into the first printer, capture
the changes, then easily share the image with the other nine printers.
•A site is adding additional printers and wants them configured the same
as the printers already installed, but is unsure what changes were
originally made. By using the QCMC to capture the exact image of the
older printers, no custom settings will be missed.
•A printer is set up on a network that is configured to only allow recognized
MAC addresses to access the network. If the printer with the QCMC
installed needs repair and must be removed from the network, the MAC
that resides on the QCMC can be easily transferred to the replacement
printer, along with all the configuration information and any other files
stored as the “snapshot image” on the QCMC, making the replacement
printer an exact duplicate for the downed printer. By using the MAC
address that resides on the QCMC, the replacement printer can be
installed without notifying the network administrator, thereby simplifying
the exchange.
231
Installing the QCMC
CAUTION
You must power off the printer before you install or remove the QCMC,
or you may damage the QCMC and the printer. If you remove the QCMC
after powering on the printer with the QCMC installed, the fault message
“MEMORY REMOVED Check QCMC” will display. You cannot clear this
message by reinserting the QCMC. You must cycle power.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off) from the front of the printer.
2. Raise the media cover.
Figure 6. Powering Off the Printer
Media
Cover
Power
Switch
A
See page 232.
232
Appendix B Installing the QCMC
Figure 7. Installing the QCMC
3. Press the release tab and remove the QCMC slot cover.
4. Plug the QCMC (with the arrow positioned as shown) into the QCMC slot.
5. Install the QCMC slot cover.
6. Lower the media cover.
7. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
8. Make sure the Enter key is not locked and that Admin User is set to
Enable.
9. Follow the instructions shown on the printer control panel to set up the
Quick Change feature. See “Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the
QCMC” on page 233.
QCMC Slot
Cover
QCMC Slot
Arrow
Release
Tab
A
From page 231.
QCMC
233
Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC
NOTE: The MAC address residing on the QCMC will be used in place of the
MAC assigned to the printer’s own network card whenever the QCMC
is installed. If you do not want to identify the printer with this MAC
address, make sure the QCMC is removed from the printer before
attaching the printer to the network.
When the printer software detects the presence of a QCMC at power-up, a
check of the QCMC will be performed to determine if there is already a saved
flash image available. If no printer flash image exists on the QCMC, the
software will then check to see if there are any saved configurations in the
printer’s NVRAM memory. If the QCMC is blank (no flash image) and saved
configurations are detected in the printer’s NVRAM then the you will be
prompted with a message on the front panel to save the printer’s configuration
to the QCMC.
NOTE: This screen will appear every time at power-up until the printer’s flash
is saved to the QCMC.
If the <CANCEL> key is pressed, the printer will reboot into normal operation
and not save any information to the QCMC. On subsequent power-ups the
Save message on page 233 will display again.
When the <ENTER> key is pressed, the printer will not go online, but instead
will copy the printer’s entire flash image to the QCMC, creating a snapshot of
the printer’s memory. Information will be stored on the QCMC indicating all of
the options that are installed on the printer: DPI, RFID, Cutter, Peel, Rewind,
NIC, etc.
Below is a list of items that will be saved to the QCMC:
•Printer Program File (software)
•Custom configurations (1–8)
•Feature files or CST’s that have been downloaded on the printer.
•All variable settings from the printer’s NVRAM
•Network settings (if LAN/WLAN is installed), including IP Address
•Other user files, such as fonts, bitmaps, or graphics files downloaded to
the printer.
QMC DETECTED
Save to QCMC?
Continue Press <ENTER>
Skip Press <CANCEL>
234
Appendix B Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC
While the printer is saving its QCMC settings to the EMC, the following
message will display. Do not interrupt the process.
Upon successful completion of saving a flash image to the QCMC, the printer
will display a message indicating the operation is complete. The printer will
then reboot into normal operation.
If there is not enough space on the EMC to save the entire flash image, you
will be prompted with the following message.
This is a fatal error and requires user intervention. Cycle power on the printer,
when prompted to save the QCMC select <CANCEL> to skip. The printer will
boot online and allow access to the EMC file menus located under the Printer
Control menu (Admin. User must be set to Enable to see the EMC menus.
see step b on page 239). Delete unnecessary EMC files then try the QCMC
Save operation again.
DO NOT PWR OFF
Saving Setup
To QCMC...
XX%
Save Complete
Printer Will Now
Reboot...
NOT ENOUGH
SPACE ON EMC
Delete EMC File
And Optimize
235
Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer
Always power off the printer before removing or inserting the QCMC. Place
the QCMC into the second printer’s memory slot. Upon power up, the printer
software detects the presence of a QCMC and a check of the QCMC will be
performed to determine if there is already a saved flash image from this
QCMC on the printer. If no, the following message will display:
NOTE: This message will appear every time at power-up until the QCMC
settings are copied to the printer.
If the <CANCEL> key is pressed, the printer will reboot into normal operation
and not copy any information to the printer. On subsequent power-ups the
Copy message above will display again if the QCMC remains installed in the
printer.
NOTE: If the QCMC remains installed in the printer, the MAC address
onboard will be used in place of the resident MAC address to the
printer’s LAN/WAN interface card.
When the <ENTER> key is pressed, the printer will not go online immediately,
but will copy the contents of the QCMC to the printer’s flash, creating a clone
of the original printer. Before the copy process is allowed to continue, checks
of the printer configuration will be made. If either of the checks fail, a message
will display on the front panel (in the hierarchy shown on page 235) and the
printer will not copy any settings.
This means that the QCMC is not compatible with the printer’s software. A
software upgrade is required, or a different configured QCMC will be needed.
QCMC DETECTED
Copy to Printer?
Yes...Press <ENTER>
No...Press <CANCEL>
INVALID EMC
Power Off Printer
Remove Cartridge
236
Appendix B Copying the QCMC “Snapshot” Image to a Second Printer
This means that the printer’s hardware options do not match the original
printer’s options.
A QCMC validation check will be performed to ensure the data stored on the
EMC is not corrupted. If the test fails the following fault message will display.
This means that the data on the QCMC was not saved properly, and must be
deleted then resaved. Follow the instructions for deleting files, then repeat the
copying process.
If all the checks pass, then the printer will copy the files from the QCMC to the
target printer.
Upon successful completion, the printer will display the following message on
the front panel and reboot into normal operation. Once the printer boots
Online, it is necessary to select a “Run Auto-Cal” option located under the
“Sensor Setup” menu.
PRINTER HARDWARE
NOT COMPATIBLE
Power Off Printer
Remove Cartridge
QCMC DATA ERROR
ON EMC
Delete & Resave
QCMC Data
DO NOT PWR OFF
Copying QCMC To
Printer...
XX%
Copy Complete
Run Auto-Cal
After Reboot
Updating the Printer Configuration to the QCMC
237
Updating the Printer Configuration to the QCMC
Before a new printer flash image can be saved to a QCMC, the existing
QCMC files must first be deleted. With the QCMC installed in the original host
printer or a target printer, set “Admin User” to Enable under the “Printer
Control” menu. Select the “Delete Saved QCMC/Files And Reboot <ENTER>”
option. The files will be deleted and the printer will reboot and optimize the
flash on the EMC. Cycle power on the printer and follow the instructions in the
“Saving the Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC” section on page 233.
Loading New Firmware on the Printer
Loading new firmware onto the host or to the target printer erases the
NVRAM. This is the same as the printer’s flash never being saved to a
QCMC, or the printer having never been cloned with a QCMC.
NOTE: If an EMC with saved QCMC settings is installed in the printer during
program download, all QCMC settings on the EMC will be erased as
well.
Exceptions
If you remove the module with power on, the MEMORY REMOVED Check
EMC error message will display. It is necessary to power off and reboot the
printer (with the cartridge in or out) to clear this error.
If the cartridge is removed when the printer’s power is off, the printer’s own
MAC address will be available to the network when power is restored. No
other variable data will be lost. Data on the QCMC will be maintained as well.
238
Appendix B Installing the EMC
Installing the EMC
CAUTION
You must power off the printer before you install or remove the EMC, or
you may damage the EMC and the printer. If you remove the EMC after
powering on the printer with the EMC installed, the fault message
“MEMORY REMOVED Check EMC” will display. You cannot clear this
message by reinserting the EMC. You must cycle power.
1. Set the printer power switch to O (Off) from the front of the printer.
2. Raise the media cover.
Figure 8. Powering Off the Printer
Media
Cover
Power
Switch
A
See page 239.
Loading New Firmware on the Printer
239
Figure 9. Installing the EMC
3. Press the release tab and remove the EMC slot cover.
4. Plug the EMC (with the arrow positioned as shown) into the EMC slot.
5. Install the EMC slot cover.
6. Lower the media cover.
7. Set the printer power switch to | (On).
8. Make sure the Enter key is not locked and that Admin User is set to
Enable.
9. Install the EMC:
a. If installing a QCMC, follow the instructions shown on the printer
control panel to set up the Quick Change feature. See “Saving the
Printer’s Configuration to the QCMC” on page 233.
b. If the EMC contains fonts, verify that the fonts are present by doing
the following:
i. When ONLINE or OFFLINE displays on the printer’s LCD,
press to enter Menu mode.
ii. Press the Right key until PRINTER SETUP displays.
iii. Press ↵ to enter the PRINTER SETUP menu.
EMC Slot
Cover
EMC Slot
EMC
Arrow
Release
Tab
A
From page 238.
240
Appendix B Using the Standard Peel without Liner Rewinder
iv. Press the Up key until Admin User displays.
v. Select Enable and press ↵ to enable the option.
vi. Press the Up key until EMC FSS displays.
vii. Press ↵ to enter the EMC FSS menu.
viii. Press the Down key until View EMC Files displays.
ix. Press ↵ to enter the View EMC Files menu.
x. Press the Down key to scroll through the list of files stored on the
EMC.
xi Find the font file name on the list.
c. If the EMC is memory only verify that the cartridge is installed
correctly by doing the following:
i When ONLINE or OFFLINE displays on the printer’s LCD,
press to enter Menu mode.
ii Press the Left key until DIAGNOSTICS displays.
iii Press ↵ to enter the DIAGNOSTICS menu.
iv Press the Down key until EMC FLASH Installed displays. The
amount of memory displays in megabytes. If this does not
appear, the EMC has not been properly installed. Start over at
step 1 on page 238.
Using the Standard Peel without Liner Rewinder
Configure The Printer Menu
1. Set Media Handling to Peel-Off in the MEDIA SETUP menu.
See “Configuring the Printer” on page 61 for more information.
2. Calibrate the printer (see “Running Auto Calibrate” on page 47).
NOTE: Calibration in Peel-Off mode is allowed only if Cal in Peel Mode is set
to Enable. Cal in Peel Mode appears only if Admin User is set to
Enable in the PRINTER SETUP menu.
CAUTION
When the printer calibrates in peel-off mode, a series of labels will
quickly dispense. Be prepared to remove the peeled labels as they
automatically peel or the printer will jam.
Load Media
241
Load Media
Figure 10. Loading the Printer for Standard Peel Operation
1. To load media, refer to “Loading Roll Media” on page 25 and complete
step 1 through step 10.
2. Open the standard peel door by pulling it out and down.
3. Thread the media over the peel bar, behind the standard peel roller, and
through the standard peel opening (see Figure 10 on page 241).
4. Horizontally center the standard peel roller over the label.
5. Peel the label (located over the tear bar) off the liner (refer to Figure 10 on
page 241). This will prevent the labels from sticking to the tear bar during
the initial print feed.
Media Cover
Media Damper
Media Width
Guide
Standard Peel
Door
Standard Peel Roller
Label
Peel Bar
Deck Lock
Lever
Pivoting
Deck
Standard Peel
Opening
242
Appendix B Using the Standard Peel without Liner Rewinder
Figure 11. The Standard Peel Option
6. Rotate the deck lock lever clockwise to close the pivoting deck.
7. Close the standard peel door by pulling upward and it will lock in place.
8. Press the (Feed) key to advance the media to the next
TOF (Top-of-Form) position. A label dispenses with the liner falling in
front of the printer.
9. Press the (Pause) key until ONLINE displays.
10. Close the media cover.
Label
Liner
Deck Lock Lever
Standard
Peel Door
Configure the Printer Menu
243
Using the Full Media Rewinder Option
The full media rewinder allows you to automatically rewind printed labels into
a roll after they have been printed.
Configure the Printer Menu
1. Set Media Handling to Rewind in the MEDIA SETUP menu.
(See “Configuring the Printer” on page 61 for more information.)
2. Calibrate the printer (see “Running Auto Calibrate” on page 47).
Load Media
Figure 12. Loading the Media Rewinder
1. To load media, refer to “Loading Roll Media” on page 25 and complete
step 1 through step 10. Be sure to open the side cover.
2. Thread the media over the front of the media guide, around the media
guide roller, and through the frame opening toward the rewinder.
See Figure 12 and Figure 13.
Media Guide
Media
Media Guide
Roller
Media
Rewinder Clip
Side Cover
Media Cover
Frame
Opening
Rewinder
Media Damper
244
Appendix B Using the Full Media Rewinder Option
Figure 13. Media Rewind Path
NOTE: The alternate media path is for inside wound label.
3. Loosen the thumbscrew, pull it outward, position the wind direction lever
in the desired location, and tighten the thumbscrew. See Figure 13.
NOTE: Wind direction lever in lower position = clockwise rotation.
Wind direction lever in upper position = counterclockwise rotation.
IMPORTANT
If you do not complete the following step, it will be extremely difficult to
remove the printed labels from the rewinder.
4. Remove the media rewinder clip.
5. Wrap the leading edge of the media around the rewinder.
6. Slide the media flush against the left edge of the rewinder.
Media
Media
Guide
Media Guide
Roller
Rewinder
Frame
Opening
Alternate
Media Path
Thumbscrew
NOTE: The wind direction lever
(not shown) is located behind
the thumbscrew.
Rewinder Full
Sensor
Alternate Rewind Path
Sensor
Thumbscrew
Load Media
245
Figure 14. Securing Media on the Rewinder
7. Insert the media rewinder clip to secure the media. See Figure 14.
8. Manually rotate the rewinder one full revolution until the media is taut.
9. Install the media retainer onto the rewinder until it is flush against the
liner.
10. Tighten the thumbscrew
11. Rotate the deck lock lever clockwise to close the pivoting deck.
12. Press the (Feed) key to advance the media to the next
TOF (Top-of-Form) position.
13. Press the (Pause) key until ONLINE displays.
14. Close the side cover and media cover.
IMPORTANT
The rewinder supports a maximum diameter of 8 inches of printed labels
(including rewinder diameter). Exceeding this diameter can cause
printed labels to rub on the bottom pan.
Media Rewinder
Clip
Rewinder
Media
Thumbscrew
Media
Retainer
246
Appendix B Using the Full Media Rewinder Option
Rewinder Full Sensor Setup
1. Open the side cover and media cover.
2. Position the rewinder full sensor in the lower position and tighten the
sensor thumbscrew. See Figure 13 on page 244.
NOTE: When the rewinder full sensor detects a roll full condition, the
rewinder beeps and the message “REWINDER FULL Remove Roll”
displays.
3. Close the side cover and media cover.
Remove Printed Media from the Rewinder
1. Open the media cover and side cover.
2. Press the (Feed) key to advance the last printed label past the
printhead, and tear the liner from behind the last printed label.
3. Manually rewind the remaining printed labels onto the rewinder by turning
the rewinder.
4. Pull the media rewinder clip (along with the printed labels) off the
rewinder.
5. Remove the printed labels from the media rewinder clip. Set the printed
labels aside.
6. Insert the media rewinder clip into the rewinder.
7. Close the side cover and media cover.
Configure the Printer Menu
247
Using the Full Media Rewinder with 3 Inch Diameter Core
Adapters
Using the full media rewinder with 3 inch diameter core adapters allows you to
automatically rewind printed labels onto a 3 inch diameter media take-up core
after they have been printed.
Configure the Printer Menu
1. Set Media Handling to Rewind in the MEDIA SETUP menu.
(See “Configuring the Printer” on page 61 for more information.)
2. Calibrate the printer (see “Running Auto Calibrate” on page 47).
Install the Core Adapters and Media Take-Up Core
Figure 15. Installing the Inside Core Adapter
1. Slide the inside core adapter onto the rewinder until it is flush against the
rewinder flange.
2. Tighten the thumbscrew.
pgrwlod1
pgrwlod2
A
Inside Core Adapter
Thumbscrew
A
Rewinder
Rewinder
Flange
248
Appendix B Using the Full Media Rewinder with 3 Inch Diameter Core Adapters
Figure 16. Installing the Outside Core Adapter
3. Slide the outside core adapter onto the rewinder. Place it about 1/2 inch
further in than the width of the media take-up core you are going to use.
For example, if the media take-up core is 4 inches wide, the distance from
the rewinder flange to the outside edge of the outside core adapter should
be about 3 1/2 inches.
4. Tighten the thumbscrew.
Figure 17. Installing the Media Take-Up Core
5. Slide a 3 inch diameter media take-up core onto the rewinder over the two
core adapters until it is flush with the rewinder flange. You should have
about 1/2 inch from the outside edge of the outside core adapter to the
edge of the media take-up core.
pgrwlo d3
Rewinder
Flange
Thumbscrew Outside
Edge
Outside Core Adapter
Rewinder
pgrwlod4
pgrwlod5
B
B
Rewinder
Flange
Media
Take-Up
Core
Load Media
249
Load Media
1. To load media, refer to “Loading Roll Media” on page 25 and complete
step 1 through step 10. Be sure to open the side cover.
2. Thread the media over the front of the media guide, around the media
guide roller, and through the frame opening toward the media take-up
core. See Figure 18.
NOTE: The alternate media path is for inside wound label.
Figure 18. Media Rewind Path
3. Loosen the thumbscrew, pull it outward, position the wind direction lever
in the desired location, and tighten the thumbscrew. See Figure 18.
NOTE: Wind direction lever in lower position = clockwise rotation.
Wind direction lever in upper position = counterclockwise rotation.
pgrwlod6
Media
Media
Guide
Media Guide
Roller
Media
Take-Up
Core
Frame
Opening
Alternate
Media Path
Thumbscrew
NOTE: The wind direction lever
(not shown) is located behind
the thumbscrew.
Rewinder Full
Sensor
Alternate Rewind Path
Sensor
Thumbscrew
250
Appendix B Using the Full Media Rewinder with 3 Inch Diameter Core Adapters
Figure 19. Securing Media on the Media Take-Up Core
4. Wrap the leading edge of the media around the media take-up core.
See Figure 19.
5. Slide the media flush against the left edge of the rewinder flange.
6. Tape the leading edge of the media onto the media take-up core.
7. Manually rotate the media take-up core one full revolution until the media
is taut. See Figure 20.
Figure 20. Tightening the Media on the Media Take-Up Core
pgrwlod7
Media
Media
Take-Up
Core
Tape
Rewinder
Flange
pgrwlod8
Media
Take-Up
Core
Rewinder Full Sensor Setup
251
Figure 21. Installing the End Plate
8. Install the media retainer onto the rewinder as shown in Figure 21 until it
is flush against the media take-up core.
9. Tighten the thumbscrew.
10. Rotate the deck lock lever clockwise to close the pivoting deck.
11. Press the (Feed) key to advance the media to the next
TOF (Top-of-Form) position.
12. Press the (Pause) key until ONLINE displays.
13. Close the side cover and media cover.
IMPORTANT
The rewinder supports a maximum diameter of 8 inches of printed labels
(including 3 inch media take-up core diameter). Exceeding this diameter
can cause printed labels to rub on the bottom pan.
Rewinder Full Sensor Setup
1. Open the side cover and media cover.
2. Position the rewinder full sensor in the lower position and tighten the
sensor thumbscrew. See Figure 18 on page 249.
NOTE: When the rewinder full sensor detects a roll full condition, the
rewinder beeps and the message REWINDER FULL Remove Roll
displays.
3. Close the side cover and media cover.
pgrwlod9
Media
Retainer
Rewinder
Media
Take-Up
Core Thumbscrew
252
Appendix B Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder Option
Figure 22. Removing the Media Roll
Remove Printed Media from the Rewinder
1. Open the media cover and side cover.
2. Press the (Feed) key to advance the last printed label past the
printhead, and tear the liner from behind the last printed label.
3. Manually rewind the remaining printed labels onto the media roll by
turning the media retainer (refer to Figure 21 on page 251).
4. Loosen the thumbscrew and remove the media retainer.
5. Remove the media roll from the rewinder as shown in Figure 22, and set
the roll aside.
6. Close the side cover and media cover.
Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder Option
The Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder allows you to automatically peel
die-cut labels off their liner (backing) and dispense them one at a time while
rewinding the liner.
Configure The Printer Menu
1. Set Media Handling to Peel-Off under the MEDIA SETUP menu.
(See “Configuring the Printer” on page 61 for more information.)
2. Calibrate the printer (see “Running Auto Calibrate” on page 47).
pgrwld10
Media Roll
Load Media
253
Load Media
Figure 23. Loading Media on the Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder
1. Open the media cover.
2. Open the side cover and refer to the Label and Ribbon Routes label on
the inside of the side cover.
3. Open the pivoting deck by rotating the deck lock lever fully
counterclockwise.
4. Open the peel-off door by pulling it upward, then forward.
5. Remove approximately 18 to 24 inches of labels from the liner. This will
prevent the labels from sticking to the tear bar during the initial print feed.
Media Cover
Side Cover
Label
Knurled Roller
Rubber
Roller
Platen
Media
Rewinder Clip
Rewinder
Peel-Off
Door
Pivoting Deck
Deck Lock Lever
Media Damper
254
Appendix B Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder Option
6. Thread the media under the media damper, over the platen, and in
between the knurled roller and the rubber roller. See Figure 23 and
Figure 24.
7. Thread the liner under the rubber roller.
8. Remove the media rewinder clip.
Figure 24. Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder Media Path
9. Wrap the leading edge of the liner over and around the rewinder.
10. Slide the liner flush against the left edge of the rewinder.
Label
Rewinder
Peel-Off Door
Tear
Bar
Alternate
Ribbon Path
Rubber Roller
Knurled Roller
(open position)
Liner
Media
Platen
Alternate
Media Path
Thumbscrew
Knurled Roller
(closed position)
Load Media
255
Figure 25. Securing Liner onto the Rewinder
11. Insert the media rewinder clip to secure the media. See Figure 25.
12. Manually rotate the rewinder one full revolution clockwise until the liner is
taut.
13. Remove labels from the liner so that behind the tear bar the liner is
without labels for approximately 1.5 inches.
14. Remove labels from the liner so that below the tear bar the liner is without
labels for approximately 2 inches.
15. Rotate the deck lock lever fully clockwise to close the pivoting deck and
printhead.
pgrewcl2
Media Rewinder Clip
Rewinder
Liner
256
Appendix B Using The Standard Peel With Liner Rewinder Option
Figure 26. The Rewinder In Peel-Off Mode
16. Close the peel-off door and snap it down to lock it in place.
17. Press the (Feed) key. The label advances to the peel-off position,
and “LABEL READY Remove Label” displays on the LCD. The liner
remains on the rewinder. See Figure 26.
18. Press the (Pause) key until ONLINE displays.
19. Close the side cover and media cover.
Tear Bar
Label
Liner
Media
Rewinder Clip
Rewinder
Peel-Off
Door
Deck Lock Lever
Media Cover
Side Cover
Printhead
Removing Label Liner from the Rewinder
257
IMPORTANT
The rewinder supports a maximum diameter of 8 inches of liner
(including rewinder diameter). Exceeding this diameter can cause the
liner to rub on the bottom pan.
Removing Label Liner from the Rewinder
1. Open the media cover and side cover.
2. Open the peel-off door by pulling it upward, then forward.
3. Tear the liner at the tear bar.
4. Manually turn the rewinder to rewind the remaining liner onto the
rewinder.
5. Pull the media rewinder clip (along with the liner) off the rewinder.
6. Remove the liner from the media rewinder clip and discard the liner.
7. Insert the media rewinder clip into the rewinder.
8. Close the side cover and media cover.
9. Close the peel-off door by pushing it towards the rewinder then snapping
it downward.
258
Appendix B Supplies
Supplies
The best printing solution is achieved when the printer, ribbon, and media are
matched to the application requirements. The use of Genuine Printronix
Thermal Media and Ribbons will ensure optimum image quality, consistent
bar code performance, and extended life of the printhead.
Please refer to the Printronix Media Selection Guide for details concerning the
application suitability for all media and ribbon products. To obtain a copy of
this guide, or for any other questions concerning Genuine Printronix Thermal
Supplies, please call:
Or visit our website at www.printronix.com.
Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer Ribbons
The following is a list of Genuine Printronix Thermal Transfer ribbons:
Printronix Wide Spectrum Wax Ribbon 8300
Provides superior print quality for coated and uncoated paper and tag stocks.
Printronix Wax Resin Blend Ribbon 8500
Provides excellent high speed print quality with premium durability
performance on a wide range of thermal transfer receptive papers and films.
Printronix Specialty Resin Ribbon 8600
A premium resin formula for excellent image and scuff resistance, while
achieving premium print quality on a wide range of synthetic films and coated
papers.
Printronix Harsh Environment Resin Ribbon 8700
Provides the highest heat, chemical, and abrasion resistance for use with
high-end synthetic facestocks. When used with the proper polyester media,
meets UL/CSA regulatory requirements.
Americas: (800) 733-1900 Fax: (714) 368-2354
Europe, Middle East,
Africa:
(33) 1-46-25-1900 Fax: (33) 1-46-25-1919
Asia: (65) 548-4116 Fax: (65) 546-1588
Genuine Printronix Media
259
Genuine Printronix Media
Printronix provides a wide variety of sizes, colors, and shapes of labels and
tags readily available to meet all of your labeling needs. The Printronix
Expanded Die Library details hundreds of label sizes and configurations
which are quickly obtainable through the Printronix custom order system
without the typical added costs and delays associated with the creation and
tooling of a special die to match your requirements. To order supplies, see
“Supplies” on page 258.
Besides the standard roll label configuration, Genuine Printronix labels are
also available in fanfold configurations.
Genuine Printronix Media
Media Type Description Typical Applications
Media 110
Thermal Transfer
Premium coated paper, permanent acrylic
adhesive
Compliance shipping, general warehouse, address,
AIAG, LOGMARS, product ID, hardware parts supply
Media 120R
Thermal Transfer
Premium coated paper, removable
adhesive
Temporary product ID, pricing, point of sale, shelf
marking labels which can be cleanly removed
Media 180T
Thermal Transfer
7.0 mil coated paper tagstock Retail hangtag, warehouse bin and pouch inserts,
inventory control, work in process, general purpose tag
Media 210
Direct Thermal
Economy paper, permanent acrylic
adhesive
Short life deli, grocery, shipping, work in process
Media 220
Direct Thermal
Premium paper, permanent acrylic
adhesive
Compliance shipping, general warehouse, address,
AIAG, LOGMARS, product ID
Media 270
Direct Thermal
Infra-Red scannable, permanent acrylic
adhesive
Infra-red scannability for overnight shipping and
grocery environments
Media 280T
Direct Thermal
7 mil paper tagstock Economical ticket and tag stock for general retail and
industrial use
Media 410
Direct Thermal
3.3 mil film, permanent acrylic adhesive Excellent moisture resistance and tear strength for
applications such as baggage tags, etc.
Media 510
Thermal Transfer
4.0 mil white polyolefin, permanent acrylic
adhesive
Durable satin finish for chemical pails and drums and
general outdoor and industrial use
Media 520
Thermal Transfer
Smudge-proof white polyolefin, permanent
acrylic adhesive
Outdoor exposures especially chemical drums, etc.
provides a markable soundproof topcoat
Media 580T
Thermal Transfer
8.5 mil smudge-proof, poly tagstock Outdoor nursery, lumberyard, and industrial
environment hangtag and insert tag
Media 700’s
Thermal Transfer
2.0 mil polyester labelstock, white, bright &
matte chrome
UL/CSA compliant nameplate labels, harsh
environment and laboratory labels
260
Appendix B Supplies
Ribbon and Media Usage
Type Media (Stock) Ribbon Features Typical Applications
Direct Thermal Paper Label
Tag
Synthetic Label
Not Used Low cost.
Ease of use.
Low environmental durability.
Limited label life.
Will fade and/or discolor when
exposed to heat, sunlight, or
chemicals.
Shipping.
Inventory tracking.
Thermal Transfer Paper Label
Tag
Printronix
Wide Spectrum
Wax 8300
Lowest cost thermal transfer
combination.
Most commonly used.
Low environmental durability.
Low abrasion resistance.
Longer life than direct
thermal.
Shipping.
Inventory tracking.
Product labeling.
Compliance labeling.
Thermal Transfer Paper Label
Tag
Synthetic Label
Tyvek® and
Valeron®
Printronix Wax
Resin Blend
8500
Mid-range wax resin
performance and
characteristics at economy
wax prices.
Darker, razor-sharp, smudge-
proof images.
Same as economy
applications with
advantage of
supporting
Polypropylene,
Polyethylene,
Polyolefin, and Valeron
media.
Thermal Transfer Paper Label
Tag
Synthetic Label
Printronix
Specialty Resin
8600
Better environmental
durability.
Better abrasion resistance
than wax.
More expensive than wax.
Good aesthetic appearance.
Retail applications
where labels are
handled.
Excellent for most
applications.
Compliance labeling.
Thermal Transfer Synthetic Label Printronix Harsh
Environment
Resin 8700
High environmental durability.
High physical durability.
Excellent aesthetic
appearance.
Most expensive label/tag
combination.
High temperature
environments.
Medical applications.
Outdoor environments.
Environments with
chemicals.
Compliance labeling.
261
CASCII Control Codes
Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex
NUL 0 00 32 20 @ 64 40 ` 96 60
SOH 1 01 ! 33 21 A 65 41 a 97 61
STX 2 02 + 34 22 B 66 42 b 98 62
EXT 3 03 # 35 23 C 67 43 c 99 63
EOT 4 04 $ 36 24 D 68 44 d 100 64
ENQ 5 05 % 37 25 E 69 45 e 101 65
ACK 6 06 & 38 26 F 70 46 f 102 66
BEL 7 07 + 39 27 G 71 47 g 103 67
BS 8 08 ( 40 28 H 72 48 h 104 68
HT 9 09 ) 41 29 I 73 49 i 105 69
LF 10 0A * 42 2A J 74 4A j 106 6A
VT 11 0B + 43 2B K 75 4B k 107 6B
FF 12 0C , 44 2C L 76 4C l 108 6C
CR 13 0D - 45 2D M 77 4D m 109 6D
SO 14 0E . 46 2E N 78 4E n 110 6E
SI 15 0F / 47 2F O 79 4F o 111 6F
DLE 16 10 0 48 30 P 80 50 p 112 70
DC1 17 11 1 49 31 Q 81 51 q 113 71
DC2 18 12 2 50 32 R 82 52 r 114 72
DC3 19 13 3 51 33 S 83 53 s 115 73
DC4 20 14 4 52 34 T 84 54 t 116 74
NAK 21 15 5 53 35 U 85 55 u 117 75
SYN 22 16 6 54 36 V 86 56 v 118 76
ETB 23 17 7 55 37 W 87 57 w 119 77
CAN 24 18 8 56 38 X 88 58 x 120 78
EM 25 19 9 57 39 Y 89 59 y 121 79
SUB 26 1A : 58 3A Z 90 5A z 122 7A
ESC 27 1B ; 59 3B [ 91 5B { 123 7B
262
Appendix C
NOTE: For the hardware handshake XON/XOFF commands:
XON = Ctrl Q (DC1)
XOFF = Ctrl S (DC3)
FS 28 1C < 60 3C \ 92 5C | 124 7C
GS 29 1D = 61 3D ] 93 5D } 125 7D
RS 30 1E > 62 3E ^ 94 5E ~ 126 7E
US 31 1F ? 63 3F _ 95 5F 127 7F
Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex Char Dec Hex
263
DPTX_SETUP Commands
Overview
The PTX_SETUP commands are a superset of commands which allow the
printer to perform several tasks by parsing commands either stored in flash or
sent to the printer by the host. Commands range from re-routing debug
statements to downloading complete printer configurations.
This appendix describes the PTX_SETUP commands specific to thermal
printers, as well as the commands which are not platform specific.
The PTX_SETUP Commands
Some concepts to keep in mind are as follows:
1. PTX_SETUP commands are not emulation specific. In a system with an
IGP, the IGP level emulation will process the PTX_SETUP commands. In
a system without an IGP, the PTX_SETUP commands will be processed
by the base emulation. The CTHI emulation will not process PTX_SETUP
commands.
2. Since there is no disk on a flash-based printer, DISK_IO commands are
now called FILE_IO. However, for backwards compatibility DISK_IO and
FILE_IO are synonymous.
3. The PTX_SETUP command set is case sensitive; all PTX_SETUP
commands are in upper case characters only.
4. The white space separating commands may be any number of spaces
and tabs. This allows a PTX_SETUP file to be formatted for easier
readability.
5. The PTX_SETUP and PTX_END command should be followed by a new
line character.
6. Any unknown command will terminate the PTX_SETUP processing. The
offending command will be the first line of printed text.
7. Although the original implementation of PTX_SETUP allowed for only a
single parameter, separated from the sub-command by a single
semicolon (;) character, the new PTX_SETUP command set allows for
multiple parameters separated by commas, semicolons, spaces or tabs.
264
Appendix D The PTX_SETUP Commands
General Commands
The original PTX_SETUP commands were implemented on the disk-based
legacy laser printers; however, many commands are also supported for
thermal printers. This section describes the existing commands which work
across all platforms, and provides a general description of how commands
are formed.
Each emulation has modes in which the PTX_SETUP commands could get
missed. For this reason, it is highly recommended that all PTX_SETUP
commands be placed between print jobs, rather than attempting to imbed
them within jobs.
PTX_SETUP commands have the following format:
(SFCC)PTX_SETUP
Command–Sub Command;Value
PTX_END
For example, if the SFCC assigned to PTX_SETUP is the default value of the
exclamation mark (!, hex 21), and you wanted to load configuration number 4
and capture all incoming data to a file named “BIN”, you would use the
following command:
!PTX_SETUP
CONFIG–LOAD;4 FILE_IO–CAPTURE;BIN
PTX_END
Table 22 lists all the command, sub-command, and parameter combinations
and gives a brief description of the command. This section documents the
existence of PTX_SETUP commands which work across all platforms. The
following sections document commands which are specific to thermal.
NOTE: When a file system error occurs, a message will be displayed on the
front panel indicating the error, and the action needed to take to
correct the error.
General Commands
265
Table 22. General PTX_SETUP Commands
Command Sub-Command Parameter Description
CONFIG LOAD Cfg Cfg can be 0-8. The PTX_SETUP
will load configuration Cfg. If
configuration Cfg was not previously
saved, the operator panel will
display an error message and the
current configuration will be kept.
SAVE Cfg Cfg must be 1-8. This command will
save the current configuration as
configuration Cfg. If Cfg is not in the
range of 1-8, the command is
ignored.
SETMENU Value;Menu_tag Menu_tag is the name of the menu
as defined in the menu file. Value is
the value to which the menu is to be
set.
POWERUP Cfg Sets the power-up configuration to
Cfg and loads Configuration Cfg.
Cfg can be any value from 0-8,
where 0 is the factory default.
PRINT Cfg Print Configuration Cfg. Cfg can be
a number 1-8, or one of four pre-
defined configurations. The four
non-numeric configurations are
requested using the first character
for the CURRENT, FACTORY,
POWERUP, or ALL configuration(s).
DELETE Cfg Deletes Configuration number Cfg.
Cfg must be in the range of 1-8.
UPLOAD Port;Cfg This command uploads the
configuration stored in location Cfg
to the port specified by Port. Port
must either be 1284 or SERIAL. Cfg
may be 1-8 or ALL.
DOWNLOAD Cfg This command saves the
configuration data that follows as
configuration Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8
or END.
266
Appendix D The PTX_SETUP Commands
CONFIG OVERLAY Cfg This command overlays the
configuration data that follows on
existing configuration Cfg. Cfg must
be 1-8 (or END). If Cfg does not
exist then command is treated the
same as DOWNLOAD.
RESET Reboots the printer.
GET_NAMES “Port” This command uploads the names
of the configurations to the port
specified by Port. Port must either
be “1284” or “SERIAL”.
SET_NAME Cfg This command downloads a name
for the configuration specified by
Cfg. Cfg must be 1-8.
CLEAR_NAMES This command resets all of the
configuration names to their default
values.
MPI_SELECT MPI This command selects the active
Management Protocol Interface
(MPI). Currently there are two
selections “UCP” and “PXML”.
PNE_PORT Port This command selects the port that
the PNE will use to communicate to
the printer.
The valid ports are:
•DISABLE
•HOST_SERIAL
If Host I/O is set to Auto
Switching or Serial, the port
defaults to Debug Serial.
•DEBUG_SERIAL
•ETHERNET
•USB
NOTE: If ETHERNET is selected
but not enabled, the
selection will revert to
DISABLE.
Table 22. General PTX_SETUP Commands
Command Sub-Command Parameter Description
General Commands
267
CONFIG PANEL LOCK
UNLOCK
This command locks the operator
out of the printer’s configuration
menu.
This command unlocks the printer’s
configuration menu and allows the
operator access to the menus. By
default, the menu is unlocked.
PNE_PORT_NUM Port Number This command sets the Port
Number the PNE uses to
communicate to the printer if the
PNE Port was set to Ethernet. This
command causes the printer to
automatically reboot.
PXML_PORT_NUM Port Number This command sets the Port
Number the PXML and UCP will use
to communicate to the printer if the
PXML Port is set to Ethernet. This
command causes the printer to
automatically reboot.
LP MODE n/a Protocol Protocol must be 0-4. This
command resets the software
protocol, and is selected as follows:
0 - P-Series
1 - P-Series XQ
2 - Serial Matrix
3 - Proprinter III XL
4 - Epson FX-1050
Table 22. General PTX_SETUP Commands
Command Sub-Command Parameter Description
268
Appendix D The PTX_SETUP Commands
FILE_IO
(DISK_IO)
CAPTURE Filename Captures all incoming data into a file
named Filename. Receipt of a
FILE_IO–CAPTURE command
without the Filename parameter will
force the file data to be written to
flash, and will end the file capture.
DRIVE Letter This command is parsed for
backwards compatibility. However,
since the flash file system is a single
device, the drive letter will be
ignored.
PROPS File;Prop The PROPS command will set the
file properties of a given file. The file
properties are a four letter, case
sensitive file descriptor. The
properties field can be used to
ensure that a file is used for its
intended purpose. Once properties
have been associated with a file,
they cannot be changed.
DEL Filename The DEL command will mark a file
as deleted. The space the file
occupied will be freed the next time
the printer is powered up.
Table 22. General PTX_SETUP Commands
Command Sub-Command Parameter Description
General Commands
269
Summary of the CONFIG Command
The UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD command can be used for uploading and
downloading complete printer configurations. If a customer needs to configure
50 printers identically, the customer needs only configure one printer and
UPLOAD the configurations. The UPLOADed configurations may then be
DOWNLOADed to other printers eliminating the necessity for the operator to
configure each printer manually.
The UPLOAD command will always place a header and a footer into the
uploaded data. This header will be the DOWNLOAD command followed by
the configuration number. The footer will be the DOWNLOAD END command.
The operator should be aware that the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD
commands use a secondary copy of the menu structure which does not affect
the printer's active configuration. This allows the UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD
commands to operate without affecting the printer's current configuration. If
the operator intends to use one of the DOWNLOADed configurations, the
operator should reboot the printer to ensure proper operation. This can be
accomplished by adding the RESET command as the last command in your
FILE_IO
(DISK_IO)
RUNFILE File;Prop The RUNFILE command will open
the file named File for printing. After
the PTX_END command is
processed, the contents of File will
get printed before any more data is
read from the host. If the Prop field
is present, RUNFILE will verify that
Prop matches the saved file
properties. Any mismatch will cause
the command to be ignored.
UPLOAD File;Port Reads the file named File out of the
flash file system and sends it to a
host computer via the Port I/O port.
Port is either 1284 (for reverse
nibble or byte mode transfer using
the parallel port), or SERIAL.
NOTE: if the Ethernet option is
installed, 1284 is used to upload
across the network.
MAXSIZE Kb For backwards compatibility.
MINSIZE Kb For backwards compatibility.
OPTIMIZE (none) Causes the printer to optimize the
Flash File System. The printer
automatically reboots during this
process.
PTX_END (none) (none) Exits the PTX_SETUP.
Table 22. General PTX_SETUP Commands
Command Sub-Command Parameter Description
270
Appendix D The PTX_SETUP Commands
setup file. This is necessary because the printer caches the active
configuration. Rebooting the printer ensures that the desired configuration is
correctly read from FLASH.
NOTE: While an upload or download is in progress, the Front Panel will be
unavailable.
The Configuration Save and Delete commands from the front panel can be
blocked by using the Protect Configurations feature. This is intended to
prevent someone from inadvertently reconfiguring a printer. The PTX_SETUP
commands, however, will override the protect configurations feature. All
PTX_SETUP commands will be honored regardless of the value of the
Protect Configurations feature.
Operation of the FILE_IO Command
When a file is opened for writing with the FILE_IO–CAPTURE;filename
command, the system will allocate RAM for file control blocks and 1 Kbyte for
data. If the file already exists on the Flash File System and the Overwrite
Enable feature in the Flash File System menu is set to disable, a warning will
be displayed on the front panel. After clearing the warning, the file data will be
printed. To overwrite the existing file, set the Overwrite Files option to enable.
Due to the nature of writing to flash, any data intended to be stored
permanently in flash must first be copied into RAM. As a result, the ability to
manipulate files in the Flash File System is dependent upon the printer having
sufficient RAM. None of the captured file data will be committed to flash until
the entire file is loaded. The PTX_SETUP parser will interpret the command
“FILE_IO–CAPTURE<lf>” as an end of file marker. Receipt of the command
will cause all file data to be written to flash. The file system allocates RAM for
temporary data storage in 1 Kbyte blocks. If at any time during the file
download the printer runs out of RAM, a warning will be displayed on the front
panel and as much of the file as possible will be saved in flash.
Three things can limit the ability to save a file: insufficient RAM, insufficient
Flash, and lack of empty file system entries. Flash can only be written once
before it needs to be “optimized”. As a result, the maximum file size is limited
to the largest unwritten block of Flash. If any of these problems occur, the
printer will display an error message and will attempt to provide the operator
with a description of what steps to take to correct the error. Normally, the
solution will involve optimizing the Flash File System. This can be
accomplished by selecting the Optimize & Reboot function in the Flash File
System menu under PRINTER SETUP.
NOTE: After selecting the Optimize & Reboot function, do not shut off the
printer's power until after the printer returns to the power-on state.
Loss of power during the optimize process may corrupt the printer's
program. If this occurs, first attempt to repeat the downloading
process. If that fails, contact an authorized service representative.
Thermal Commands
271
Thermal Commands
Table 23 lists PTX_SETUP commands which apply to thermal printers.
Table 23. Thermal PTX_SETUP Commands
Command Sub-Command Parameter Description
ENGINE ALM_WIDE wide width Set the Auto Label Mapping wide
width (in units of 1/1000”; e.g., a
wide width value of 1000 = 1”),
which represents the width of the
image in the file sent from the host
which is to be auto label mapped
into several labels, each of which
will have a width of narrow width.
# of labels=wide width/narrow width
(rounded down)
ALM_NARROW narrow width Set the Auto Label Mapping narrow
width, which represents the width of
one auto mapped label (in units of
1/1000”; e.g., a narrow width value
of 1000 = 1”). This width should be
set prior to the wide width. In
addition, it can never exceed the
physical width of the printer. If it
does, the narrow width will be
automatically reduced to the Page
Width value set in the configuration
menu.
ALM_ENABLE N/W/* Set Auto Label Mapping to Narrow,
Wide, or Off. Enter N for Narrow, W
for Wide, or any other letter to
disable ALM. By default, only the
Narrow option is implemented.
EJECT Performs a page eject.
IMAGE_SHFT_H Value Shifts the image Value horizontally
in 1/1000” units. If Value is out of the
specified range (-1” to +1”), the
command will be ignored.
IMAGE_SHFT_V Value Shifts the image Value vertically in
1/1000” units. If Value is out of the
specified range (-1” to +6”), the
command will be ignored.
LENGTH Value Sets the page length in 1/1000”
units.
272
Appendix D The PTX_SETUP Commands
ENGINE MEDIA_HANDLING Value Sets the type of media handling:
0 - Continuous
1 - Tear-Off Strip
2 - Tear-Off
3 - Peel-Off
4 - Cut
MIRROR Value Value of 0 turns mirroring off,
non-zero turns mirroring on.
MODE XSets the print mode to Thermal
Transfer.
DSets the print mode to Direct
Thermal.
WIDTH Value Sets the page width in 1/1000” units.
ODV 1Enables the ODV unit so that ODV
begins verifying printed barcodes.
RFID OVERSTRIKE_REPORT ON/OFF Enables/disables reporting of RFID
overstrikes to the host. The default
is OFF (disabled).
STATISTICS_REPORT ON/OFF Enables/disables reporting of RFID
statistics to the host. The default is
OFF (disabled).
STATISTICS_CLEAR Clears the RFID statistics.
PRINTJOB START jobID Start of job marker. Results in a
“start of job” message sent back to
host through the PPM port when a
job starts printing.
END jobID End of job marker. Results in a “end
of job” message sent back to host
through the PPM port when the job
finishes printing.
Table 23. Thermal PTX_SETUP Commands
Command Sub-Command Parameter Description
273
ECustomer Support
Printronix Customer Support Center
IMPORTANT
Please have the following information available prior to calling the
Printronix Customer Support Center:
•Model number
•Serial number (located on the back of the printer)
•Installed options (i.e., interface and host type if applicable to the problem)
•Configuration printout:
See “Printing a Configuration” on page 154.
•Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer?
•Description of the problem (be specific)
•Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem (faxing or emailing
of these samples may be required)
Americas (714) 368-2686
Europe, Middle East, and Africa (31) 24 6489 311
Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4114
China (86) 800-999-6836
http://www.printronix.com/support.aspx
Printronix Supplies Department
Contact the Printronix Supplies Department for genuine Printronix supplies.
Americas (800) 733-1900
Europe, Middle East, and Africa (33) 1 46 25 19 07
Asia Pacific (65) 6548 4116
or (65) 6548 4132
China (86) 400-886-5598
India (800) 102-7869
http://www.printronix.com/supplies-parts.aspx
274
Appendix E Printronix Customer Support Center
Corporate Offices
Printronix, Inc.
15345 Barranca Parkway
Irvine, CA 92618
U.S.A.
Phone: (714) 368-2300
Fax: (714) 368-2600
Printronix Inc.
c/o Printronix Nederland BV
Bijsterhuizen 11-38
6546 AS Nijmegen
The Netherlands
Phone: (31) 24 6489489
Fax: (31) 24 6489499
Printronix Schweiz GmbH
42 Changi South Street 1
Changi South Industrial Estate
Singapore 486763
Phone: (65) 6542 0110
Fax: (65) 6546 1588
Printronix Commercial (Shanghai) Co. Ltd
22F, Eton Building East
No.555, Pudong Av.
Shanghai City, 200120, P R China
Phone: (86) 400 886 5598
Fax: (86-21) 5138 0564
Visit the Printronix web site at www.printronix.com
275
FGlossary
Baud (rate) Baud Rate is the number of information bits that can
be transmitted between the printer and the computer
in one second. For example, one baud equals one bit
per second in a series of binary signals. Both the
printer and the computer must be configured to the
same baud rate.
BIT Binary digIT. A digit in the binary number system,
represented by a 0 or a 1. A bit is the smallest unit of
storage in a digital computer.
Boot-up The start-up procedure which causes a computer
operating system to be loaded into main memory.
Buffer An area of storage into which data is read or written
temporarily during data transfers.
Configuration Refers to the operating properties that define how the
printer responds to signals and commands received
from the host computer at the printer interface. These
properties are called configuration parameters and
are set to match the operating characteristics of the
host computer system.
Continuous Media Media comprised of one continuous length without a
gap, notch, hole, or black mark to establish a
predetermined label or tag length. With this media
type, the Host Form Length or user-selected Label
Length sets the desired length of each label.
Continuous Media
Handling Mode A media handling mode that advances media in the
forward direction only.
Controller An independent functional logic unit in a data
processing system that controls data paths between
one or more units of peripheral equipment.
Data Bits Binary information sent to the printer; a character set
grouping containing letters, digits, and punctuation
marks to be printed.
276
Appendix F
Default A value, parameter, attribute, or option that is
assigned by a program or system when another has
not been specified by the user.
Diagnostic Pertaining to the detection and isolation of a printer
malfunction or mistake.
Direct Thermal
Media Media coated with special chemicals that act as an
accelerator, acceptor dye, and binder. In Direct
Thermal mode, the heat from the selected
rectangular elements in the thermal printhead makes
direct contact with the media (no ribbon is used) and
causes a chemical reaction that creates the image on
the media.
Direct Thermal
Printing A printing method in which no ribbon is used to
transfer data from the printhead to the media to
create an image. The thermal printhead selectively
heats small rectangular elements which make direct
contact with the coated media.
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory. Can be read
from or written to at any time. DRAM is volatile:
whatever is in DRAM is lost when power is turned off.
Expanded Memory Cartridge (EMC)
The expanded memory cartridge (EMC) is an extra
32MB Flash memory storage cartridge that allows
users to download forms, logos, and fonts.
Fanfold Media Media supplied in a fanfold stack instead of a roll
format.
Flash Memory Nonvolatile memory. See Nonvolatile Memory.
Font A collection of printing characteristics for printing
alphanumeric characters, all of which combine to
produce a distinctive style of print.
Host Computer The computer that stores, processes, and sends
data to be printed, which communicates directly with
the printer. The term “host” is used to indicate the
controlling computer, since modern printers are
themselves microprocessor-controlled computer
systems.
PGL Intelligent Graphics Printing software for the
Printronix Graphics Language, designated for
Printronix printers. PGL provides online forms,
barcodes, and many alphanumeric text-generation
capabilities and is compatible with earlier versions of
Printronix IGP protocol and programming.
277
Interface The hardware component used to link two devices by
common physical interconnection, signal, and
functional characteristics.
IPS The speed at which the media is printed based on a
rate of Inches-Per-Second.
Label Liner (backing) The material labels are attached to during their
manufacturing process. Attachment is usually
accomplished with an adhesive. After printing, labels
can be easily removed from the liner and the liner
discarded or recycled.
Label Taken Sensor A sensor located at the front of the printer to detect
the presence of a label extended out the front of the
printer. The sensor is used only during Peel-Off
Media Handling to sense a label and then detect its
removal prior to printing the next label.
Media Material onto which data is printed by the printer. The
types of media supported by the printer are die-cut
labels or tag stock, supplied in roll or fanfold format.
Media is further described by the type of sensing
used to detect the Top-of-Form position based on the
label length indicators used. Transmissive (Gap)
media uses a liner gap, notch, or hole between
labels, and Reflective (Mark) media uses a horizontal
black mark located on the underside of the tag stock
or label liner. Continuous media (with no label length
indicators) uses no sensing method, and the
operator determines which label length is desired.
Media Sensor The sensor used to detect the presence of media in
the paper path as well as the gap, notch, or hole
position of Transmissive media or the horizontal
black mark on Reflective media.
Memory See RAM, Nonvolatile Memory, DRAM, and Flash
Memory.
Nonvolatile Memory Nonvolatile memory stores variables that must be
preserved when the printer is turned off, such as
configuration parameters and printer usage statistics.
Nonvolatile memory is preserved because RAM is
housed on the controller board, which contains an
independent, battery-operated power supply. When
printer power is turned off, the battery supplies the
power needed to keep stored data active. Nonvolatile
memory also includes storage in disk.
NVRAM Acronym of Nonvolatile Random-Access Memory.
See Nonvolatile Memory.
278
Appendix F
Parity (check) Parity checking is the addition of a non-data bit to
data, resulting in the number of “1 bits” being either
always even or always odd. Parity is used to detect
transmission errors. Parity represents value in the
check digit of the received or transmitted data.
PCBA Printed Circuit Board Assembly. A PCB with
components (ICs, resistors, capacitors, etc.)
installed.
Pitch (RFID) In the RFID industry, pitch is the distance from one
point on an inlay to the same point on the next inlay.
Port A data channel used for receiving data from or
transmitting data to one or more external devices.
Protocol The rules and conventions that govern
communication between a printer and a host
computer. A protocol includes codes for printing text
and graphics and codes instructing the printer to
perform special operations.
Quick Change Memory Cartridge (QCMC)
This cartridge provides a way to easily copy a
printer’s firmware and configuration settings from one
printer to another. A “snapshot image” of the source
printer is stored onto the QCMC and a simple
interface is provided to copy that image to a target
printer.
RAM Random-Access Memory. Also called “main
memory” or “working memory.” It is the active
memory of the printer into which programs are
loaded. RAM is saved to volatile memory because
data in RAM is lost when power is turned off or
interrupted.
Reflective Mark Sensing
Use of the media sensor to transmit and receive
infrared light off the underside of media to detect
horizontal black marks used for determining the Top-
of-Form position on labels or for indicating a Paper
Out condition.
Resolution A measure expressing the number of component
units in a given range used to create an image; in
printing, expressed as the number of dots per inch
(dpi) horizontally and vertically.
RFID Encoder The RFID (Radio Frequency Identification) encoder
programs smart labels (tags with embedded inlays).
Roll Media Media supplied in a roll format, on a 3-inch cardboard
core.
279
Sensed Distance Gap/Mark Sensor = Gap: The Sensed Distance
value is the physical length of one label plus the
length of one gap.
Gap/Mark Sensor = Mark: The Sensed Distance
value is the physical distance from the trailing edge
of one black mark to the trailing edge of the next.
Standard-Pitch RFID
Labels Labels with RFID inlays that typically have a pitch
from 2.0 to 6.0 inches. These labels support tag
encoding and provide ample space to print text,
graphics, barcodes, or logos.
Short-Pitch RFID
Labels Labels with RFID inlays that have a pitch from 1.0 to
2.0 inches. The inlay is usually short in length and
the label provides limited space to print text,
graphics, barcodes, or logos.
Slew Vertical paper movement.
Stop Bits The signal which indicates the end of a character or
element.
Thermal Transfer
Media Media specifically designed to work with a ribbon for
image transfer. In Thermal Transfer mode,
compatibility between the ribbon and the media is
critical in producing a high quality, long lasting image.
Thermal Transfer
Printing A printing method in which the printhead presses a
specially coated ribbon against the media. The
printhead elements react with the ribbon and bond
the image to the media.
Transmissive (Gap)
Sensing Use of the media sensor to transmit infrared light
through the media to detect gaps, holes, or notches
for determining the Top-of-Form position on labels or
for indicating a Paper Out condition.
280
Appendix F
281
GCommunication Notices
Notices
This information was developed for products and services offered in the
U.S.A.
Printronix may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this
document in other countries. Consult your Printronix representative for
information on the products and services currently available in your area. Any
reference to an Printronix product, program, or service is not intended to state
or imply that only that Printronix product, program, or service may be used.
Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe
any Printronix intellectual property rights may be used instead. However, it is
the user’s responsibility to evaluate and verify the operation of any non-
Printronix product, program, or service.
Printronix may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject
matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not
give you any license to these patents. You can send license inquires, in
writing, to:
Printronix, Inc.
15345 Barranca Parkway
Irvine, CA 92618
U.S.A.
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any
other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law:
PRINTRONIX PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied
warranties in certain transactions, therefore, this statement may not apply to
you.
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors.
Changes are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will
be incorporated in new editions of the publication. Printronix may make
improvements and/or changes in the product(s) described in this publication
at any time without notice.
Any references in this information to non-Printronix Web sites are provided for
convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of
those Web sites. The materials at those Web sites are not part of the
materials for this Printronix product and use of those Web sites is at your own
risk.
282
Appendix G Notices
Any performance data contained herein was determined in a controlled
environment. Therefore, the results obtained in other operating environments
may vary significantly. Some measurements may have been made on
development-level systems and there is no guarantee that these
measurements will be the same on generally available systems. Furthermore,
some measurement may have been estimated through extrapolation. Actual
results may vary. Users of this document should verify the applicable data for
their specific environment.
Information concerning non-Printronix products was obtained from the
suppliers of those products, their published announcements or other publicly
available sources. Printronix has not tested those products and cannot
confirm the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related
to non-Printronix products. Questions on the capabilities of non-Printronix
products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.
Printronix encourages owners of information technology (IT) equipment to
responsibly recycle their equipment when it is no longer needed. Printronix
offers a variety of programs and services to assist equipment owners in
recycling their IT products. Information on these product recycling offerings
can be found on Printronix’s Internet site at http://www.printronix.com.
If you are viewing this information softcopy, the photographs and color
illustrations may not appear.
For online versions of this book, we authorize you to:
•Copy, modify, and print the documentation contained on the media, for
use within your enterprise, provided you reproduce the copyright notice,
all warning statements, and other required statements on each copy or
partial copy.
•Transfer the original unaltered copy of the documentation when you
transfer the related Printronix product (which may be either machines you
own, or programs, if the program’s license terms permit a transfer). You
must, at the same time, destroy all other copies of the documentation.
You are responsible for payment of any taxes, including personal property
taxes, resulting from this authorization.
Your failure to comply with the terms above terminates this authorization.
Upon termination, you must destroy your machine readable documentation.
Before using this information and the product it supports, read the information and
Communication Notices on page 283.
Note!
283
Communication Notices
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.
However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off
and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
•Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
•Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Unauthorized changes or modifications could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Any change or modification to this product voids the user’s authority to
operate it per FCC Part 15 Subpart A Section 15.21 regulations.
RF Exposure
To comply with FCC and IC RF exposure requirements, the device is
approved for operation with a minimum separation distance of 20cm for all
persons.
Co-location
To comply with FCC part 15C and IC RSS 210 requirements, the device must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other transmitter or
antenna other than those allowed by Printronix for this device.
284
Appendix G Communication Notices
This product contains an intentional radiator with the following parameters:
Operating Frequency: 902 to 928 MHz
Typical RF Power: 100 milliwatts
Maximum RF Power: 700 milliwatts
Canada
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003 and
RSS 210.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This device has been designed to operate with the antennas listed below, and
having a maximum gain of –12 dBi. Antennas not included in this list or having
a gain greater than –12 dBi dB are strictly prohibited for use with this device.
The required antenna impedance is 50 ohms.
To reduce potential radio interference to other users, the antenna type and its
gain should be so chosen that the equivalent isotropically radiated power
(e.i.r.p.) is not more than that permitted for successful communication.
CE Notice (European Union)
Marking by the CE symbol indicates compliance of this Printronix system to
the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive of the European Union.
Such marking is indicative that this Printronix system meets the following
technical standards:
•EN 300 220-1 (2000), Electromagnetic Compatibility and Radio Spectrum
Matters; Short Range Devices; Radio equipment to be used in the
25 MHz to 1000 MHz frequency range with power levels ranging up to
500 mW.
•EN 55022 — “Limits and Methods of Measurement of Radio Interference
Characteristics of Information Technology Equipment.”
•EN 55024 — “Electromagnetic Immunity Requirements for Information
Technology Equipment”
•EN 60950 — “Safety of Information Technology Equipment.”
Tested To Comply
With FCC Standards
Printronix SL4M and T4M
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE
285
Printronix cannot accept responsibility for any failure to satisfy the protection
requirements resulting from a non-recommended modification of the product,
including the fitting of non-Printronix option cards.
this product has been tested and found to comply with the limits of Class A
Information Technology Equipment according to European standard
EN 55022. The limits for Class A equipment were derived for commercial and
industrial environments to provide reasonable protection against interference
with licensed communication devices.
CE Symbol
Taiwan
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司、商號或使用者均不得擅
自變更頻率、加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能。
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象
時，應立即停用，並改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用。前項合法通信，指依電信
法規定作業之無線電通信。低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業、科學及醫
療用電波輻射性電機設備之干擾。
China
海拔高度和非热带性气候声明
仅适用于海拔 2000M 以下地区安全使用
仅适用于非热带气候条件下安全使用
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this product may
cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
WARNING
286
Appendix G Software License Agreement
RFID
Intended use: non-specific short range device operating in the band 869.4 to
869.95 MHz for Home and Office environment in E.E.A and Switzerland.
Wireless Ethernet
Intended use: Low Power 802.11b/g radio LAN product operating indoor in
2.4 GHz bands for Home and Office environment in E.E.A and Switzerland.
Software License Agreement
Your printer contains, among other software, Printronix operating software
including, but not limited to the Embedded Configurable Operating System
(the “eCos Software”) as embedded software. The terms of this Agreement
apply only to the eCos Software, and all other embedded software supplied
with the printer. You accept the terms of this Agreement by your initial use of
your printer.
1. Object Code License
Printronix grants you a nonexclusive license to use the Printronix Software,
the eCos Software and all other embedded software (collectively, the
“Embedded Software” or the “Software”) only in conjunction with the printer.
As the rightful possessor of the printer, you may make a reasonable number
of copies of the Software as necessary for backup, configuration, and
restoration of the printer. You must reproduce the copyright notice and any
other legend of ownership on each copy of the Software you make.
You may transfer possession of the Software and its media to another party
only with the transfer of the printer on which the Software is used. If you do
so, you must give the other party a copy of these terms and provide all user
documentation to that party. When you do so, you must destroy any copies of
Software not resident in the printer.
Your license for the Software terminates when you no longer rightfully
possess the printer. No other rights under this license are granted.
2. Source Code
A source code version of eCos Software is available under the terms of a
modified version of the GNU General Public License (GPL) located under
PCM eCos 2.0+ at www.printronix.com. Printronix grants no rights
whatsoever in the source code for the Printronix Software.
287
3. No Warranty
THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON
AN “AS IS” BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION,
WARRANTIES THAT THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS FREE OF
DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS WITH YOU.
SHOULD ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN
ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT RED HAT, PRINTRONIX, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER
OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE.
NO USE OF ANY OF THE EMBEDDED SOFTWARE IS AUTHORIZED
HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
4. Conflicting Terms
You agree that this Agreement provides you no more rights with regards to
warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms with respect to Printronix Inc, or
any contributor to the Embedded Software than that provided by any express
warranty that may be made by Printronix, Inc.
5. Limitation of Liability
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY,
WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT OR
OTHERWISE, SHALL RED HAT, PRINTRONIX, ANY OTHER
CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF THE EMBEDDED
SOFTWARE, OR ANY PART THEREOF, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF
SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO YOU OR ANY OTHER PERSON FOR ANY
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF
ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR
LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR
MALFUNCTION. OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR
LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY
RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY’S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT
APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES SO THAT EXCLUSION
AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. U.S. Government Users
The Embedded Software is a “commercial item,” as that term is defined in 48
C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct 1995), consisting of “commercial computer software” and
“commercial computer software documentation,” as such terms are used in
48 C.F.R 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48
C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End
Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein.
288
Appendix G Software License Agreement
7. Miscellaneous
This Agreement represents the complete agreement concerning subject
matter hereof. If any provision of this Agreement is held to be unenforceable.
This Agreement shall be governed by California law provisions (except to the
extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-law
provisions.
8. eCos Software
eCos is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms
of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation, version 2 or a later.
eCos is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARANTY, without even the implied
warranty of MERCHANT ABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.
You should receive a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
eCos. If not, write to:
Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.
As special exception, if other files instantiate templates or use macros or
inline functions from this file, you could compile this file and link it with other
works to produce work based on this file. This file does not by itself cause the
resulting work to be covered by the GNU General Public License. However,
the source code for this file must be made available in accordance with
section (3) of the GNU General Public License.
This exception does not invalidate any other reasons why work based on this
file might be covered by the GNU General Public License.
Alternative licenses for eCos may be arranged by contacting Red Hat, Inc. at
http://sources.redhat.com/ecos/ecos-license/
289
OpenSSL License
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License
and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses.
In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
/* ==========================================================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this
* software must display the following acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this software without
* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
290
Appendix G Software License Agreement
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ==========================================================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in product, Eric Young should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the routines from the
* library being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must include an
* acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson
* (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
291
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply
* be copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
OpenSSL:
The version of OpenSSL used in the SL/T5R printer was prior to introduction of the Heartbleed
vulnerability that occurred in December 2011. Therefore it is not affected.
WPA Supplicant License
Copyright (c) 2003-2013, Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi> and contributors. All Rights Reserved.
This program is licensed under the BSD license (the one with advertisement clause removed).
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions
and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
3. Neither the name(s) of the above-listed copyright holder(s) nor the names of its contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS
IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
292
Appendix G Limited Software Product Warranty
Limited Software Product Warranty
Printronix, Inc. warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software
will perform in accordance with specifications published by Printronix, Inc.
Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs, errors
and omissions.
Remedy
Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Printronix, Inc. in connection
with the Software is replacement of defective software with a copy of the
same version and revision level.
Disclaimer of Warranties and Limitation of Remedies
1. THE PARTIES AGREE THAT ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND MERCHANTABILITY ARE EXCLUDED.
Printronix, Inc. does not warrant that the functions contained in the
Software will meet your requirements or that the operation of the Software
will be uninterrupted or error free. Printronix, Inc. reserves the right to
make changes and/or improvements in the Software without notice at any
time.
2. IN NO EVENT WILL PRINTRONIX, INC. BE LIABLE FOR LOST
PROFITS, LOST DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTIONS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS PRODUCT, EVEN IF PRINTRONIX, INC. HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED
BY THE ABUSE OR MANIPULATION OF THE SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO
THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
3. Printronix, Inc. will not be liable for any loss or damage caused by delay in
furnishing a Software Product or any other performance under this
Agreement.
4. Our entire liability and your exclusive remedies for our liability of any kind
(including liability for negligence except liability for personal injury caused
solely by our negligence) for the Software Product covered by this
Agreement and all other performance or nonperformance by us under or
related to this Agreement are limited to the remedies specified by this
Agreement.
5. California law governs this Agreement.
293
Termination of License Agreement
This License shall continue until terminated. This license may be terminated
by agreement between you and Printronix, Inc. or by Printronix, Inc. If you fail
to comply with the terms of this License and such failure is not corrected
within thirty (30) days after notice. When this License is terminated, you shall
return to the place you obtained them, the printer and all copies of the
Software and documentation.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights
Use, duplication or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as
set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at
FAR 242.227-7013, subdivision (b) (3) (ii) or subparagraph (c) (1) (ii), as
appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c) (2).
Acknowledgement of Terms and Conditions
YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT,
UNDERSTAND IT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND
CONDITIONS. NEITHER PARTY SHALL BE BOUND BY ANY STATEMENT
OR REPRESENTATION NOT CONTAINED IN THIS AGREEMENT. NO
CHANGE IN THIS AGREEMENT IS EFFECTIVE UNLESS WRITTEN AND
SIGNED BY PROPERLY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES OF EACH
PARTY. BY USING THIS PRINTER, YOU AGREE TO ACCEPT THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
294
Appendix G Limited Software Product Warranty
295
Numerics
1284 Parallel Interface, 56
203 DPI, 215
300 DPI, 215
40V POWER FAIL, 196
A
Acoustic Noise, 225
Adjustments, media width, 42
Admin User Enable, 64
Admin User option, 116
Adv Continuous option, 70
AI 00 Spaces option, 101
Alarm option, 108
Alarms, printer, 195
Andalé Fonts, 229
Auto Calibrate, run, 47
Auto Dump option, 146
Auto Label Width option, 77
Auto Locking option, 112
Auto Map Select option, 75
Auto Save Configuration, 149
Auto Save Feature, 149
Auto Save option, 143
Auto Switching, 53
optional host interfaces, 53
standard host interfaces, 53
Auto Uppercase option, 99
Autowrap option, 98
B
B11 ERROR RAM TEST FAILED, 196
B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING, 196
B13 NOT COMPATIBLE, 196
B22 DECOMPRESS SIZE, 196
B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS CKSUM, 196
BAD NVM CALL 1, 197
BAD NVM CALL 2, 197
BAD NVM CALL 3, 197
BAD NVM CALL 4, 197
BAD NVM CALL A, 197
BAD VFU CHANNEL, 197
Batch Counter option, 115
Bold Chars. option, 114
Bot Line Display option, 116
Boundary Check option, 104
Byte Mode, IEEE 1284 interface, 56
C
C39 Compatbl. option, 103
Cable length
Centronics, 54
RS-232, 59
Cal in Peel Mode option, 89
CALIBRATION FAIL, 197
Cancel Key, 37
Cancel Key option, 109
CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel-Off, 197
CARTRIDGE REMOVED Check Cartridge, 197
Centronics, 54
interface signals, 55
pin assignments, 54
Index
296
Centronics option, 131
Change Printer Settings, 64
Cleaning
cutter option, 179
exterior, 175
interior, 176
Clear Error Log option, 146
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 215
Clip Page option, 80
Command
operation of FILE_IO, 270
Commands
PTX_SETUP, 263
thermal, 271
Communication, IEEE 1284 parallel
(bidirectional), 56
Compatibility Mode, IEEE 1284 interface, 56
Compatibility option, 110
CONFIG command, summary, 269
CONFIGURATION
menu, 141
submenu, 142
Configuration
auto save, 149
loading saved, 155
modify saved, 152
printing, 154
save, 148
specify power-up, 150
Configuration Menu
move within, 61
overview, 65
Configure Printer, 61
Control Panel, 36
Cancel key, 37
Down key, 38
Download Combo key, 39
Enter key, 37
fault indicator, 39
Feed key, 37
Left key, 39
liquid crystal display (LCD), 36
Menu key, 37
Menu Unlock combo key, 39
online indicator, 39
Pause key, 36
Right key, 38
Soft Reset combo key, 39
Up key, 38
Control Print Quality, 182
Controls, 35
Copy Complete, 197
Copying QCMC snapshot image, Quick Change
Memory Cartridge (QCMC), 235
CR Edit option, 100
CSC, 273
Customer Support Center, 273
CUTTER FAULT Check Cutter, 198
Cutter Option, cleaning, 179
D
D50 STATUS CLEARING FLASH, 215
D51 PROGRAMMING FLASH LOADING
PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 215
Data Exchange, 181
Date option, 115
DBCS Character Sets, 229
DBCS Fonts, 229
Define CR code option, 98
Define LF code option, 98
Del Char frm Fls option, 110
Del Char frm RAM option, 110
Del Set frm Fls option, 110
Del Set from RAM option, 111
Delete Config option, 142
Determine Printhead Wear, 182
DIAGNOSTICS
menu, 144
submenu, 145
Diagnostics
Bad NVM Error, 186
E0xx Error, 186
Diagnostics ILLNVM Error, 186
Direct Thermal Printing, 14
Display Intensity option, 115
Display Language option, 108
297
Do FF at TOF option, 102
DO NOT POWER OFF, 216
DO NOT PWR OFF Copying QCMC to Printer, 198
DO NOT PWR OFF Saving QCMC to Printer, 198
Documentation list, 15
Down Key, 38
Download Combo Key, 39
Download Mode, 168
Download TrueType Font to DBCS Through
UTF-8, 169
DOWNLOADER ERROR BEYOND 8MB EMC, 198
DOWNLOADER ERROR EXT FLASH FULL, 198
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH NOT
ERRASED, 198
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH W ADDR
BAD, 199
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH WRITE #1, 198
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH WRITE #2, 198
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH WRITE #3, 199
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH WRITE #4, 199
DOWNLOADER ERROR MAIN FLASH FULL, 199
DOWNLOADER ERROR NO EMC
DETECTED, 199
Downloading Software
Firmware Download Utility, 158
Flash contains Boot Code, 166
NIC, 160
NIC and FTP, 162
Parallel Port, 159
Printronix Windows Driver, 165
Serial Port, 158
USB Port, 164
Downloading TrueType Fonts, 167
DRAM Installed option, 146
E
E00 EXE @ ADDR0 message, 199
E01A TYPE 0x40 message, 200
E01B TYPE 0x60 message, 200
E02 MACHINE CHK message, 200
E03A DSI HASH L message, 200
E03B DSI HASH S message, 200
E03C DSI BAT PL message, 200
E03C DSI BAT PS message, 200
E03E DSI CXIWX message, 200
E03F DSI CXOWX message, 200
E03G DSI ECXIWX message, 200
E03H DSI ECXOWX message, 200
E04A ISI NO TRA message, 200
E04B ISI DIRECT message, 200
E04C ISI PROTEC message, 200
E06 NOT ALIGNED message, 200
E07 ILLEGAL INS message, 200
E08 FLOATINGPNT message, 200
EMC FFS option, 111
EMC FLASH Installed option, 146
EMC NOT FOUND PWR OFF PRINTER, 200
EMULATION
menu, 91
submenus, 97
Emulation Setup option, 97
Emulations overview, 91
Enter Key, 37
Environmental, specifications, 225
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 200
ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM, 200
ERROR INSUFFICIENT DRAM, 201
ERROR INSUFFICIENT FLASH, 201
ERROR OCCURRED CLEARING QUEUES, 201
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE DRAM, 201
ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 202
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 202
ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 202
ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 202
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 202
Errors
Bad NVM, 186
ILL NVM, 186
Errors, E0xx, 186
ETHERNET INITIALIZING, 216
ETHERNET PORT option, 121
ETHERNET READY, 216
ETHERNET RESETTING, 216
ETHERNET SETTING option, 121
Exchange, data, 181
Expanded Font option, 102
298
Expanded Memory Cartridge, 223, 228
Ext Execute Copy option, 101
Extra Bold Char. option, 114
F
Fanfold Media, load, 30
Fault Indicator, 39
Fault Message
40V POWER FAIL, 196
B11 ERROR RAM TEST FAILED, 196
B12 ERROR PROGRAM MISSING, 196
B13 ERROR NOT COMPATIBLE, 196
B22 ERROR DECOMPRESS SIZE, 196
B23 ERROR DECOMPRESS CKSUM, 196
BAD NVM CALL 1, 197
BAD NVM CALL 2, 197
BAD NVM CALL 3, 197
BAD NVM CALL 4, 197
BAD NVM CALL A, 197
BAD VFU CHANNEL, 197
CALIBRATION FAIL, 197
CANNOT CALIBRATE Disable Peel-Off, 197
CARTRIDGE REMOVED Check Cartridge, 197
Copy Complete, 197
CUTTER FAULT Check Cutter, 198
DO NOT PWR OFF Copying QCMC to
Printer, 198
DO NOT PWR OFF Saving QCMC to
Printer, 198
DOWNLOADER ERROR BEYOND 8MB
EMC, 198
DOWNLOADER ERROR EXT FLASH
FULL, 198
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH NOT
ERASED, 198
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH W ADDR
BAD, 199
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH
WRITE #1, 198
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH
WRITE #2, 198
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH
WRITE #3, 199
DOWNLOADER ERROR FLASH
WRITE #4, 199
DOWNLOADER ERROR MAIN FLASH
FULL, 199
DOWNLOADER ERROR NO EMC
DETECTED, 199
E00 EXE @ ADDR0, 199
E01A TYPE 0x40, 200
E01B TYPE 0x60, 200
E02 MACHINE CHK, 200
E03A DSI HASH L, 200
E03B DSI HASH S, 200
E03C DSI BAT PL, 200
E03C DSI BAT PS, 200
E03E DSI CXIWX, 200
E03F DSI CXOWX, 200
E03G DSI ECXIWX, 200
E03H DSI ECXOWX, 200
E04A ISI NO TRA, 200
E04B ISI DIRECT, 200
E04C ISI PROTEC, 200
E06 NOT ALIGNED, 200
E07 ILLEGAL INS, 200
E08 FLOATINGPNT, 200
EMC NOT FOUND PWR OFF PRINTER, 200
ERROR DC PROGRAM NOT VALID, 200
ERROR FLASH DID NOT PROGRAM, 200
ERROR INSUFFICIENT DRAM, 201
ERROR INSUFFICIENT FLASH, 201
ERROR OCCURRED CLEARING
QUEUES, 201
ERROR PROGRAM NEEDS MORE
DRAM, 201
ERROR PROGRAM NOT COMPATIBLE, 202
ERROR PROGRAM NOT VALID, 202
ERROR SHORT AT ADDRESS XXXX, 202
ERROR WRITING TO FLASH, 202
ERROR WRONG CHECKSUM, 202
FILE EXISTS Enable Overwrite, 202
FILE SYS WRITE, 203
FILE SYSTEM FULL Delete Files, 202
FILE SYSTEM FULL File Too Big, 203
FILE SYSTEM FULL Optimize & Reboot, 203
299
GAP NOT DETECTED, 204
H00 PCI SLOT?, 204
H01 PCI J24, 204
Half Speed Mode, 205
INVALID EMC, 205
INVALID FILE SYS, 205
LABEL MISSING, 206
LABEL READY, 206
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 207
LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 207
MEDIA OUT, 207
MEMORY REMOVED, 207
MISSING PRINT HEAD, 208
MODE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH
CUTTER, 208
NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON EMC, 208
NOVRAM ERROR B, 208
NVM HDW FAIL 8, 209
OPTION NOT INSTALLED, 209
PGL ERROR, 209
PRINT HEAD UP, 209
PRINTER HARDWARE NOT
COMPATIBLE, 210
PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL, 210
PRINTHEAD HOT, 210
PROGRAM IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THIS
PRINTER, 210
QCMC DATA ERROR ON QCMC, 210
QCMC DETECTED Copy to Printer?, 210
QCMC DETECTED Save to QCMC?, 210
REWINDER FULL, 210
RFID CNTRY BAD, 211
RFID Comm Err, 211
RFID FW ERR, 211
RFID KIL FIELD, 211
RFID LOCK CMD, 211
RFID TAG FAILURE, 211
RFID TAG MAX RETRY, 211
Ribbon Low, 212
RIBBON OUT, 212
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 212
SERIAL BUFFER OVERFLOW, 212
SERIAL BUFFER OVERRUN, 213
SERIAL FRAMING ERROR, 213
SERIAL PARITY ERROR, 213
SOFTWARE ERROR, 213
WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD, 213
WIRELESS ADAPTER NOT
COMPATIBLE, 214
Fault Message ILL NVM VALUE 5, 205
Fault Message ILL NVM VALUE 6, 205
Fault Message ILL NVM VALUE 7, 205
Fault Messages, 195
Fault Mode, 34
Fault Reprint option, 81
Feature File option, 146
Feed Key, 37
Feed Key Online option, 115
FILE EXISTS Enable Overwrite, 202
FILE SYS WRITE, 203
FILE SYSTEM FULL Delete Files, 202
FILE SYSTEM FULL File Too Big, 203
FILE SYSTEM FULL Optimize & Reboot, 203
Filename extensions not shown in Menus, 172
FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD, 215
Firmware Download Utility, downloading
software, 158
Flash Contains Boot Code, downloading
software, 166
FLASH Installed option, 146
Flash Memory, load, 157
Fonts
Downloading TrueType, 167
TrueType, 167
Forms Handling option, 102
Full Media Rewinder, 227, 243
Full Media Rewinder with 3 Inch Diameter Core
Adapters, 247
G
Gap Length option, 89
GAP NOT DETECTED, 204
Gap Sensing, 46
Gap Windowing option, 88
Gap/Mark Sensor option, 85
Gap/Mark Thresh option, 86
300
H
H00 PCI SLOT?, 204
H01 PCI J24, 204
Half Speed Mode, 205
Hardware options, 227
Head Auto-Cal option, 88
Head On Time option, 147
Head Resolution option, 147
Head Voltage option, 147
Hex Dump Mode option, 146
Hidden Menus, 64
Hor Image Shift option, 72
Horizontal Black Marks, sensing, 45
Host Form Length option, 99
Host interface characteristics, 224
Host Interface option, 121
I
I-2/5 Selection option, 103
IEEE 1284 Interface
Byte mode, 56
Compatibility mode, 56
Nibble mode, 56
signals, 57
IEEE 1284 option, 132
Ignore Mode option, 101
Ignore Text option, 100
ILL NVM VALUE 5, 205
ILL NVM VALUE 6, 205
ILL NVM VALUE 7, 205
Inboard Notches, sensing, 45
Indicator
fault, 39
online, 39
Indicators, 35
Indicators, specifications, 222
Installation, printer, 18
Installing Quick Change Memory Cartridge
(QCMC), 231
Interface options, 229
INTERFACES
menu, 117
submenu, 121
Interfaces, 53
IEEE 1284, 56
INVALID EMC, 205
INVALID FILE SYS, 205
L
Label Length option, 71
LABEL MISSING, 206
Label Missing option, 79
LABEL READY, 206
Label Wait Time option, 79
Label Width option, 72
Label Wrap, 194
Labeling Applications, 171
LCD, 36
Ld Char at PwrUp option, 110
Ld Char from Fls option, 110
Ld Set at PwrUp option, 111
Ld Set from Fls option, 110
Lead PDF Dist option, 104
Left Key, 39
Liquid Crystal Display, 36
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), 36
Load Config, 142
Load Fanfold Media, 30
Load Media, 25, 30
Load Ribbon, 22
Load Roll Media, 25
Load Saved Configuration, 155
Loading Flash Memory, 157
Loading New Firmware on Printer, Quick Change
Memory Cartridge (QCMC), 237
LOADING PROGRAM FROM PORT XX%, 207
LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 216
LOADING PROGRAMINTO FLASH, 207
Locking the Enter key, 37
301
M
Main FFS option, 111
Main Menu, 66
Manual
conventions, 14
related documents, 15
special information, 15
warnings, 15
Manual Calibrate, run, 50
Mark Sensing, 46
Mark TOF Detect option, 91
Max Cache Memory option, 113
Max Cached Char option, 113
Max Font Buffer option, 113
Media, 259
dimensions, 221
load, 25, 30
Printronix, 259
specifications, 220
usage, 260
Media Cutter, 227
Media Cutter, specifications, 223
Media Handling Modes, 40
Media Handling option, 69
MEDIA OUT, 207
Media Profile, run, 48
Media Selection, 16
Media Sensors
different media types, 46
media with gapped liner, 46
media with horizontal black marks, 45
media with inboard notches, 45
media with no label length indicators, 45
positioning, 44
MEDIA SETUP
menu, 68
submenus, 69
Media specifications matrix, 221
Media Thickness Adjustment, 41
Media Types, sensing, 46
Media Width Adjustment, 42
Media wtih Gapped Liner, sensing, 46
MEMORY REMOVED, 207
Memory, specifications, 223
Menu
CONFIGURATION, 141
DIAGNOSTICS, 144
EMULATION, 91
hidden, 64
INTERFACES, 117
main menu configuration, 66
MEDIA SETUP, 68
overview, 65
PRINTER SETUP, 106
select option, 63
SENSOR SETUP, 84
Menu Changes Detected prompt, 149
Menu Key, 37
Menu mode, 34
Menu Unlock Combo Key, 39
Menus, filename extensions not shown, 172
Min Calib Delta option, 89
MISSING PRINT HEAD, 208
MODE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH CUTTER, 208
Modes
media handling, 40
operating, 34
Modify Saved Configurations, 152
N
Name Config option, 143
Nibble Mode, IEEE 1284 interface, 56
NIC and FTP, downloading software, 162
NIC, downloading software, 160
No Label Length Indicators, sensing, 45
NOT ENOUGH SPACE ON EMC, 208
NOVRAM ERROR B, 208
Num Auto Labels option, 78
NVM HDW FAIL 8, 209
O
OCR-A Chars. option, 114
OCR-B Chars. option, 114
Offline Mode, 34
Online Auto-Cal option, 88
Online Indicator, 39
302
Online Mode, 34
Online Status indicator, 36
Operating Modes, 34
Fault, 34
Menu, 34
Offline, 34
Online, 34
Operation of FILE_IO command, 270
Optimize&Reboot option, 112
Optimized Ratio option, 100
OPTION NOT INSTALLED, 209
Optional Features, 12
Optional Host Interfaces, 53
Options
Andalé Fonts, 229
DBCS character sets, 229
DBCS fonts, 229
expanded memory cartridge, 228
full media rewinder, 227, 243
full media rewinder with 3 inch diameter core
adapters, 247
hardware, 227
media cutter, 227
printer, 227
Quick Change Memory Cartridge, 230
real time clock, 228
RFID, 228
standard peel, 227
standard peel with liner rewinder, 227, 252
standard peel without liner rewinder, 240
Orientation option, 73
P
PAA:Status option, 108
Paper Out Thresh option, 86
Parallel Interface, 54
Centronics, 54
IEEE 1284, 56
Parallel Port option, 129
Parallel Port, downloading software, 159
Pause Key, 36
PGL Emulation (Online), 168
PGL Emulation submenus, 98
PGL ERROR, 209
PGL Normal option, 103
Physical Specifications, 225
PI Slew Range option, 100
Pin Assignments, Centronics, 54
PJL Control option, 109
Platen Label Wrap, 194
Position Media Sensors, 44
Power Cord Requirements, 21
Power on IGP/PGL option, 101
Power On Printer, 35
POWER SAVER MODE, 216
Power Saver Time option, 108
Power source and grounding, 224
Power Switch, 35
Power-Up Config option, 142
Power-up Configuration, specify, 150
Power-up State option, 108
Preparser Port option, 105
Print Config option, 142
Print Configuration, 154
Print Direction option, 78
Print Error Log option, 146
Print File List option, 112
PRINT HEAD UP, 209
Print Intensity option, 69
Print Mode option, 69
Print Quality, control, 182
Print Speed option, 69
Printer
alarms, 195
change settings, 64
configure, 61
control panel, 36
controls, 35
exterior cleaning, 175
fault messages, 195
indicators, 35
installation, 18
interior cleaning, 176
model, 11
move within configuration menu, 61
operating modes, 34
303
optional features, 12
options, 227
physical specifications, 225
position media sensors, 44
power cord requirements, 21
power on, 35
power switch, 35
printing process, 14
restore operation, 185
self-test, 180
set configuration parameters, 61
setup, 21
solve problems, 187
standard features, 11
standard interfaces, 53
Status messages, 215
unpack, 17
PRINTER HARDWARE NOT COMPATIBLE, 210
Printer Mgmt option, 138
PRINTER RESET, 215
PRINTER RESETTING, 216
PRINTER SETUP
menu, 106
submenus, 108
Printer tests
barcode, 145
checkerboard, 145
combo test, 145
current config., 145
Ethernet test page, 145
grey, 145
grid, 145
left test, 145
Novram Error Log, 145
RFID report, 145
right test, 145
Printer Tests option, 145
PRINTER UNDER REMOTE CONTROL, 210
Printer Usage option, 146
Printhead
replace, 183
Printhead Alignment, 43
PRINTHEAD HOT, 210
Printhead Pressure Adjustment, 41
PrintHead Usage option, 147
Printhead Wear, 182
Printing Adjustments, media width, 42
Printing Process, 14
direct thermal printing, 14
thermal transfer printing, 14
Printing, specifications, 219
Printronix Media, 259
usage, 260
Printronix Windows Driver, 167
Printronix Windows Driver, downloading
software, 165
Printronix_SETUP Option, overview, 263
Problems, solve, 187
Processing Time, improve, 180
PROGRAM IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THIS
PRINTER, 210
Protect Config option, 142
Ptr On Time option, 146
PTX Setup Parse option, 109
PTX Setup SFCC option, 109
PTX_SETUP, 171
PTX_SETUP commands, 263
PTX_SETUP General Commands, 264
Pwr Save Control option, 108
Pwr Up Action option, 87
Q
QCMC, 230
QCMC DATA ERROR ON QCMC, 210
QCMC DETECTED Copy to Printer?, 210
QCMC DETECTED Save to QCMC?, 210
Quick Change Memory Cartridge (QCMC), 230
copying QCMC snapshot image, 235
installation, 231
loading new firmware on printer, 237
saving printer’s configuration, 233
updating printer configuration, 237
304
R
Rcv. Status Port option, 109
Real Time Clock, 228
Repeat Form Opt option, 104
Replace Printhead, 183
Reset Cfg Names option, 143
Reset Head Data option, 147
Restore Printer To Operation, 185
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 216
Ret. Status Port option, 109
REWINDER FULL, 210
Rewinder, full media, 243
Rewinder, full media with 3 inch diameter core
adapters, 247
RFID, 228
RFID CNTRY BAD, 211
RFID Comm Err, 211
RFID FW ERR, 211
RFID KIL FIELD, 211
RFID LOCK CMD, 211
RFID TAG FAILURE, 211
RFID TAG MAX RETRY, 211
Ribbon
load, 22
Ribbon 8300, 258
Ribbon 8500, 258
Ribbon 8600, 258
Ribbon 8700, 258
specifications, 222
Ribbon Low, 212
Ribbon Low option, 81
RIBBON OUT, 212
Ribbons, 16, 258
usage, 260
Right Key, 38
Roll Media, load, 25
RS-232 Serial Interface, 59
Run Auto Calibrate, 47
Run Auto-Cal option, 85
Run Manual Cal option, 87
Run Manual Calibrate, 50
Run Media Profile, 48
Run Profile option, 86
S
Save Char to Fls option, 110
Save Config, 142
Save Configuration, 148
Save Set to Fls option, 110
Save, auto, 149
Saving Printer’s Configuration, Quick Change
Memory Cartridge (QCMC), 233
Scalable Size option, 102
SECURITY CODE VIOLATION, 212
Select Char option, 102
Select LPI option, 98
Select Menu Option, 63
Select option, 97
Select SFCC option, 99
Select SO Char option, 101
Self-test, printer, 180
Sensed Distance, 86
SENSOR SETUP
menu, 84
submenus, 85
SERIAL BUFFER OVERFLOW, 212
SERIAL BUFFER OVERRUN, 213
SERIAL FRAMING ERROR, 213
Serial Interface, RS-232, 59
SERIAL PARITY ERROR, 213
Serial Port option, 133
Serial Port, downloading software, 158
Set Label Length option, 81
Set Lock Key option, 112
Set Printer Configuration Parameters, 61
Settings, change, 64
Setup Printer, 21
load fanfold media, 30
load ribbon, 22
load roll media, 25
Signals
Centronics Interface, 55
IEEE 1284 Interface, 57
Skip Cmd Prefix option, 100
305
Slash 0 option, 99
Slew Speed Ctrl option, 78
Soft Reset Combo Key, 39
Software Build option, 146
SOFTWARE ERROR, 213
Solve Printer Problems, 187
Special Information, 15
Specifications
acoustic noise, 225
environmental, 225
host interface, 224
media, 220
media cutter, 223
media dimensions, 221
memory, 223
optional expanded memory, 223
physical, 225
power, 224
printing, 219
ribbon, 222
switches, 222
Standard Chars. option, 114
Standard Features, 11
Standard Host Interfaces, 53
Standard Interfaces, 53
Standard Peel, 227
Standard Peel with Liner Rewinder, 227, 252
Standard Peel Without Liner Rewinder, 240
STATUS LOADING FIRMWARE, 216
Status Message
203 DPI, 215
305 DPI, 215
B20 FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD, 215
B21 PRINTER RESET, 215
CLEARING PROGRAM FROM FLASH, 215
D50 STATUS CLEARING FLASH, 215
D51 PROGRAMMING FLASH LOADING
PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 215
DO NOT POWER OFF, 216
ETHERNET INITIALIZING, 216
ETHERNET READY, 216
ETHERNET RESETTING, 216
LOADING PROGRAM INTO FLASH, 216
POWER SAVER MODE, 216
PRINTER RESETTING, 216
RESTORING BOOT CODE, 216
STATUS LOADING FIRMWARE, 216
TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT, 217
THE ENTER KEY IS LOCKED, 217
THE ENTER KEY IS UNLOCKED, 217
To stop Press Enter, 217
Status Messages, 215
Storage Select option, 105
Summary, CONFIG command, 269
Supplies, 258
Supplies Department, 273
Switches, specifications, 222
T
Tall Characters option, 115
Tear Off Adjust option, 71
Technical support, 273
Test Count option, 145
TESTING HARDWARE PLEASE WAIT, 217
THE ENTER KEY IS LOCKED, 217
THE ENTER KEY IS UNLOCKED, 217
Thermal commands, 271
Thermal Consumables, 16
media selection, 16
ribbons, 16
Thermal Printer Technology, 14
Thermal Transfer Printing, 14
Thermal Transfer Ribbons, 258
usage, 260
Threshold Range option, 90
Ticket Save Mode option, 82
To stop Press Enter, 217
TOF Adjust Mode option, 83
TOF Adjust option, 83
TOF Detect Fault option, 82
Troubleshoot, 180
control panel, 187
improve processing time, 180
power failures, 189
print quality, 189
printer operation, 193
306
printer problems, 187
ribbon, 195
TrueType Font, download to DBCS through UTF-8,
169
TrueType Fonts, 167
TrueType Fonts, downloaded, 172
Trunc Dyn Data option, 104
U
Units option, 81
Unlocking the Enter key, 37
Unpack Printer, 17
Up Key, 38
UPC Descenders option, 103
Updating Printer Configuration, Quick Change
Memory Cartridge (QCMC), 237
USB Port option, 132
USB Port, downloading software, 164
Use Label Length option, 90
User-Def Ratio option, 104
Using Downloaded TrueType Fonts, 172
UTF-8, download TrueType Font to DBCS, 169
V
Var Form Adjust option, 100
Var Form Type option, 100
Ver Image Shift option, 72
Vertical Adjust option, 104
W
WAITING FOR PROGRAM DOWNLOAD, 213
Warnings, 15
Windows Driver, 167
WIRELESS ADAPTER NOT COMPATIBLE, 214
WLAN SETTING option, 124
Wrap, label, 194
X
xxx Diagnostics option, 97
251674-001N
*251674-001*

Navigation menu